Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit EL07-799 - WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER MALL - PINKPINK 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL ELO7-799 Parcel No.: Address: Suite No: Tenant: Name: Address: Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: Contractor: Name: doc: EL -4/07 Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 6364200010 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW DESCRIPTION OF WORK: TENANT IMPROVEMENT: ELECTRICAL Permit Center Authorized Signature: WEA SOUTHCENTER LLC 11601 WILSHIRE BLVD , LOS ANGELES CA TIM SCHENK 1120 E 80 ST, STE 211 , BLOOMINGTON MN FARMERS ELECTRIC Address: 30 E HEMLOCK , OTHELLO WA Contractor License No: FARMEE*42509 Value of Electrical: $20,000.00 Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS /AFA Electrical Service provided by: PUGET SOUND ENERGY City..f Tukwila ELECTRICAL PERMIT PINK 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL, STE 1125 , TUKWILA WA Permit Number: Issue Date: Permit Expires On: Phone: Phone: 800 541 -0821 Phone: 509 - 488 -2822 Expiration Date: 07/31/2008 ELO7 -799 04/16/2008 10/13/2008 Fees Collected: $512.50 National Electrical Code Edition: 2005 Date: - l 6 L0 I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction o r the performan of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this electrical permit. Or / %79, ,L7i`--- Date:101.i p Print Name: Ad/el" 12--- - I) .9 r--&-f" "A ',7 iC . - >.---' This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. EL07 -799 Printed: 04 -16 -2008 1: ** *ELECTRICAL * ** doc: Cond -Elec City of Tukwila Parcel No.: 6364200010 Address: 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Suite No: Tenant: PINK Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us 2: A copy of the electrical work permit shall be posted or otherwise made readily accessible to the Electrical Inspector at each work site. 3: Approved plans shall be maintained at the construction site and shall be readily available to the Electrical Inspector. 4: All electrical work shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 - NEC, and requirements for electrical installations, Chapter 296 -46B WAC. 5: When any portion of the electrical installation is to be hidden from view by permanent placement of parts of the building, such equipment shall not be concealed until it has been inspected and approved by the Electrical Inspector. 6: The issuance of an electrical work permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of the provisions of the electrical code or other ordinances of the jurisdiction. Permits or related documentation that presumes to grant this authority are therefore not valid. 7: Any change in the scope of work described by the electrical work permit shall require additional work permits. Where approved plans have been issued, revisions to the plans and additional review may be required. I hereby certify that I have read these conditions and will comply with them as outlined. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other work or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. PERMIT CONDITIONS Permit Number: ELO7 -799 Status: ISSUED Applied Date: 12/21/2007 Issue Date: 04/16/2008 Signature: o l ` % ' /4/% e7 Date: Print Name: AO-yr /- aipee 4 i'/ EL07 -799 Printed: 04 -16 -2008 CITY OF TUKWIfrW Community Development Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Site Address: OSY 5Q t114CErIT (L Tenant Name: Pipit . Type of work: Eh New ❑ Addition ❑ Low Voltage ❑ Generator Property Served by: ❑ Puget Sound Energy ❑ Seattle City Light H:\ApplicationsTorms- Applications On Line \4 -2007 - Electrical Permit Application.doc bh Will service be altered? Yes irt No Type of Use: MEN-4V 11/4e I (.`c rAtc... S/31.ES ❑ Service Change ❑ Fire Alarm Project No. Electrical Permit No. ELECTRICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. * *Please Print ** (For office use only);. Property Owners Name: WEST Ft EL COTIXOttAtlOrl Mailing Address: 11601 1111.5141(4F &(O Fk.032 i Los Brit xes t CA City King Co Assessor's Tax No.: Y10 Z O — 00 ( 0 Suite Number: ( 125 Floor: I New Tenant: Yes ❑..No cc State CONTACT PERSON - Who do we contact when your permit is ready to be issued Name: Tim 504E144 vitetzea-lemtes Day Telephone: 1.800• o62.1 Mailing Address: 1 %2V E• SO • Sr. S4J VE Zll . &caomIrlGrd(4 (f. ' ssq.20 1 City State Zip E -Mail Address: 4i tr15 '. E+' �JO 1'1 e.S . C.��+ -• Fax Number: Q z • 894 • 44 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Mailing Address: City Contact Person: Day Telephone: E -Mail Address: Fax Number: Contractor Registration Number: Expiration Date: State Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 4 2-Or Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Cdfluker C, r(CK EAA 4CAV 5 (t ^- bac./.. I9 r4 _ Prins riAYsrcynmot. , .cmbct - uGwri,tc. co,rirrmcs. Adding more than 50 amps? ❑ Yes Zip Zip ❑ Remodel ri Tenant Improvement ❑ Telecommunication ❑ Temporary Service Page 1 of 2 i Mailing Address: RESIDENTIAL NEW RESIDENTIAL SERVICE ❑ New single family dwellings (including an attached garage) ❑ Garages, pools, spas and outbuildings ❑ Low voltage systems (alarm, furnace thermostat) RESIDENTIAL REMODEL AND SERVICE CHANGES ❑ Service change or alteration $75.00 (no added/altered circuits) ❑ Service change with added/altered circuits $75.00 number of added circuits $10.00 ea ❑ Circuits added/altered without service change $50.00 (up to 5 circuits) ❑ Circuits added/altered without service change $50.00 (6 or more circuits) $7.00 ea ❑ Meter /mast repair $65.00 ❑ Low voltage systems $55.00 (alarm, furnace thermostat) Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not to exceed 90 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR: Signature: - Print Name: 1 f K !C �� Day Telephone: (1 24 $GTI -t z44 t (,<Th�4YUMJ Date Application Accepted: (2_1 n I HMpplications\Forms- Applications On r inekt -2007 - Electrical Permit Application.doc bh $140.00 $75.00 ea $55.00 ea Fees are based on the valuation of the electrical contract. ❑ Temporary service (residential) $58.00 ❑ Temporary service (generator) $75.00 ❑ Manufactured /mobile home service $80.00 (excluding garage or outbuilding) ❑ Carnivals $75.00 Number of concessions $10.00 ea City MULTI - FAMILY AND COMMERCIAL MISCELLANEOUS FEES Date: State Staff Initials: h Zip Date Application Expires: Page 2 of 2 Receipt No.: R08 -02611 Initials: TEM User ID: 1165 Payee: PINNACLE ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description ELECTRICAL PERMIT - NONR City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Payment Cash 58.00 RECEIPT Parcel No.: 6364200010 Permit Number: EL07 -799 Address: 646 SOUTECENTER MALL TUICW Status: ISSUED Suite No: Applied Date: 12/21/2007 Applicant: PINK Issue Date: 04/16/2008 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Account Code Current Pmts 000.322.101.00.0 58.00 Total: $58.00 Payment Amount: 558.00 Payment Date: 07/16/2008 12:46 PM Balance: $0.00 4904 07/16 9710 TOTAL 58.00 doc: Receipt -06 Printed: 07 -16 -2008 Receipt No.: R08 -01202 Payee: FARMERS ELECTRIC City of Tukwila ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description doc: Receipt -06 Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 51018 410.00 ELECTRICAL PERMIT - NONR RECEIPT Parcel No.: 6364200010 Permit Number: EL07 -799 Address: 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 12/21/2007 Applicant: PINK Issue Date: Payment Amount: $410.00 Initials: WER Payment Date: 04/16/2008 11:59 AM User ID: 1655 Balance: $0.00 Account Code Current Pmts 000.322.101.00.0 410.00 Total: $410.00 • • • rJ K: ... . a in._ Printed: 04 -16 -2008 RECEIPT NO: R07 -02842 Initials: JEM User ID: 1165 Payee: ELDER -JONES SET ID: S000000925 SET NAME: Tmp set/Initialized Activities SET TRANSACTIONS: Set Member Amount City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us D07 -482 1,319.55 EL07 -799 102.50 M07 -287 66.36 PG07 -345 39.50 TOTAL: 1,527.91 TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Description Amount Payment Check 50587 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description ELECTRICAL PLAN - NONRES PLAN CHECK - NONRES SET RECEIPT TOTAL: Payment Date: 12/21/2007 Total Payment: 1,527.91 1,527.91 1,527.91 Account Code Current Pmts 000.345.832.00.0 102.50 000/345.830 1,425.41 TOTAL: 1,527.91 6395 12/24 9710 TOTAL 1527.91 Project: ^ /A )/ / Type of Inspection: Addalrgs ;�:O -. 4er ,,� / / ( 1 Date Called: Sppee_cl Instructions. Date Wanted: a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION W- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206)431 -3670 ; COMMENTS: f/AM l oved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. / Qt /2 / /J6N 'Date: ozd n $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: 'Date: COMMENTS: A i r �� II 1-I2 i74VIM LL s FM MA/,ELS' 5/10 d Vol- 7 /9N,64 P//4 Se C-oz-O4 5 3 fw's /N worm r vAiLs 4 Date Called: ,4/ ft VlSif wi i t ,e C- >» Rlr aL sx(4f2c Requester: Phone No: 0/ 7 °/ K . )�, Project: Type of Inspection: l � ZVI; Sc.„... fil / �' Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain'a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 RMIT NO. (206)431 -367 0 Approved per applicable codes. 0 Corrections required prior to approval. JIns // le- l/4� 'Date: 01- 4Y1> $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. (Receipt No.: 'Date: Proje i ik Type of Inspection: Pg Sc- rM / Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: � a 1. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. 8 (206)431 -3670 OMMENTS: 0/4— K',.L/i/t16 6.ot) swo4 p5e41 roved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. J lr5P � "' L/ grtAfini/41,1 Iae: /i /`/ f $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: PidK Type of Inspection: O ©�j Address: 6 044A, Date Called: // Special Instruc ions: Date Wanted: 6/I 0 p.m. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a colt with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (Inspector: 6i1 PERMIT NO. (206)431 - 3670 JJ Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: VA - . t4-401-15 a-w ��� sorer Date: 1 f 'r &Aide El $60.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. (Receipt No.: 'Date: 1.°Pj Proje,/� /Z Type of Inspection: A dr 7 ?/ /4 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: � /�� g Requester: Phone No: k i-07- 7 F5e INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION P-- 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206431-3670 y INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit COMMENTS: ( evA6 s roved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. II nspOrit, / tirt, L iovai $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. (Receipt No.: 'Date: Projecroi< Type of Inspection: / Allcliss: ■•• 50yme-i-Atrt4 47k Date Called: Special Instructions: -- Date Wanted: 1 --M 0 gi Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 14 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 981 88 (206)431-3670 OMMENTS: - t/lliWSM A -4roved per applicable codes. Ei Corrections required prior to approval. lInspece gf T164 ‘ Date: 0 $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: !Date: Projecto Type of Inspe ction: 70P3 Address: t /(/ 9 4/9EfdriA NO-- Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. P.m. Requester: Phone No: AN INSPECTION RECORD INSPECTION NO. Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 1 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 981 88 (206)431-3670 'pproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: #1 01/- IMO AMA /9g6 j fig - )fri-uS - #SC41 A46 .4 Ins 7S : 1 4 -- 419a6# I Date: ■CNOr El $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspection. 'Receipt No.: 'Date: Project: 0 Ailz Type of Inspection: 7 00 i d : nxiNa /94/ Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: / 7 i ;-i-- a. p.m. Requester: Phone No: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit riot-299 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 981 88 (206)431-3670 OMMENTS: / o/4 pproved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. Insp learot: 'Date: I 5// 6/7-imayi Ar/or $58.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call the schedule reinspedion. Receipt No.: 'Date: Project Info Project Address Pink, Date 5/21/2008 4,10) i.'t . South Center, Space -1l. ±• For Building Department Use --r-,1€4,!'R 5, WA 98188 Applicant Name: 4 - Fill out this line on PRJ -SUM Applicant Address: 5 - Fill out this line on PRJ -SUM Applicant Phone: 6 - Fill out this line on PRJ -SUM 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Project - Summary Revised July 2007 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE NFPA 70 - NEC JUL 11 2008 City Of Tukwi LDYN$ 1VI FILE COPY REVISION NO1L RECEIVED EL.. O1 wal 9 9 JUN 03 2008 PERMIT CENTER Project Address Pink! Date 5/21/2008 e.,,4 South Center, Spac_ ■.O_--= For Building Department Use 1 4 ; 142"1"2"8.' WA 98188 Applicant Name: 4 - Fill out this line on PRY -SUM Applicant Address: 5 - Fill out this line on PRY -SUM Applicant Phone: 6 - Fill out this line on PRY -SUM iption '/ New Building ❑ Addition ❑ Alteration ❑ Plans Included Refer to WSEC Section 1513 for controls and commissioning requirements. Option 0 Prescriptive 0 Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis (See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces clearly on plans.) ■ceptions )ox - sec. 1132.3) 0.50 538.0 - No changes are being made to the lighting ❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Occupancy Description Allowed Watts per ft2** Area in ft Allowed x Area Sales Floor /Fitting Rooms 1.50 3247.0 4870.5 Merchandise Wall Display 1.50 2080.0 3120.0 Storage 0.50 538.0 269.0 Enclosed Office 1.00 100.0 100.0 Merchandise Floor Display 1.50 349.0 523.5 m Table 15-1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG -LPA Total Allowed Watts 8883.0 Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed Track Length 90 50.0 4500.0 6 "Recessed Compact Fluorescent (AF /AJ) 13 32.0 416.0 Multiple Semi Recessed 2 Light (CS) 29 52.0 1508.0 15' Incandescent Pendant (P3) 7 60.0 420.0 6" Recessed Compact Fluorescent (AS) 4 32.0 128.0 3" MR16 Accent Light (B(2) 6 .35.0 210.0 4' Surface Mounted Fluorescent Strip (FG) 3 32.0 96.0 16' Surface Mounted Fluorescent Strip (FW) .2 112.0 224.0 6' Surface Mounted Fluorescent Strip (L5) 2 42.0 84.0 4' Bare Fluorescent Strip (F4) 8 32.0 256.0 Pink Neon (NE) Exempt 2 1x4 Surface Mounted Fluorescent (N1E) .1 32.0 32.0 3' Bare Fluorescent Strip (F3) 17 27.0 459.0 4' Surface Mounted Fluorescent Strip (FR) 6 32.0 192.0 4" Adjustable Downlight(BL) 4 32.0 128.0 Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts 8653.0 nresidenttal Energy Code Compliance Forms htinz Wattage Revised July 2007 roposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T -8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if I). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. roposed Watts /Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and iteria as specified in Section 1530. For hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual o be used. For track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, age of current limiting devices or of the transformer. II fixtures. For exempt lighting, note section and exception number, and leave Watts /Fixture blank. Lig hting. 2006 Washington State Motor ,and Transformer: Permit Plant Checklist. ;: LTA CHK` Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Address Pink, !Date 5/21/2008 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and transformer requirements in the 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513) yes 1513.1 Local control /access Schedule with type, indicate locations yes 1513.2 Area controls Maximum limit per switch n.a. 1513.3 Daylight zone control Schedule with type and features, indicate locations n. a. vertical glazing Indicate vertical glazing on plans n.a. overhead glazing Indicate overhead glazing on plans yes 1513.4 Display /exhib /special Indicate separate controls 1513.5 Exterior shut -off Schedule with type and features, indicate location n. a. (a) timer w /backup Indicate location n.a. (b) photocell. Indicate location 1513.6 Inter. auto shut -off Indicate location yes 1513.6.1 (a) occup. sensors Schedule with type and locations yes 1513.6.2 (b) auto. switches Schedule with type and features (back -up, override capability); Indicate size of zone on plans yes 1513.7 Commissioning Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning EXIT SIGNS (Section 1514) yes 1514 IMax. watts 'Indicate watts for each exit sign LIGHTING POWER ALLOWANCE (Section 1530 -1532) yes 1531 Interior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture n.a. 1532 Exterior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture MOTORS (Section 1511) n.a. 1511 Elec motor efficiency MECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency TRANSFORMERS (Section 1540) yes 1540 Transformers !Indicate size and efficiency • 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation: Project Info Project Address Pink, Date 12/12/2007 633 South Center, Space •1125 For Building Department Use Seattle, WA 98188 Applicant Name: 4 - Fill out this line on PRJ -SUM Applicant Address: 5 - Fill out this line on PRJ -SUM Applicant Phone: 6 - Fill out this line on PRJ -SUM Project Description 4870.5 ❑ Plans Induded requirements. J New Building ❑ Addition ❑ Alteration Refer to WSEC Section 1513 for controls and commissioning Compliance Option 0 Prescriptive 0 Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis (See Qualification Checklist (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces clearly on plans.) Alteration Exceptions (check appropriate box - sec. 1132.3) Storage 25.0 J No changes are being made to the lighting ❑ Less than 60% of the fixtures new, installed wattage not increased, & space use not changed. Location (floor /room no.) Occupancy Description Allowed Watts per ft Area in ft Allowed x Area Retail Sales Area n FOR : Sales Floor /Fitting Rooms 1.50 3247.0 4870.5 Retail Sales Area NCE 0 Merchandise Wall Display 1.50 2080.0 3120.0 Storage 25.0 Storage 0.50 538.0 269.0 Office 540.0 Enclosed Office 1.00 75.0 75.0 Retail Sales Area Retai l Sales Ar Merchandise Floor Display 1.50 349.0 523.5 tai es r a ** From Table 15 -1 (over) - document all exceptions on form LTG -LPA Total Allowed Watts 8858.0 Location (floor /room no.) Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed Retail Sales n FOR : 50.0 4200.0 Track Length /' KCB( j EYY REVIEW R eta 1 Sales a 6"Recessed Compact Fluorescent (AF/ NCE 0 32.0 320.0 tai es Area 15" Incandescent Pendant (P4) NF PQ 7 1 - NEC 3 25.0 325.0 Retail Sales Area 15' Incandescent Pendant (P3) 9 60.0 540.0 Retail Sales Area 6" Recessed Compact Fluorescent (A5) F C� 2 Ii 2008 c 32.0 96.0 Retai l Sales Ar 3" MR16 Accent Light (BQ) I i� 35.0 350.0 tai es r a 4' Surface Mounted Fluorescent Strip i l"1111 32.0 96.0 . _A 1 Sales 16' Surface Mounted Fluorescent Strip , 112.0 112.0 _Rectaza Retl Sales Area �M ��� 6' Surface Mounted Fluorescent Strip ( i O l �����' 42.0 84.0 Retail Sales Area 4' Bare Fluorescent Strip (F4) 4 32.0 128.0 Retail Sales Area Pink Neon (NE) Exempt 2 Retail Sales Area 1x4 Surface Mounted Fluorescent (N1E) RECEI En 1 32.0 32.0 Retail Sales Area 3' Bare Fluorescent Strip (F3) C;I TY OF T I(�N ILA 4 27.0 108.0 Retail Sales Area 4' Surface Mounted Fluorescent Strip (FR) DEC 2 1 007 6 32.0 192.0 Retail Sales Area 4" Adjustable Downlight(BL) F'tr1IVlf CL 4 32.0 128.0 Retail Sales Area I Multiple Semi Recessed 2 Light (CS) NTCR 34 52.0 1768.0 Retail Sales Area Neon Sign (NM) 2 Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Total Proposed Watts 8479.0 7 tnterior Lighting Summary LTG -INT 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Proposed Lighting Wattage Revised July 2007 Notes: 1. For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lams in the fixtu ba t ty included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast i do Illy 2. For proposed Watts/Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply e ag other criteria as specified in Section 1530. For hard -wired ballasts only, the default table in the NREC Technical Reference Manual may also be used. For track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, the wattage of current limiting devices or of the transformer. 3. List all fixtures. For exempt lighting, note section and exception number, and leave Watts/Fixture blank. 1 5( 41 41 Lighting, 2006 Washington State Motor, and Transformer Permit Plans Checklist LTG -CHK Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Address Pink, 'Date 12/12/2007 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and transformer requirements in the 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Ene gy Code. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 1513) yes 1513.1 Local control /access Schedule with type, indicate locations yes 1513.2 Area controls Maximum limit per switch n.a. 1513.3 Daylight zone control Schedule with type and features, indicate locations n.a. vertical glazing Indicate vertical glazing on plans n. a. overhead glazing Indicate overhead glazing on plans yes 1513.4 Display /exhib /special Indicate separate controls 1513.5 Exterior shut -off Schedule with type and features, indicate location n.a. (a) timer w /backup Indicate location n.a. (b) photocell. Indicate location 1513.6 Inter. auto shut -off Indicate location yes 1513.6.1 , (a) occup. sensors Schedule with type and locations yes 1513.6.2 (b) auto. switches Schedule with type and features (back -up, override capability); Indicate size of zone on plans yes 1513.7 Commissioning Indicate requirements for lighting controls commissioning EXIT SIGNS (Section 1514) yes I 1514 IMax. watts 'Indicate watts for each exit sign I I LIGHTING POWER ALLOWANCE (Section 1530 -1532) yes 1531 Interior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture n.a. 1532 Exterior Lighting Summary Form Completed and attached. Schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, watts per fixture MOTORS (Section 1511) n.a. I 1511 IElec motor efficiency IMECH -MOT or Equipment Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency I I TRANSFORMERS (Section 1540) yes I 1540 'Transformers 'Indicate size and efficiency I I 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form If "no" is circled for any question, provide explanation: 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form PRJ -SUM Project Summary 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Info Project Address SPACE #1125 633 SOUTECENTER SEATTLE , WA 98188 Applicant Name: LIMITED BRANDS Applicant Address: THREE LIMITED PARKWAY COLUMBUS, OH 43230 Applicant Phone: 814 - 415 -7000 Date 12/20/2007 For Building Department Use FILE COPY REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE NFPA7O -NEC FEB 20 2008 City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA DEC 21 2001 ptrttvtt i G.N 1 ER Revised July 2007 1 1 Fan Equipment Schedule Equip. • ID Brand Name Model No. Mechanical Summary MECH -SUM 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Description Briefly describe mechanical system type and features. 0 Includes Plans_ FAN POWERED VAV SYSTEM 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Drawings must contain notes requireing compliance with commissioning requirements - Section 1416 CFM Revised July 2007 Project Info Project Address SPACE $1125 633 SOUTRCENTER SEATTLE, WA 9818E1 Applicant Name: LIMITED BRANDS Applicant Address: THREE LIMITED PARKWAY COLUMBUS, Oa 43230 Applicant Phone: B14- 415 - 7000. Date 12/20/2007 For Building Dept. Use Compliance Option Q Simple System Q Complex System Q Systems Analysis (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple & complex systems.) Equipment Schedules • The following information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment schedules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill in the required information below. Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name Model No. Capacity Btu /h Total CFM OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER IPLV Location Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name • Model No. Capacity Btu /h Total CFM . OSA cfm or Econo? Input Btuh Output Btuh Efficiency SP HP/BHP Flow Control Location of Service 1 If available. 2 As tested accord ng to Table 14-1A through re . , applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume(VAV), constant volume (CV), or variable speed (VS). 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical Summary back) MECH-SUM System Description See Section 1421 for full description of Simple System qualifications. If Heating /Cooling ❑ Constant vol? Q Air cooled? ❑ Packaged sys? 0 <20,000 Btuh? or Cooling Only: ❑ Split system? ❑ Economizer Included? If Heating Only: ❑ <5000 cfm? 0 <70% outside air? Decision Flowchart Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for Simple System Option. If not, either the Complex System or Systems Analysis Options must be used. System Type Simple System Allowed (section 1420) otal Ca.. wo economize <240,000 Btuh r 10 %? Heating Only ( Reference Section 1421 ) Heating /Cooling or Cooling Only Use Complex Systems (section 1430) Complex Systems Refer to MECH -COMP Mechanical Complex Systems for assistance in determining which Complex Systems requirements are applicable to this project. Project Info Project Address SPACE #1125 Date 12/20/2007 633 souTRCENTER For Building Dept. Use SEATTLE, WA 98188 Applicant Name: LIMITED BRANDS Applicant Address: THREE LIMITED PARKWAY COLUMBUS, OR 43230 Applicant Phone: 814- 415 -7000 Equipment Schedules The following Information is required to be incorporated with the mechanical equipment scneaules on the plans. For projects without plans, fill In the required information below. Cooling Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name Model No. Capacity2 Btu/h 'Total CFM •OSA CFM or Econo? SEER or EER 3 IPLV Location • Washingt State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Description Briefly describe mechanical system type and features. Q Includes Plans 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical `Sum ECH -SUM FAN POWERED VAV SYSTEM Drawings must contain notes requireing compliance with commissioning requirements - Section 1416 Revised July 2007 Compliance Option O Simple System 0 Complex System 0 Systems Analysis (See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Use separate MECH -SUM for simple & complex systems.) Heating Equipment Schedule Equip. ID 'Brand Name Model No. Capacity • Btu/h Total CFM OSA cfm or Econo? Input Btuh Output Btuh Efficiency Fan Equipment Schedule Equip. ID Brand Name Model No. CFM SP HP /BHP Flow Control Location of Service 1 1f available. 2 As tested according to Table 14-IA through 14 3 If required: 4 COP, HSPF Combustion Efficiency, or AFUE, as applicable. 5 Flow control types: variable air volume(VAV), constant volume {CV), or variable speed (VS). Mechanical Summary ECH- U.M System Description See Section 1421 for full description of Simple System qualifications, If Heating /Cooling ❑ Constant vol? Q Air cooled? ❑ Packaged sys? ❑ <20,000 Btuh? or Cooling Only: ❑ Split system? ❑ Economizer included? If Heating Only: ❑ <5000 cfm? ❑ <70% outside air? Decision Flowchart I Use this flowchart to determine if project qualifies for Simple System Option. If not, either the Complex System or Systems Analysis Options must be used. Heating Only 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Use Complex Systems (section 1430) otal Ca ' . wo economize <240,000 Btuh r 10 %? ( Reference Section 1421 Heating /Cooling or Cooling Only Yes ( Reference Section 1423 Simple System __ Allowed (section 1420) 'Complex Systems I Refer to MECH -COMP Mechanical Complex Systems for assistance in determining which Complex Systems requirements are applicable to this project • 1 - t , t . I t • -, - t t t' VII RA i Gel ®J I'I I il 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2007 Project Address SPACE *1125 Date 12/20/2007 The following additional Information Is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for a complex mechanical system for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Use the.checklist as a reference for notes added to the mechanical drawings (see the MECH- CHK checklist for additional system requirements). This information must be on the plans since this is the official record of the permit. Having this information In separate specifications alone is NOT an acceptable alternative. For Building Department Use Applicability • (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component Information Required Location on Plans Building Department Notes ADDITIONAL CHECKLIST ITEMS FOR COMPLEX SYSTEMS ONLY n.a. 1431.1 Field assem. sys. Provide calculations n.a. 1432.1 Setback'& shut -off Indicate separate systems or show isolation devices on plans n. a. 1432.2.1 Air system reset Indicate automatic reset n. a. 1432.2.2 Hydronic System Indicate automatic reset, cooling tower, & heat pump loop valves n.a. 1433 Air Economizer Indicate economizer on equipment schedule or provide calculations to justify exemption and demonstrate 10% higher efficiency for equipment with out economizer. • n.a. 1433 Water Economizer Indicate water economizer and provide calculations if 1433 Exception 2 Is utilized . n.a. 1434 Separate air sys. Indicate separate systems on plans n.a. 1435 Simul. htg. & clg. Indicate that simultaneous heating and cooling is prohibited, unless use of exception is justified n. a. • 1436 Heat recovery Indicate heat recovery on plans; complete and attach heat recovery calculations n.a. 1437 Elec. motor effic. MECH -MOT or Equip. Schedule with hp, rpm, efficiency n.a. 1438 Variable flow sys. Indicate variable flow on fan and pump schedules A. a. 1439.1 Kitchen Hoods Indicate uncooled and unheated make -up air n.a. 1439.2 Fume Hoods Indicate VAV, unheated/uncooled or heat rec. makeup t ion Start Here Section 1411.1 Equlpmen Efficiency Shall Meet Tables 14-IA through 14-1G 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form If "no" is circled for any ques, provide explanation. Decision Flowchart Yes 1411.1 Intermittent Ignition Device & Power Venting or Damper. If Input i' 225,000 Btuh then 1412.6 Modulating or Staged Combustion Controls Required Use this flowchart to determine how the requirements of the Complex Systems Option apply to the project. Refer to the indicated Code sections for more complete information on the requirements. as /Oil Fuma input > 225,000 uh or Gas/0 t Heat apacity of H Heating System > 00,000 Btuh 1411.1 0.75% Maximum Jacket ' Loss Section 1431.1 Calculations of Total On-Site Energy Input & Ouput Required (continued on back) Section 1432.2.1 Supply Air Reset Controls Required Section 1432.2.2 Hot Water Supply Temperature Reset Required 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical= Complex: Systems (back) MEC.H COMP, Revised July 2007 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms 0% Air Econ Provided? Section 1413 Water Cooled w/Water Econo? otal Cig Capacity w/ Water Econo 500 Tons pply Air >5,0 cfm & OSA > 70% otor Incl. gpmt Covr'd by ml 14.1A -14- 1G? EER 10% Better than Code I Cap. cono x480,00 Btuh or 20% of otal Cap. Section 1438 50% Effective Heat Recovery Required Multi-speed Motor in Multi- ed system Yes Yes Yea.* Yes Yes stem or Zon w/ Simultaneous Htg. & Clg.? No No Yes♦ Section 1435 Zone Controls Must Reduce Supply Air Quantity Before Reheating/Recooling Application . Involves Variable Flow? Section 1439.1 No Heating or Cooling for at Least 50% of Make -up Air 0 No—► Yes-► ol Section 1433 Economizer Required I Yes Section 1437 Motors Must Meet Efficiencies In Table 14-4 Yes Section 1438 Variable Flow Devices Required Yes Section 1439.2 One Required: a. 50% VAV Exhaust & Make -up b. 75% Direct Makeup w/ Tempering Only c. Heat Recovery per 1436 d. Constant Volume w/ < 50fpm Face Velocity Yes minimum rwirui.u, -�� -- _•.__._, Open Motors Closed Motors Synchronous Speed (RPM) 3,600 .1,800 • 1,200 3,600 • 1,800 1,200 HP Efficiency (°/) Efficiency.( %) 1.0 - 82.5 80.0 75.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 82.5 84.0 84.0 825 84.0 . 85.5 20 84.0 84.0 85.5 84.0 84.0 86.5 3.0 84.0 86.5 86.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 5.0 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 87.5 7.5 87.5 88.5 88.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 10 88.5 89.5 90.2 89.5 89.5 89.5 15 89.5 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 902 20 90.2 91:0 91.0 902 91.0 • 90.2 25 91.0 91.7 91.7 91.0 924 91.7 30 91.0 92.4 92.4 91.0 92.4 91.7 40 91.7 93.0 93.0 91.7 93.0 93.0 , 50 92.4 93.0 93.0. 92.4 93.0 93.0 60 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.6 93.6 75 93.0 94.1 93.6 93.0 94.1 93.6 100 9E0 94.1 94.1 93.6 94.5 94.1 125 93.6 94.5 94.1 94.5 94.5 94.1 150 9E6 95.0 94.5 94.5 95.0 95.0 200 94.5 95.0 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.0 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energ Code Compliance Form 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Address SPACE $1125 Complete the following for all design A & B squirrel -cage, T -frame induction permanently wired polyphase motors from 1 hp to 200 hp having synchronous speeds of 3600, 1800 or 1200 rpm (unless one of the exceptions below applies), Motor No. or Location HP Type (open /closed) Description of Application or Use Date 12/20/2007 For Building Department Use Synch. Speed Revised July 20.07 Min.Nom. Full load Efficiency Exceptions: 1. Motors in systems designed to use more than one speed of a multi -speed motor. 2. Motors already included in the efficiency requirements for HVAC equipment (Tables 14- IA or 14-1B) . 3. Motors that are an integral part (i.e. not easily removed and replaced) of specialized process equipment (i.e. equipment which requires a special motor, such as an explosion - proof motor). 4. Motors integral to a listed piece of equipment for which no qualifying motor has been approved (i.e. if the only U.L. listing for the equipment is with a less- efficient motor and there is no energy - efficient motor option). For motors claiming an exception, list motor and note which exception applies. 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical Permit Plans Checklist MECH-CHK Revised July 2007 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Project Address The following information is necessary to check a mechanical permit application for compliance with the mechanical requirements in the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Applicability Code (yes, no, n.a.) L Section (Component Information Required HVAC REQUIREMENTS (Sections 1401 -1424) n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. A.R. n .a. n.a. n.a. yes n .a. n.a. n .a. n.a. n.a. R.S. n.a. yes yes n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.a. n.e. n.a. n .a. n .a. n.a. n.a. n .a. n.a. n.a. If" 1411 1411.4 1411.1 1 4412 1412.1 1412.2 1412.3 1412.4 1412.4.1 1412.4.2 1412.5 1412.6 1412.7 1412.8 1422 1423 1413 . 1413.1 1413.1 1413,2 1413.3 1413.4 1414 1414.1 1414.2 1415.1 1416 1416.2.1 1416.2.2 -3 1416.2.4 1416.2.5 1434 1440 1441 1442 1443 1452 1452 1453 1454 1454 ircIed fo SPACE #1125 Equipment performance List heat pumps on schedule Pkg. elec. htg.& clg. Minimum efficiency Combustion htg. HVAC controls Temperature zones Deadband control Humidity control Automatic setback Dampers Optimum Start Heat pump control Combustion htg. Balancing Ventilation Control Thermostat Interlock Economizers Air economizers Air Econo Operation Wtr Econo Operation Water Econo Doc Integrated operation Duct sealing Duct insulation Piping insulation Commissioning Sys.Bal & Func.Test Commissioning Comm. Report Service water htg. Elec. water heater Shut -off controls Pipe Insulation Heat Pump COP Heater Efficiency Pool heater controls Pool covers Pools 90+ degrees Equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency i Indicate intermittent ignition, flue /draft damper & jacket loss Indicate locations on plans Indicate 5 degree deadband minimum Indicate humidistat Indicate thermostat with night setback and 7 diff. day types Indicate damper location and auto. controls & max leakage Indicate optimum start controls Indicate microprocessor on thermostat schedule Indicate modulating or staged control Indicate balancing features on plans Indicate demand control ventilation for high - occupancy areas Indicate thermostat interlock on plans Equipment schedule Indicate 100% capability on schedule Indicate 100% capacity at 45 degF db & 40 deg F wb Indicate clg load & water econoe & clg tower performance Indicate capability for partial cooling Completion Requirements Provide commissioning plan Indicate air and water system balancing & functional testing Indicate O &M manuals, record drawings, staff training Indicate requirements for prelim. & final commissioning report Separate air sys. Mechanical Completed and attached. Equipment schedule with types, Summary Form input/output, efficiency, cfm, hp, economizer yes SERVICE WATER HEATING AND HEATED POOLS (Sections 1440 -1454) Indicate R -10 insulation under tank Indicate automatic shut -off Indicate R -value of insulation on piping Indicate minimum COP of 4.0 Indicate pool heater efficiency Indicate switch and 65 degree control Indicate vapor retardant cover Indicate R -12 pool cover d (Date 12/20/2007 I Location I Building Department on Plans Notes M01.1 indicate sealing necessary Indicate R -value of insulation on duct M01.01 MO2.3 Humidification Indicate direct evap or fog atomization w/ air economizer Ducting systems M01.01 Indicate R -value of insulation on piping. Indicate separate systems on plans no ' is c r any question, provi a explanation: 2006'Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical .Permit Plans Checklist CH -CHK- 2008 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2DD7 Mechanical - General Requirements 1411.1 General: Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the specified rating conditions not less than the values shown in Table 14 -1A through 14 -1G. If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a product covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14-1G, and it includes provisions for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings, then the product shall be listed in the certification program. Gas -fired and oll -fired forced air furnaces with Input ratings > 225,000 Btu /h (65 kW) and all unit heaters shall also have an intermittent ignition or Interrupted device (11D), and have either mechanical draft (Including power venting) or a flue damper. A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for furnaces where combustion air Is drawn from the conditioned space. All furnaces with input ratings > 225,000 Muth (85 kW), including electric furnaces, that are not located within the conditioned space shall have Jacket losses not exceeding 0.75% of the input rating. 1411.2 Rating Conditions: Cooling equipment shall be rated at ARI test conditions and procedures when available. Where no applicable procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating: For combination space and service water heaters with a principal function of providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 -1991. Storage water heaters used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have either an Energy FActor (EF) ore CAE of not less than the following: inclusive, and assumed to be constant throughout the year. 3. .Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system Is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall be provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. It must retain programming and time for a power loss of 10 hours and include an accessible manual override of up to 2 hours. Exceptions: 1412.8 Ventilation Controls for High - Occupancy Areas: Demand control ventilation (DCV) is required for spaces that are larger than 500 ft2, have a design occupancy for ventilation of greater than 40 people for 1000 ft2 of floor area, and are served by systems with one or more of the following: a. An air -side economizer, b. Automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or c. A design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. Exceptions: 1.Systems with energy recovery complying with Section 1438. 2, Multiple -zone systems without direct - digital control of Individual zones communicating with a central control panel. 3. Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. 4, Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement Is less than 1200 cfm. 1413 Air Economizers 1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling. Water economizers shall be capable of providing the total concurrent cooling load served by the conneted terminal equipment lacking airside economizer, at outside air temperatures of 45 ° F dry- bulb /40 wet -bulb and below. For this calculation, all factors including solar and Internal load shall be the same as those used for peak load calculations, except for the outside temperatures. Exception: Water economizers using air- cooled heat rejection equipment may use a 35 ° F dry-bulb outside air temperature for this calculation. This exception is limited to a maximum of 20 tons per building. 1413.2 Documentation: Water economizer plans submitted for approval shall Include the following information: 1. Maximum outside air conditions for which economizer is sized to provide full cooling. 2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside air condition. 3. Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data including model number, flow rate, capacity, entering and leaving temperature in full economizer cooling mode. 1413.3 Integrated Operation: Air economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. Exceptions: 1. Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity less than 85,000 Btu /h and use nonintegrated economizer controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical tooting 1411.4 Packaged Electric Heating and Coo ing Equipment. Packaya° c equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling capacity greater than 20, Btu /h shall be e heat pump. Exception: Unstaffed equipment shaelters or cabinets used solely for personal wireless service facilities. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. Ate minimum, each floor of a building shell be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and cooling, tone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. Exceptions: 1. Special occupancy, special usage, or code requirements where 2. Water - cooled water chillers with waterside economizer. deadband controls are not appropriate. 1413.4 Humidification: If an air economizer is required on a cooling system for 2. Buildings complying with Section 1141.4, if in the proposed building which humidification equipment is to be provided to maintain minimum Indoor energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat setpoints are set to humidity levels, then the humidifier shall be of the adiabatic type (direct evaporative the same temperature between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F media or fog atomization type). Exceptions: 1. Health care facilities where WAG 246 -320 -525 allows only steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final filters. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu/h shall have modulating or staged combustion control. 2. Systems with water economizer 3. 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air recirculation to the central supply fan. 4. Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than 10% of a building's air economizer capacity as measured in cfm. This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand alone or duct mounted humidifiers. 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at the 1414 Ducting Systems same temperature setpolnt. 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures above 1/2 inch 2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (8,826 Btu /h) or less may water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance with Standard RS -1 B. be controlled by readily accessible manual off -hour controls. Extent of sealing required is as follows: 3. Systems controlled by an occupant sensor that Is capable of shutting 1. Static pressure: 1/2 inch to 2 Inches; seal transverse joints. the system off when no occupant is sensed for a period of up to 30 2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches; seal all transverse joints and Systems controlled solely by a manually opera fed timer capable of minutes it longitudinal seams. 4. 3. Static pressure: above 3 inches; seal all transverse joints, longitudinal operating the system for no more than two hours. seams and duct wail penetrations. 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving Duct tape and other pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close automatically when sealant where ducts are designed to operate at static pressures of 1 inch W.C. or the system is off or upon power failure. Stair shaft and elevator shaft smoke relief greater. openings shall be equipped with normally open (fails to open upon loss of power) 1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function as part of The nre alarm he building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior space, shall meet all dampers. These dampers shall remain closed until activated by system or other approved smoke detection system. Exceptions: • 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation. 2. Combustion air intakes. 3. Gravity ( es in hei gh) dampers are acceptable in buildings less supply air units with less than 800 cfm of total supply air capacity shal be insulated than 3 stories of height. to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope. Other outside air 4 outlets In the first story and levels below n are w thlief e first story the duct runs are considered building envelope until they, • three or more stories in height. 1. connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply 2. are isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying T applicable requirements of Chapter. 13. These requirements include insulation installation, moisture control, air leakage, and building envelope insulation levels. Unheated equipment rooms with combustion air louvers must be isolated from the din oned space by insulating Interior surfaces to a minimum of R -11 and any EF CAE < 50 gal storage 0.58 0.71 50 to 70 gal storage 0.57 0.71 > 70 gal storage 0.55 0.70 2006'Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form Mechanical .Permit Plans Checklist CH -CHK- 2008 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Forms Revised July 2DD7 Mechanical - General Requirements 1411.1 General: Equipment shall have a minimum performance at the specified rating conditions not less than the values shown in Table 14 -1A through 14 -1G. If a nationally recognized certification program exists for a product covered in Tables 14 -1A through 14-1G, and it includes provisions for verification and challenge of equipment efficiency ratings, then the product shall be listed in the certification program. Gas -fired and oll -fired forced air furnaces with Input ratings > 225,000 Btu /h (65 kW) and all unit heaters shall also have an intermittent ignition or Interrupted device (11D), and have either mechanical draft (Including power venting) or a flue damper. A vent damper is an acceptable alternative to a flue damper for furnaces where combustion air Is drawn from the conditioned space. All furnaces with input ratings > 225,000 Muth (85 kW), including electric furnaces, that are not located within the conditioned space shall have Jacket losses not exceeding 0.75% of the input rating. 1411.2 Rating Conditions: Cooling equipment shall be rated at ARI test conditions and procedures when available. Where no applicable procedures exist, data shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer. 1411.3 Combination Space and Service Water Heating: For combination space and service water heaters with a principal function of providing space heat, the Combined Annual Efficiency (CAE) may be calculated by using ASHRAE Standard 124 -1991. Storage water heaters used in combination space heat and water heat applications shall have either an Energy FActor (EF) ore CAE of not less than the following: inclusive, and assumed to be constant throughout the year. 3. .Thermostats that require manual changeover between heating and cooling modes. 1412.3 Humidity Controls: If a system Is equipped with a means for adding moisture, a humidistat shall be provided. 1412.4 Setback and Shut -Off: HVAC systems shall be equipped with automatic controls capable of accomplishing a reduction of energy use through control setback or equipment shutdown during periods of non -use or alternate use of the spaces served by the system. The automatic controls shall have a minimum seven -day clock and be capable of being set for seven different day types per week. It must retain programming and time for a power loss of 10 hours and include an accessible manual override of up to 2 hours. Exceptions: 1412.8 Ventilation Controls for High - Occupancy Areas: Demand control ventilation (DCV) is required for spaces that are larger than 500 ft2, have a design occupancy for ventilation of greater than 40 people for 1000 ft2 of floor area, and are served by systems with one or more of the following: a. An air -side economizer, b. Automatic modulating control of the outdoor air damper, or c. A design outdoor airflow greater than 3000 cfm. Exceptions: 1.Systems with energy recovery complying with Section 1438. 2, Multiple -zone systems without direct - digital control of Individual zones communicating with a central control panel. 3. Systems with a design outdoor airflow less than 1200 cfm. 4, Spaces where the supply airflow rate minus any makeup or outgoing transfer air requirement Is less than 1200 cfm. 1413 Air Economizers 1413.1 Operation: Air economizers shall be of automatically modulating outside and return air dampers to provide 100 percent of the design supply air as outside air to reduce or eliminate the need for mechanical cooling. Water economizers shall be capable of providing the total concurrent cooling load served by the conneted terminal equipment lacking airside economizer, at outside air temperatures of 45 ° F dry- bulb /40 wet -bulb and below. For this calculation, all factors including solar and Internal load shall be the same as those used for peak load calculations, except for the outside temperatures. Exception: Water economizers using air- cooled heat rejection equipment may use a 35 ° F dry-bulb outside air temperature for this calculation. This exception is limited to a maximum of 20 tons per building. 1413.2 Documentation: Water economizer plans submitted for approval shall Include the following information: 1. Maximum outside air conditions for which economizer is sized to provide full cooling. 2. Design cooling load to be provided by economizer at this outside air condition. 3. Heat rejection and terminal equipment performance data including model number, flow rate, capacity, entering and leaving temperature in full economizer cooling mode. 1413.3 Integrated Operation: Air economizers shall be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the remainder of the cooling load. Exceptions: 1. Individual, direct expansion units that have a rated capacity less than 85,000 Btu /h and use nonintegrated economizer controls that preclude simultaneous operation of the economizer and mechanical tooting 1411.4 Packaged Electric Heating and Coo ing Equipment. Packaya° c equipment providing both heating and cooling with a total cooling capacity greater than 20, Btu /h shall be e heat pump. Exception: Unstaffed equipment shaelters or cabinets used solely for personal wireless service facilities. 1412 Controls 1412.1 Temperature Controls: Each system shall be provided with at least one temperature control device. Each zone shall be controlled by individual thermostatic controls responding to temperature within the zone. Ate minimum, each floor of a building shell be considered as a separate zone. 1412.2 Deadband Controls: When used to control both comfort heating and cooling, tone thermostatic controls shall be capable of a deadband of at least 5 degrees F within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is shut off or reduced to a minimum. Exceptions: 1. Special occupancy, special usage, or code requirements where 2. Water - cooled water chillers with waterside economizer. deadband controls are not appropriate. 1413.4 Humidification: If an air economizer is required on a cooling system for 2. Buildings complying with Section 1141.4, if in the proposed building which humidification equipment is to be provided to maintain minimum Indoor energy analysis, heating and cooling thermostat setpoints are set to humidity levels, then the humidifier shall be of the adiabatic type (direct evaporative the same temperature between 70 degrees F and 75 degrees F media or fog atomization type). Exceptions: 1. Health care facilities where WAG 246 -320 -525 allows only steam injection humidifiers in ductwork downstream of final filters. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment with a capacity over 225,000 Btu/h shall have modulating or staged combustion control. 2. Systems with water economizer 3. 100% outside air systems with no provisions for air recirculation to the central supply fan. 4. Nonadiabatic humidifiers cumulatively serving no more than 10% of a building's air economizer capacity as measured in cfm. This refers to the system cfm serving rooms with stand alone or duct mounted humidifiers. 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation at the 1414 Ducting Systems same temperature setpolnt. 1414.1 Sealing: Duct work which is designed to operate at pressures above 1/2 inch 2. Equipment with full load demands of 2 kW (8,826 Btu /h) or less may water column static pressure shall be sealed in accordance with Standard RS -1 B. be controlled by readily accessible manual off -hour controls. Extent of sealing required is as follows: 3. Systems controlled by an occupant sensor that Is capable of shutting 1. Static pressure: 1/2 inch to 2 Inches; seal transverse joints. the system off when no occupant is sensed for a period of up to 30 2. Static pressure: 2 inches to 3 inches; seal all transverse joints and Systems controlled solely by a manually opera fed timer capable of minutes it longitudinal seams. 4. 3. Static pressure: above 3 inches; seal all transverse joints, longitudinal operating the system for no more than two hours. seams and duct wail penetrations. 1412.4.1 Dampers: Outside air intakes, exhaust outlets and relief outlets serving Duct tape and other pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary conditioned spaces shall be equipped with dampers which close automatically when sealant where ducts are designed to operate at static pressures of 1 inch W.C. or the system is off or upon power failure. Stair shaft and elevator shaft smoke relief greater. openings shall be equipped with normally open (fails to open upon loss of power) 1414.2 Insulation: Ducts and plenums that are constructed and function as part of The nre alarm he building envelope, by separating interior space from exterior space, shall meet all dampers. These dampers shall remain closed until activated by system or other approved smoke detection system. Exceptions: • 1. Systems serving areas which require continuous operation. 2. Combustion air intakes. 3. Gravity ( es in hei gh) dampers are acceptable in buildings less supply air units with less than 800 cfm of total supply air capacity shal be insulated than 3 stories of height. to a minimum of R -7 and are not considered building envelope. Other outside air 4 outlets In the first story and levels below n are w thlief e first story the duct runs are considered building envelope until they, • three or more stories in height. 1. connect to the heating or cooling equipment, or 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply 2. are isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying T applicable requirements of Chapter. 13. These requirements include insulation installation, moisture control, air leakage, and building envelope insulation levels. Unheated equipment rooms with combustion air louvers must be isolated from the din oned space by insulating Interior surfaces to a minimum of R -11 and any 2006 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code Compliance Form 1412.4.2 Optimum Start Controls: Heating and cooling systems with design supply 2. are Isolated from the exterior with an automatic shut -off damper complying air capacities exceeding 10,000 cfm shall have optimum start controls. Optimum with Section 1412.4.1. start controls shall be designed to automatically adjust the start time of an HVAC Once outside air ducts meat the above listed requirements, any runs within system each day to bring the space to desired occupied temperature levels conditioned space shall comply with Table 14 -5 requirements. immediately before scheduled occupancy. The control algorithm shall, as a Other ducts and plenums shall be thermally Insulated per Table 14 -5. minimum, be a function of the difference between space temperature and occupied Exceptions: setpoint and the amount of time prior to scheduled occupancy. 1. Within the HVAC equipment. 1412.5 Heat Pump Controls: Unitary air cooled heat pumps shall include 2. Exhaust air ducts not subject to condensation. microprocessor controls that minimize supplemental heat usage during start-up, set- 3. Exposed ductwork within a zone that serves that zone. up, and defrost conditions. These controls shall anticipate need for heat and use compression heating as the first stage of heat. Controls shall Indicate when 1415 Piping Systems supplemental heating is being used through visual means (e.g., LED indicators). 1415.1 Insulation: Piping shall be thermally Insulated In accordance with Table 14 -6. 1412.6 Combustion Heating Equipment Controls: Combustion heating equipment Exception: Piping installed within unitary HVAC equipment. with a capacity over 225,000 Btu/h shall have modulating or staged combustion Water pipes outside the conditioned space shall be insulated in accordance with control. 000 Washington State Plumbing Code (WAC 51 -26) EXCEPTIONS: 1. Boilers. 2, Radiant heaters. 1416 Completion Requirements (Refer to NREC Section 1416 and the Building 1412.7 Balancing: Each air supply outlet or air or water terminal device shall have Commissioning Guidelines, published by the Building Commissioning Association, a means for balancing, Including but not limited to, dampers, temperature and for complete text end guidelines for building completion and commissioning pressure test connections and balancing valves. requirements.) ENGINEERING DATA SHEET SEISMIC GUIDELINES FOR USERS OF PRLC / PRLI LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS 1A32007 EXCEL SHEET 1 OF 1 JW 8/23/01 1 A generic type NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R PRLC /PRLI low voltage switchboard assembly was attached to a triaxial seismic simulator to duplicate the effects of an earthquake. 2. When type PRLC /PRLI switchboard is subjected to an earthquake, stress is applied to the foundation. The importance of an adequate foundation to mount the equipment, cannot be under - estimated. In fact, proper mounting is the single most important factor in withstanding a seismic occurrence. The foundation must be designed to withstand the reaction loads imposed on it by the equipment. Foundation embedments shall be designed to transfer the ultimate capacity of the anchor bolts. The ultimate capacity is to be calculated by the architect or consulting engineer. 3. When a PRLC /PRLI switchboard is subjected to an earthquake, it moves. T magnitude of the earthquake. The top of the cabinets experience the greate at top -of- cabinet response motions measured during the seismic tests are list h r reference these to decide what (if any) special flexibility may be needed at it terfaNFPA 70 - C A,1110 ��� . TOP OF CABINET FEB 20 2008 MAGNITUDE OF ACCELERATION RESPONSE MOTION on e City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 4. When a switchboard assembly is separated into groups of vertical sections for shipment, the user must be sure to install the inter -unit tie bolts. Failure to join sections together could result in damage to the equipment during an earthquake. 1.2 G's 4.0 IN. FRT. TO BACK 3.25 IN. SIDE TO SIDE 2.75 IN. VERT. 5. Incoming power cables should be lashed together, and they should be secured to the structure at least every four feet. 6. Any drawout type circuit breaker and /or fuse truck should always remain in the connected position, or they should be secured somewhere remote from the switchboard. 7. The user should provide storage areas to secure mobile pieces of equipment (such as spare breakers or drawout ratchets) away from hinged panels on which relays and other instruments are mounted so they are not damaged during an earthquake. 8. WARNING - Certain types of protective relays have rather delicate operating mechanisms. Especially when set to operate quickly or at low pick -up levels, these relays may cause subsequent spurious circuit breaker operations during the earthquake. 9. Center of Gravity - For seismic calculations, the following dimensions should be used to locate the center of gravity for type PRLC and PRLI low voltage switchboards. These dimensions are applicable for all switchboard lineups. Vertical: 60 inches from base of switchboard From left to right: Geometric center of the switchboard From Front: Two fifths the depth of the switchboard Weights may be found on the equipment drawings provided for the specific project. CORRECTION LTR# FILE COPY RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 06 2008 PERMIT CENTER REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE NFPA70 -NEC FEB 2 0 1008 ' City Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION FILE COPY EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Robert G. Towne, Cutler- Hammer Manager Product Development David D. Roybal, P.E., Cutler- Hammer Fellow Application Engineer Mostafa A. Ahmed, Ph.D., Westinghouse Electric Company Fellow Seismic Qualification Engineer Cutler- Hammer RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 06 2008 PERMIT CENTER CORRECTION LTR# E:7•N EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Table of Contents Part I Part II Part Ili Part IV Part V Part VI Part VII Page 2 About the Authors Abstract and General Overview Seismic Terminology and Earthquake Engineering Seismic Requirements Test Facility and Test Methodology Shared Responsibilities Product Specific Test Summaries References Page 2 3 4 12 21 23 24 27 About the Authors Mr. Robert Towne graduated from the University of Missouri Rolla earning a Bachelor's degree in Electrical Engineering. Bob has been with Cutler- Hammer for 32 years. During that time he has held a variety of engineering & management positions. Bob has worked as an Application Engineer; Product Sales Manager; Market- ing Services Manager; Product Line Manager, and most recently a Product Development Manager. Currently, Bob is coordinating the seismic program including annual testing and equipment certification. Mr. David Roybal received a Bachelor of Science degree in Electrical Engineering from Santa Clara University in 1969. He is a Fellow Application Engineer with the Cutler - Hammer Global Sales and Marketing Division. Mr. Roybal is a senior member of the IEEE and presently the Director of its San Francisco Division, as well as a member of the National Fire Protection Association, National Society of Professional Engineers, the International Association of Electrical Inspectors, and the NEMA California Safety Regulations Advisory Committee. Mr. Roybal was awarded the Westinghouse Order of Merit in 1993 for outstanding service to his customers. Dr. Mostafa A. Ahmed has 29 years of extensive experience in structural and mechanical design and construction of power generating stations. He is a Fellow Engineer with the Westinghouse Electric Company Nuclear Service Division. He is skilled in civil and mechanical engineering practices, dynamic analysis of equipment and structures and finite element analyses. Dr. Ahmed is an expert in equipment seismic qualification and seismic testing. He earned his Bachelor of Science degree in Civil Engineering, from Cairo University, in 1971 and received his M.Sc. and Ph.D. in Structural Mechanics from the University of Pittsburgh in 1981 and 1991. Part I Abstract and General Overview Abstract For the past 10 years, Cutler- Hammer has embarked on a comprehensive program centered around designing and building electrical distribution and control equipment capable of meeting and exceeding the seismic load requirements of the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the California Building Code (CBC), and the Building Officials and Code Adminis- trators (BOCA) International, Inc. Currently, the entire program was updated to also meet the 2000 International Code Council (ICC) and International Building Code (IBC) unified seismic requirements. Cutler- Hammer recognized that the most direct and proven method of assuring seismic performance of electrical equipment is through direct testing on seismic shake tables. More than 100 electrical cabinets and panels were successfully seismically tested on shake tables at Westinghouse and Wyle Test Laborato- ries. The test assemblies were proven to meet and exceed their performance requirements before and immediately after the seismic event. This paper provides a summary of the efforts that went into achieving this objective. Background Although people generally understand the need for seismically acceptable electrical equipment, there is not a clear understanding of the code requirements and how to comply with them. The Uniform Building Code, the California Building Code, the National Building Official & Code Administrators International, and the 2000 International Building Code all emphasize building design require- ments. Electrical equipment and distribution system components are treated as attachments to the building. Since seismic testing contains many special terms and formulations, this paper begins with the definitions of the basics, and then goes on to address the specific factors of meeting the requirements of these codes. We will present the worst case requirements of each code as they apply to electrical distribution equipment then combine them to envelop seismic requirements. We will then proceed to investigate the new International Building Code seismic requirements, explaining how they relate to our previous and current testing. In addition, a comparison with the Bellcore seismic requirements will be made to confirm that the seismic test levels of our equipment are compa- rable with the Bellcore requirements. To establish the seismic acceptability of the equipment, it is necessary to document that the equipment capability meets all code requirements. This is why both the equip- ment requirements and the equipment capability data must be presented on the same basis. For this purpose we will illustrate the use of the "response spectrum" concept. To simplify the application for the user, we have estab- lished the seismic acceptability of all our equipment to the same basic seismic levels and requirements. The equipment is considered acceptable if it can withstand the seismic event and perform its function immediately afterwards. We participate in a cooperative effort with the equipment user, the building designer and the equipment installer to assure that the equipment is correctly mounted to a foundation that can withstand the effects of the earth- quake. Finally, it is the intent of this document to improve communications within the industry by suggesting a uniform seismic specification for all electrical distribution equipment. General Overview Cutler- Hammer electrical distribution & power control equipment has been tested and seismically proven for requirements exceeding the Uniform Building Code (Reference 1), the California Building Code (Reference 2) Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (Reference 3), and the 2000 International Building Code (Reference 4). Cutler- Hammer is highly experienced in the design, manu- facture and seismic certification of electrical distribution equipment to meet the most rigorous seismic standards. Cuter - Hammer continues to conduct a comprehensive program to verify the seismic acceptability of our entire family of electrical equipment for applications requiring certification to the UBC, CBC, BOCA, or IBC requirements. Starting more than 10 years ago, several hundred different assemblies representing all product lines were success- fully tested and verified to seismic levels higher than the maximum seismic requirements specified in the UBC, CBC, BOCA, and IBC. The equipment maintained structural integrity and demonstrated the ability to function before and immediately after the seismic tests. This achievement, an industry first, is consistent with the Cutler- Hammer commitment to produce the most reliable equipment, exceeding present and future requirements. Testing was performed on shake tables at Wyle Test Laboratory in Huntsville, Alabama and the former Westinghouse Advanced Energy Systems Division in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. The seismic tests were con- ducted in accordance with the UBC, CBC, BOCA, and the IBC. The general concepts for seismic test methodology in ANSI /IEEE Standard 344 -1987 (Reference 5) and the applicable procedures from ANSI /IEEE C37.81, Guide for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Metal Enclosed Power Switchgear Assemblies (Reference 6). The equipment was subjected to the following vibration excitation and seismic testing: 1. Resonance searches in all three principal directions in the frequency range of 1 to 50 Hz, using sine sweep motion at the base of the test units with a sweep rate of 1.0 octave per minute. The peak acceleration of the sine wave was designed around 0.2 g. 2. Several seismic tests were conducted at increasingly higher intensity using 30- second long random multi - frequency inputs simultaneously imposed and measured at the base of the cabinet in all three principal directions. The test levels were further increased to envelop the combined code requirements. Additional tests were then conducted to provide ample safety margin. Page 3 EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER - HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES The entire family of Cutler- Hammer electrical equipment has been tested and found acceptable to the UBC, CBC, and BOCA combined seismic levels. Cutler- Hammer leads the industry in using seismic testing to assure acceptabil- ity of the entire family of electrical distribution equipment (See Part VI). Establishing the equipment seismic capability is only the first step. To complete the job, a seismically qualified base and anchors or welds are required to hold the equipment safely to the supporting structure (See Part V.) Page 4 Part II Seismic Terminology and Earthquake Engineering Earthquakes happen all over the world. (See Figure 1). In 1999 alone, at least four severe earthquakes shocked many areas around the world causing considerable loss of life and widespread damage to structures, buildings and equipment. Damage estimates were said to be in the billions of dollars. The problems were further compounded due to the delays in restoring power and service to the effected areas. To restore function of emergency management facilities as quickly as possible, public officials have revised state and local building codes to mandate improved seismic design, not only for buildings themselves, but also for the electrical and mechanical equipment and machinery necessary for the safe occupancy and normal operation of buildings. In an effort to assist in the process, Cutler- Hammer has taken the unique step of performing seismic tests on our various lines of distribution and control products. Users can be sure that their Cutler- Hammer electrical equipment has been designed and tested to withstand even seismic Zone 4 earthquakes. It is important to review a few of the basic principles of earthquake engineering. It is not easy to quantify the severity of an earthquake. Most news reports refer to the magnitude of the earthquake in terms of the open -ended Richter scale. Although most people have heard of the Richter scale, not everyone knows what it means. Here is the original definition. Richter Magnitude M is defined as: M = loglo (A) Where: A is equal to the trace amplitude (in microns) of a Wood- Anderson Seismograph having magnification of 2800, natural period of 0.8 seconds, and a damping coefficient of 80 %, located on firm ground and at a distance of 100 km (62.5 miles) from the earthquake epicenter. Since 1000 microns are equal to 1.0 millimeter and the lo9io (1000) is equal to 3, M could then be redefined as: M = 3 + log10 (Trace Amplitude in mm) Which means to find the magnitude of an earthquake in terms of Richter Scale M, one could proceed as follows: 1. Measure the amplitude of the Wood- Anderson Seismograph in millimeters at a location 62.5 miles from the earthquake's epicenter. 2. Take common logarithm of the amplitude. 3. Add 3 to it. Finally one would have the magnitude M of an earthquake on the Richter scale. 1 Newmark. Fundamentals of Earthquake Engineering, p. 252 (Ref. 7) 2ibid., p. 217 Earthquake Magnitude M (Richter Scale) Maximum Ground Acceleration (% g) Duration of Strong Motion (Seconds) Length of•• Fault Slip (Miles) Equivalent quivalent " Energy (Tons of TNT) 8.5 50 2 G n N GI IA 09 N 70 Million 8 50 13 Million 7.5 45 2.2 Million 7 37 N 400,000 6.5 29 7D,000 6 22 13,000 5.5 15 2,200 5 9 400 To have ng of the earthquake magni- tude, it is helpful to note that a change of one unit in the Richter scale M means a change of 10 in the amplitude of the motion To relate the magnitude M to the energy radiated by the earthquake, Gutenberg and Richter developed the following relationship loglo(Es) = + where: E is the seismic energy of the earthquake and M is the Richter magnitude. A one megaton bomb releases about 5x10 ergs. If all of that energy could be converted into seismic energy (typically only about 2% would be), it would correspond to a magnitude 7.3 earthquake Table 1 relates the earthquake magnitude to other relevant parameters. A change of one unit in the magnitude M means an increase of 1.5 in the right hand side of the equation causing a change of 32 in the total energy of the earthquake E since lo910 (32) = 1.5. Although the magnitude of the earthquake is a direct measure of its severity, there are a number of difficulties in using it for equipment design. Specifically, they include: 1. Maximum displacement alone does not provide necessary information about the frequency content of the motion. Equipment is most susceptible to damage when the earthquake motion contains the equipment's own natural frequencies. 2. Maximum displacement is not necessarily a good measure of the total amount of energy the equipment is subjected to during the earthquake. Velocity is a Figure 1. Seismicity of the Earth, 1961 -1967, ESSA, CGS Epicenters Depths 000 -700 km. s a, t s s • �I RI Y e: • • 4 .ti a• .O Ss IT P IP Table 1 Relationship of Earthquake Magnitude to Other Parameters • Ref: Wiegel, Earthquake Engineering, p. 79, Table 4.3.(Ref 8) •• Ref: Nagel, Earthquake Engineering, p. 77, Table 4.1.(Ref 8) ••• Ref: Newmark, Fundamentals of Earthquake Engineering, p. 218.(Ref. 7) better measure of the energy. 3. Maximum displacement is not a good measure of the force the equipment will experience. Acceleration shows a better correlation to the resultant seismic forces on the equipment and their internals mounted inside structures. 4. Seismographs are usually tuned to frequencies in the 1 to 2 Hz range, which is fine for measuring the magnitude of the earthquake, but does not provide good information about the frequencies typically found in electrical equipment. 3 Wiegel, Earthquake Engineering, p.31 (Ref. 8) 4 Newmark, Fundamentals of Earthquake Engineering, p252 (Ref. 7) a .e T • .� .1. N .t Y• • r P r • • 1s I Page 5 .EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Table 2 The Modified Mercalli Intensity Scale (Abridged and Rewritten by C. F. Richter") Intensity* Definition 1 Not felt. Marginal and long period of large earthquakes. 2 Felt by persons at rest, on upper floors, or favorably placed. 3 Felt indoors. Hanging objects swing. Vibration like passing of light trucks. Duration estimated. May not be recognized as an earthquake. 4 Hanging objects swing. Vibration like passing of heavy trucks; or sensation of a jolt like a heavy ball striking the walls. Standing motor cars rock. Windows, dishes, doors rattle. Glasses clink. Crockery clashes. In the upper range of 4, wooden walls and frames crack. 5 Felt outdoors; direction estimated. Sleepers awakened. Liquids disturbed, some spilled. Small unstable objects displaced or upset. Doors swing, close, open. Shutters, pictures move. Pendulum clocks start, stop, change rate. 6 Felt by all. Many frightened and run outdoors. Persons walk unsteadily. Windows, dishes, glassware broken. Knickknacks, books, and so on, off shelves. Pictures off walls. Furniture moved or overturned. Weak plaster and masonry D cracked. Small bells ring (church, school). Trees, bushes shaken visibly, or heard to rustle. 7 Difficult to stand. Noticed by drivers of motor cars. Hanging objects quiver. Furniture broken. Damage to masonry D including cracks. Weak chimneys broken at roof line. Fall of plaster, loose bricks, stones, tiles, cornices, unbraced parapets, and architectural ornaments. Some cracks in masonry C. Waves on ponds; water turbid with mud. Small slides and caving in along sand or gravel banks. Large bells ring. Concrete irrigation ditches damaged. 8 Steering of motor cars affected. Damage to masonry C; partial collapse. Some damage to masonry B; none to masonry A. Fall of stucco and some masonry walls. Twisting, fall of chimneys, factory stacks, monuments, towers, elevated tanks. Frame houses moved on foundations if not bolted down; loose panel walls thrown out. Decayed piling broken off. Branches broken from trees. Changes in flow or temperature of springs and wells. Cracks in wet ground and on steep slopes. 9 General panic. Masonry D destroyed; masonry C heavily damaged, sometimes with complete collapse; masonry B seriously damaged. General damage to foundations. Frame structures, if not bolted, shifted off foundations. Frames cracked. Conspicuous cracks in ground. In alluviated areas, sand and mud ejected, earthquake fountains, sand craters. 10 Most masonry and frame structures destroyed with their foundations. Some well -built wooden structures and bridges destroyed. Serious damage to dams, dikes, embankments. Large landslides. Water thrown on banks of canals, rivers, lakes, etc. Sand and mud shifted horizontally on beaches and flat land. Rails bent slightly. 11 Rails bent greatly. Underground pipelines completely out of service. 12 Damage nearly total. Large rock masses displaced. Lines of sight and level distorted. Objects thrown into the air. To eliminate many verbal repetitions in the original scale, the following convention has been adopted. Each effect is named at that level of intensity at which it first appears frequently and characteristically. Each effect may be found less strongly, or in fewer instances, at the next lower grade of intensity; more strongly or more often at the next higher grade. A few effects are named at two successive levels to indicate a more gradual increase. Masonry A, 8, C, D. To avoid ambiguity of language, the quality of masonry, brick or otherwise, is specified by the following lettering (which has no connection with the conventional Class A, 8, C construction). Masonry A. Good workmanship, mortar, and design; reinforced, especially laterally and bound together by using steel, concrete, etc.; designed to resist lateral forces. Masonry B. Good workmanship and mortar; reinforced but not designed to resist lateral forces. Masonry C. Ordinary workmanship and mortar; no extreme weaknesses like failing to tie in at corners, but neither reinforced nor designed against horizontal forces. Masonry D. Weak materials, such as adobe; poor mortar; low standards of workmanship; weak horizontally. • Newmark, Fundamentals of Earthquake Engineering, Appendix 2. (Ref. 7) " Intensity is frequently represented by Roman numerals. Page 6 In addition to the magnitude of the earthquake, which mea- sures the amount of energy released, another parameter, the intensity is used to measure the local destructiveness of the earthquakes. Therefore, one earthquake will have a single magnitude, but a number of different intensities, depending on the location of the observers. Most intensity scales are based on personal and subjective observations, including "scary feeling," ability (or inability) to remain stand- ing, as well as the sorts of property damage that occurred. Although quantitative and based on actual damage effects, a review of Table 2 (page 6), the Modified Mercalli (MM) scale reveals that it is too subjective for use in electrical equipment design and qualification. Despite its limitations, the intensity can be quite useful in areas where there are no seismic instruments available to record the earthquake, and it may provide the only consistent way to interpret the diaries and other written accounts of historical earthquakes. When available, the most accurate descriptions of real earth- quake motions are the so- called time history records. A time history record is simply a graph recording of the earthquake motion (it can be in terms of displacement, velocity or ac- celeration) as a function of time. Figures 2 and 3 illustrate time history records for two different earthquakes.e Although Figure 2. El Centro, CA Earthquake of May 18, 1940, NS Component. 0.3g — 02 g 0.1 g -0.1 9 -029 - -0.3 g — 20 — cm sect 0 20 — 40 — 20 — cm — 10 — 0 10 — Displacement Acceleration South North Acceleration Vt South North Displacement 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time, seconds Figure 4. Shake Table Time Histories for Equipment Test. III iWir1:711 1mtiI sI�'1tA'., �.171r71AI 1•1111111111101111/ :mow 7r LVITIL'tn1IW R.M 1111NaaT'LT11IWLiM\'/I1111 A 1 11I /Jill ll/.l►1rIY11IUSIZ ." IAYl• uanllr. -r . a111■mlil'Iraulms a1►1Y 1IIVLR IEYAlMINI SIMBala 1111∎1 MEMITIMIMISillllil NI II / 1 af1NIPIIM momm ■ ■ ■ s s11mwa"owlw gnu mom. 1111 IN and ■ im ■ !1 'TlI,'1t!,11!n111 . F411,11R11111�n' L 1 *"m �T11s,11 .nirIT11'111 .111111d• �� rW W L & l i I NM i I r+la�1 A a1 :vv." 1 1 IIMMI Milli AN, Y L III IIIiIIIllIIIII 20 Seconds quite accurate and readily available soon after the event, these records are not an ideal basis for equipment design and quali- fication. For example, note that the El Centro earthquake accel- eration magnitude reaches 0.3 g several times, and is con- sistently above 0.1 g; while the maximum peak -to -peak displacement is about 30 cm. For the Mexico City earthquake, the acceleration magnitude is generally about 0.01 g, with one peak at about 0.02 g - only about 10% of the El Centro acceleration levels. The maximum peak -to -peak destruction of the Mexico City Earthquake was 60 cm, or about twice the El Centro displacement value. Further noting the difference in the time scale, one immediately realizes that the Mexico City earthquake motions are characterized by much lower frequencies than the El Centro motions. Since acceleration is a function of displacement times the square of the natural circular frequency (for sinusoidal motions), the dominant frequencies of the El Centro 5 ibid., p. 217 6 ibid., Appendix 2 7 ibid., p. 218 9 ibid., p. 227 9 ibid., p. 227 Figure 3. Mexico City Earthquake of July 6, 1964, NS Component. 0.02 g — 0.01 g — 0 -0.01g — g Velocity cm sec- -10 40 — cm 30 20 1 0 0 -10 -20 -30 (Typically gm ground dloplonotoonts aro Inorodbly beau Oni largo duo to fl. aol.,e mall 4 In the I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I 0 10 20 90 40 50 00 70 90 90 100 110 120 130 140 Time, seconds Acceleration Displacement CAL 2.5" Peak/25Lines W /Line CAL 1 g/1 Line Page 7 EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Figure 5. Resonance Curves for Continuous Sine Motion. 5 C 4 0 2 C c 3 N C a N ¢ 2 c E a 0 1 w 0 40 30 z' 20 z 10 0 0 Page 8 Equipment Follows MOM Motion Equipment Amplifies Input Motion Equipment Attenuates Input Motion 2 Figure 6. "Cr Curves - Vibration Magnification vs. Percent of Critical Damping. 5 10 c/c Percent of Critical Damping Frequency Ratio Equipment Response per Unit input Motion as a Function of Frequency Ratio: [ Equipment Natural Frequency Input Motion Frequency , 3 15 earthquake are 4 to 5 times those of the Mexico City earthquake. This illustrates that while the time history is very accurate for any one earthquake, it is difficult to use as the basis for generalizations about other earthquakes. Finally, our last concern in using time history can be illustrated as follows. Figure 4 shows the time history records (both displacement and acceleration forms) for a shake table test run. The question is, would this time history adequately represent the requirements for the earthquakes shown in Figures 2 and 37 Because the acceleration record for the test contains several peaks in the range of 2 to 3 g, clearly there are enough peak accelerations and inertial forces to satisfy the requirements. Similarly, the peak -to -peak displacements are in the range of 60 to 75 cm for the test, which would appear to be sufficient to meet even the Mexico City displacement levels. On the basis of amplitude alone one might believe that the shake table time history (Figure 4) meets both actual earthquake events (Figures 2 and 3). However, there are two critical factors that we have not yet addressed: (a) frequencies present in the required motion versus the frequencies present in the test motion, and (b) the inherent equipment damping. We have already seen that the frequency content makes a big difference in contrasting Figures 2 and 3; frequency is also critically important in establishing equipment qualification. The reason is basic: each piece of electrical equipment is a true structural system as well, having its own characteristics, the lowest of these frequencies is typically in the 4 to 6 Hz range. If the earth- quake has "a lot" of 4 to 6 Hz motion in it, the equipment will respond very strongly, "amplifying" or "resonating" with the earthquake motion. If the earthquake has "a lot" of 10 to 12 Hz motions in it, the equipment will be too flexible to keep up with the higher frequency, so it will tend to sit still or attenuate the earthquake motion. If the earthquake has "a lot" of 1 to 2 Hz motion in it, the equipment will rigidly follow the motion of the floor, neither amplifying nor attenuating the motion. Figure 5 is a so- called resonance curveto and illustrates the three regions of equipment response as a function of the ratio of the equipment natural frequency to the input motion frequency. Figure 7. Basic Vibration Equations. Sinusoidal Harmonic Motion X = A sin wt = Displacement X . dx ■ A w cos wt = Velocity at X = dx = - A w sin wt = Acceleration dt Where W = 2 x Frequency Linear Single- Degree-of-Freedom Oscillator 10 Beer, Vector Mechanics for Engineers Static and Dynamics, p. 771 IRef. 9) Continuous • I I I Sine Motion Q= 100 /(2c/c4 _ I -_ I - - =0 ) ( / 10 Cycles/Beat } 1 \ 1 \ 5 Cycles/Beat Random Vibration -0- X10 X6.8 - =0.125 Typical Earthquake Ground Motion Q = 100 V 2c/c. I % - i - -- I 1 I X5.8 N. X3.1 I I I I EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Figure 5. Resonance Curves for Continuous Sine Motion. 5 C 4 0 2 C c 3 N C a N ¢ 2 c E a 0 1 w 0 40 30 z' 20 z 10 0 0 Page 8 Equipment Follows MOM Motion Equipment Amplifies Input Motion Equipment Attenuates Input Motion 2 Figure 6. "Cr Curves - Vibration Magnification vs. Percent of Critical Damping. 5 10 c/c Percent of Critical Damping Frequency Ratio Equipment Response per Unit input Motion as a Function of Frequency Ratio: [ Equipment Natural Frequency Input Motion Frequency , 3 15 earthquake are 4 to 5 times those of the Mexico City earthquake. This illustrates that while the time history is very accurate for any one earthquake, it is difficult to use as the basis for generalizations about other earthquakes. Finally, our last concern in using time history can be illustrated as follows. Figure 4 shows the time history records (both displacement and acceleration forms) for a shake table test run. The question is, would this time history adequately represent the requirements for the earthquakes shown in Figures 2 and 37 Because the acceleration record for the test contains several peaks in the range of 2 to 3 g, clearly there are enough peak accelerations and inertial forces to satisfy the requirements. Similarly, the peak -to -peak displacements are in the range of 60 to 75 cm for the test, which would appear to be sufficient to meet even the Mexico City displacement levels. On the basis of amplitude alone one might believe that the shake table time history (Figure 4) meets both actual earthquake events (Figures 2 and 3). However, there are two critical factors that we have not yet addressed: (a) frequencies present in the required motion versus the frequencies present in the test motion, and (b) the inherent equipment damping. We have already seen that the frequency content makes a big difference in contrasting Figures 2 and 3; frequency is also critically important in establishing equipment qualification. The reason is basic: each piece of electrical equipment is a true structural system as well, having its own characteristics, the lowest of these frequencies is typically in the 4 to 6 Hz range. If the earth- quake has "a lot" of 4 to 6 Hz motion in it, the equipment will respond very strongly, "amplifying" or "resonating" with the earthquake motion. If the earthquake has "a lot" of 10 to 12 Hz motions in it, the equipment will be too flexible to keep up with the higher frequency, so it will tend to sit still or attenuate the earthquake motion. If the earthquake has "a lot" of 1 to 2 Hz motion in it, the equipment will rigidly follow the motion of the floor, neither amplifying nor attenuating the motion. Figure 5 is a so- called resonance curveto and illustrates the three regions of equipment response as a function of the ratio of the equipment natural frequency to the input motion frequency. Figure 7. Basic Vibration Equations. Sinusoidal Harmonic Motion X = A sin wt = Displacement X . dx ■ A w cos wt = Velocity at X = dx = - A w sin wt = Acceleration dt Where W = 2 x Frequency Linear Single- Degree-of-Freedom Oscillator 10 Beer, Vector Mechanics for Engineers Static and Dynamics, p. 771 IRef. 9) • - - =0 - =0.125 c, c = = 0.25 e, _ ` ` - .0.50 < < ill `` er =1.00 .m EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Figure 5. Resonance Curves for Continuous Sine Motion. 5 C 4 0 2 C c 3 N C a N ¢ 2 c E a 0 1 w 0 40 30 z' 20 z 10 0 0 Page 8 Equipment Follows MOM Motion Equipment Amplifies Input Motion Equipment Attenuates Input Motion 2 Figure 6. "Cr Curves - Vibration Magnification vs. Percent of Critical Damping. 5 10 c/c Percent of Critical Damping Frequency Ratio Equipment Response per Unit input Motion as a Function of Frequency Ratio: [ Equipment Natural Frequency Input Motion Frequency , 3 15 earthquake are 4 to 5 times those of the Mexico City earthquake. This illustrates that while the time history is very accurate for any one earthquake, it is difficult to use as the basis for generalizations about other earthquakes. Finally, our last concern in using time history can be illustrated as follows. Figure 4 shows the time history records (both displacement and acceleration forms) for a shake table test run. The question is, would this time history adequately represent the requirements for the earthquakes shown in Figures 2 and 37 Because the acceleration record for the test contains several peaks in the range of 2 to 3 g, clearly there are enough peak accelerations and inertial forces to satisfy the requirements. Similarly, the peak -to -peak displacements are in the range of 60 to 75 cm for the test, which would appear to be sufficient to meet even the Mexico City displacement levels. On the basis of amplitude alone one might believe that the shake table time history (Figure 4) meets both actual earthquake events (Figures 2 and 3). However, there are two critical factors that we have not yet addressed: (a) frequencies present in the required motion versus the frequencies present in the test motion, and (b) the inherent equipment damping. We have already seen that the frequency content makes a big difference in contrasting Figures 2 and 3; frequency is also critically important in establishing equipment qualification. The reason is basic: each piece of electrical equipment is a true structural system as well, having its own characteristics, the lowest of these frequencies is typically in the 4 to 6 Hz range. If the earth- quake has "a lot" of 4 to 6 Hz motion in it, the equipment will respond very strongly, "amplifying" or "resonating" with the earthquake motion. If the earthquake has "a lot" of 10 to 12 Hz motions in it, the equipment will be too flexible to keep up with the higher frequency, so it will tend to sit still or attenuate the earthquake motion. If the earthquake has "a lot" of 1 to 2 Hz motion in it, the equipment will rigidly follow the motion of the floor, neither amplifying nor attenuating the motion. Figure 5 is a so- called resonance curveto and illustrates the three regions of equipment response as a function of the ratio of the equipment natural frequency to the input motion frequency. Figure 7. Basic Vibration Equations. Sinusoidal Harmonic Motion X = A sin wt = Displacement X . dx ■ A w cos wt = Velocity at X = dx = - A w sin wt = Acceleration dt Where W = 2 x Frequency Linear Single- Degree-of-Freedom Oscillator 10 Beer, Vector Mechanics for Engineers Static and Dynamics, p. 771 IRef. 9) The other important factor that time histories do not address is equipment damping. For simplicity, equipment damping is often expressed as a ratio (C /C of the actual equipment (C) damping to that of a critically damped system (C Frequently, the ratio is expressed as the "percent" of critical damping. As one can see from Figure 5, the damping property of the equipment limits the total amplification that the equipment will experience at resonance. With no damping, the equipment response amplification at resonance increases without bound. With a damping coefficient of 12.5%, however, the equipment response will not exceed 4 times the input motion as it can be seen in Figure 5. This resonance curve is helpful in understanding the equip- ment response to earthquakes. However, these curves, based on continuous sinusoidal input motions, are too conservative for real earthquakes, which have not one, but a number of different frequencies. In addition, these frequen- cies are discontinuous and start and stop several times during the course of the seismic event. Figure 6 illustrates a more useful form for engineers. "The peak magnifica- tion (where the equipment frequency matches the earth- quake frequency), "Q ", is a function of the damping. Each curve represents a different kind of earthquake motion. The "lowest" curve for "Random Motion" (all frequencies present to an equal extent) is generally the most like real earthquake ground motions. Since most electrical equip- ment is mounted on a pad or in another structure, the original earthquake motion is "filtered" by that structure. The equipment therefore experiences so- called "quasi - resonance" effects as the structure to which it is mounted alternately amplifies and attenuates the earthquake mo- tion according to its structural characteristics. The result is the equipment peak amplification lies somewhere be- tween the two extremes - "lower level random motion" response and "higher level continuous sine" response. Figure 8. Equipment Qualification by the Response Spectrum Method when TRS "Envelopes" RRS for All Equipment Natural Frequencies. 6 10 9 B 7 6 4 3 2 1.0 p 0.9 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 2 3 4 8 8 7 8 910 20 30 40 F equency Hz 60 BO 100 Because of these difficulties in universally applying the time history form, engineers have developed a method of comparing earthquake response motions as a function of frequency, rather than time. This is called the acceleration response spectrum method. The "acceleration response spectrum" for any time history is a group of the maximum responses of a series of linear single- degree freedom oscillators (one spring, one mass, one dash that can move linearly in only along one axis) mounted on a surface moving according to time history. Figure 7 depicts one such simple oscillator and its basic equations of motion. Typically the response spectral are plotted over the 1 to 35 Hz frequency range in no less than 16 steps, not exceeding one -third octave. (For example, 1.0, 1.26, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10.0, 12.7, 16.0, 20.0, 25.4, and 32.0 Hz.) The responses of these oscillators are easily determined in real time with today's digital computers, and with fast spectrum analyzers in the test laboratory. However, the monumentally complex and difficult task of communicat- ing earthquake requirements and equipment capabilities has become a routine matter of showing that the equip- ment capability response spectrum as determined by shake table test. During this test, the response spectrum "envelops" the applicable portion of the location where the equipment is to be installed. Applicable portion means enveloping is required at all equipment frequencies. Figure 8 shows a typical Test Response Spectrum (TRS) enveloping the "applicable portion" of the Required Response Spectrum (RRS). Note that enveloping does not occur at 4.5 Hz, but this was acceptable because 4.5 Hz is not an equipment resonant frequency. Enveloping is only necessary at the natural frequencies of the equipment. This really illustrates the value of the simple frequency sweep test to identify the lowest natural frequencies and damping factors associated with the equipment, as an integral part of any equipment seismic testing qualifica- tion program. Caution: It is important to verify that the Required Response Spectrum and the Test Response Spectrum are based on and plotted at the SAME Damping Factor before making the comparison. Now that we have presented the basics of earthquake engineering, we can further discuss several key elements that are very useful in understanding the nature of earthquakes, time history, the Response Spectrum Curve, and their potential effect on electrical cabinets. Although the Richter scale M by itself is of good use in describing earthquake strength, it does not tell much about the energy content of this earthquake or its potential to damage structures and equipment. Basically, the Richter scale M is a displacement indicator rather than an energy or acceleration indicator. Page 9 IIII Zero Period Acceleration Maximum Table Test Motion , M I • 1 Test Response Spectrum frR81 !MOM iI■, -rilli^., tiiI i Mai VA 8pect,um Dip Because Frequency Not 9nporta Is Not en �! E t�Na� Frequency \ sass. a..e7 I - / -. Required Re ports* spacbum -�I■ (RRS) �Rr j . _ Zero Paled Acceleration F Maximum Fleur Motion �� 111111.M....11 =f• ■■�f u ■ ■ ■IIII The other important factor that time histories do not address is equipment damping. For simplicity, equipment damping is often expressed as a ratio (C /C of the actual equipment (C) damping to that of a critically damped system (C Frequently, the ratio is expressed as the "percent" of critical damping. As one can see from Figure 5, the damping property of the equipment limits the total amplification that the equipment will experience at resonance. With no damping, the equipment response amplification at resonance increases without bound. With a damping coefficient of 12.5%, however, the equipment response will not exceed 4 times the input motion as it can be seen in Figure 5. This resonance curve is helpful in understanding the equip- ment response to earthquakes. However, these curves, based on continuous sinusoidal input motions, are too conservative for real earthquakes, which have not one, but a number of different frequencies. In addition, these frequen- cies are discontinuous and start and stop several times during the course of the seismic event. Figure 6 illustrates a more useful form for engineers. "The peak magnifica- tion (where the equipment frequency matches the earth- quake frequency), "Q ", is a function of the damping. Each curve represents a different kind of earthquake motion. The "lowest" curve for "Random Motion" (all frequencies present to an equal extent) is generally the most like real earthquake ground motions. Since most electrical equip- ment is mounted on a pad or in another structure, the original earthquake motion is "filtered" by that structure. The equipment therefore experiences so- called "quasi - resonance" effects as the structure to which it is mounted alternately amplifies and attenuates the earthquake mo- tion according to its structural characteristics. The result is the equipment peak amplification lies somewhere be- tween the two extremes - "lower level random motion" response and "higher level continuous sine" response. Figure 8. Equipment Qualification by the Response Spectrum Method when TRS "Envelopes" RRS for All Equipment Natural Frequencies. 6 10 9 B 7 6 4 3 2 1.0 p 0.9 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 2 3 4 8 8 7 8 910 20 30 40 F equency Hz 60 BO 100 Because of these difficulties in universally applying the time history form, engineers have developed a method of comparing earthquake response motions as a function of frequency, rather than time. This is called the acceleration response spectrum method. The "acceleration response spectrum" for any time history is a group of the maximum responses of a series of linear single- degree freedom oscillators (one spring, one mass, one dash that can move linearly in only along one axis) mounted on a surface moving according to time history. Figure 7 depicts one such simple oscillator and its basic equations of motion. Typically the response spectral are plotted over the 1 to 35 Hz frequency range in no less than 16 steps, not exceeding one -third octave. (For example, 1.0, 1.26, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.2, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3, 8.0, 10.0, 12.7, 16.0, 20.0, 25.4, and 32.0 Hz.) The responses of these oscillators are easily determined in real time with today's digital computers, and with fast spectrum analyzers in the test laboratory. However, the monumentally complex and difficult task of communicat- ing earthquake requirements and equipment capabilities has become a routine matter of showing that the equip- ment capability response spectrum as determined by shake table test. During this test, the response spectrum "envelops" the applicable portion of the location where the equipment is to be installed. Applicable portion means enveloping is required at all equipment frequencies. Figure 8 shows a typical Test Response Spectrum (TRS) enveloping the "applicable portion" of the Required Response Spectrum (RRS). Note that enveloping does not occur at 4.5 Hz, but this was acceptable because 4.5 Hz is not an equipment resonant frequency. Enveloping is only necessary at the natural frequencies of the equipment. This really illustrates the value of the simple frequency sweep test to identify the lowest natural frequencies and damping factors associated with the equipment, as an integral part of any equipment seismic testing qualifica- tion program. Caution: It is important to verify that the Required Response Spectrum and the Test Response Spectrum are based on and plotted at the SAME Damping Factor before making the comparison. Now that we have presented the basics of earthquake engineering, we can further discuss several key elements that are very useful in understanding the nature of earthquakes, time history, the Response Spectrum Curve, and their potential effect on electrical cabinets. Although the Richter scale M by itself is of good use in describing earthquake strength, it does not tell much about the energy content of this earthquake or its potential to damage structures and equipment. Basically, the Richter scale M is a displacement indicator rather than an energy or acceleration indicator. Page 9 .EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES The energy content of an earthquake can best be defined via the Response Spectrum Curve. This curve, however, must be carefully understood and carefully applied. It is, after all, a theoretical curve computed for hypothetical systems. Typical curve sets are shown in Figure 9. The only spectral acceleration magnitude that is directly related to the earthquake event is the maximum response of rigid systems. In earthquake engineering it is understood that rigid systems are those with no resonance frequencies below 33 Hz and therefore considered to have zero period of vibration. Since a rigid system will not amplify the motion of the earthquake, its maximum response acceleration is equal to the maximum acceleration of the earthquake time history. As a result the "tail end" of the Response Spectrum Curve at the high frequency end (which is usually called Zero Period Acceleration or ZPA in short) directly defines the maximum acceleration of the earthquake time history. It does not depend on the damping properties of the equip- ment. In other words, no matter how much the equipment damping is, the ZPA is always the same and equal to the maximum acceleration in the earthquake time history. All other spectral accelerations are mathematically possible if and only if the system frequencies match the frequencies of the earthquake motion. In other words, this curve tells the engineer that it is possible for a piece of equipment to experience the spectral acceleration defined in the curve, Figure 10. Tri -Axle Shake Table Page 10 Switchgear Assembly 86" Side -to -Side Base Motion Figure 9. Response Spectrum Curve 1 £ 1.3 I Y � • 2 2 2 2 A 2 2 .r 2 212 Vertical Base Motion sr— /ISM =W Isis\. — =MUIR IMIWAMMINVAMMUMMEM moon r/_w.uIIHI- INIiii Amirmiumluo■m11111 7% Damping, 1.25 g Peak Acceleration Zero Period Acceleration (ZPA), Equal to 0.6 g I 1 1 1 1111 2% Damping, 2.4 g Peak Acceleration 5% Damping, 1.4 g Peak Acceleration t O m d011/0 • 1.110 Frequency Hz if the equipment has a dominant resonance frequency matching the frequency on the response spectrum curve. One must understand that the damping properties of a system are a direct indication of the system's ability or inability to dissipate the earthquake energy. This is very important and must be clearly understood. To further explain the effect of damping properties on the seismic response of systems, let us assume that two cabinets 90" 4x36 " Front -to -Back Base Motion 20 30 30 SO 01700.100100 Figure 11. Response Spectrum Curve, 5% Damping Curves e 1; x .r Eli Frequency Hz were similarly designed and built but with one exception: one cabinet is a welded structure while the other cabinet is a bolted structure. Other than that, the cabinets are identical in design, mounting and weight. Should both cabi- nets be subjected to an earthquake motion, one immediately can conclude that the structural elements in the bolted cabinet will move relative to each other, causing friction, noise, etc., ultimately causing the seismic energy to dissi- pate much faster than the welded cabinet. In other words, the bolted cabinet will damp the energy much quicker than the welded cabinet, reducing the time for the seismic response to build up. This is the reason why the Response Spectrum Curve is usu- ally computed and plotted for different damping properties — typically 1 %, 2 %, 3 %, 5% and 7 %, etc. We must recognize that all resultant curves on the Response Spectrum chart are produced as a result of the same earthquake time history input motion, see Figure 9. It is obvious that the result and response will be higher for systems with lower damping properties, and lower for systems with higher damping. Now, we are in a position to state a good and very useful rule: the higher the damping of the equipment the lower its response curve, and obviously the lower the damping coeffi- cient of the equipment the higher its response curve. To further demonstrate the use of Response Spectrum Curve, let us consider a simple example. Suppose we have a switchgear section mounted to a tri -axial shake table, Figure 10. The section is then subjected to the base seismic Response Spectrum shown in Figure 11. The switchgear section has a dominant natural frequency of 6 Hz in the side -to -side direction, 10 Hz in the front -to- back direction and 55 Hz in the vertical direction. The assembly is a bolted structure with a 5% damping coefficient. If the switchgear assembly is subjected to shaking levels that could produce RRS, shown in Figure 11, one can quickly determine that the cabinet will amplify the base motion and could experience a 1.5 g acceleration in the side -to -side, a 2.0 g in the front -to -back direction, and a 0.9 g in the vertical direction. The engineer may then proceed to compute the resultant forces and moments on the structural elements and internal components. If one engineer desires to design the cabinet foundation, he /she may proceed to apply these accelerations at the cabinet Center of Gravity (C.G.) and multiply them with the total mass of the equipment. At this point, we would account for cross - coupling effects and close -mode contributions. Next, we would then proceed to determine the resultant moments, forces and shear on the mounting bolts and weld. Only the acceleration associated with the cabinet domi- nant natural frequencies need to be selected from the spectrum curves. For example, the front -to -back direction RRS has a peak spectral acceleration (3.2 g) in the frequency range 1.5 to 3 Hz. This acceleration has little or no effect on the cabinet since the cabinet front -to -back frequencies of 10Hz do not coincide with this frequency range (1.5 to 3Hz). A good engineering practice is then to design equipment with natural frequencies that are not matching (in resonance or harmony) the frequencies in the earthquake time history. Since most earthquakes tend to include low frequencies (1 to 3 Hz), Cutler- Hammer engineers understood this phenomenon and proceeded to design equipment with resonance frequencies above that. All Cutler- Hammer equipment is designed with frequencies above 3.2 Hz and will have minimal tendency to amplify earthquake motion. This is further discussed when developing the seismic requirements in the next section, Part 111. Page 11 • Front to -Back Sei emlc Basa Input i... m1 Side -to -Side Seismic Bass Input II MOM is Vertical Seismic Base nput M� - -ii i ;li -I i i 0.1 1 a 4 2 .2 11i1 i 4 e e iern a • e1 tl00Mal Figure 11. Response Spectrum Curve, 5% Damping Curves e 1; x .r Eli Frequency Hz were similarly designed and built but with one exception: one cabinet is a welded structure while the other cabinet is a bolted structure. Other than that, the cabinets are identical in design, mounting and weight. Should both cabi- nets be subjected to an earthquake motion, one immediately can conclude that the structural elements in the bolted cabinet will move relative to each other, causing friction, noise, etc., ultimately causing the seismic energy to dissi- pate much faster than the welded cabinet. In other words, the bolted cabinet will damp the energy much quicker than the welded cabinet, reducing the time for the seismic response to build up. This is the reason why the Response Spectrum Curve is usu- ally computed and plotted for different damping properties — typically 1 %, 2 %, 3 %, 5% and 7 %, etc. We must recognize that all resultant curves on the Response Spectrum chart are produced as a result of the same earthquake time history input motion, see Figure 9. It is obvious that the result and response will be higher for systems with lower damping properties, and lower for systems with higher damping. Now, we are in a position to state a good and very useful rule: the higher the damping of the equipment the lower its response curve, and obviously the lower the damping coeffi- cient of the equipment the higher its response curve. To further demonstrate the use of Response Spectrum Curve, let us consider a simple example. Suppose we have a switchgear section mounted to a tri -axial shake table, Figure 10. The section is then subjected to the base seismic Response Spectrum shown in Figure 11. The switchgear section has a dominant natural frequency of 6 Hz in the side -to -side direction, 10 Hz in the front -to- back direction and 55 Hz in the vertical direction. The assembly is a bolted structure with a 5% damping coefficient. If the switchgear assembly is subjected to shaking levels that could produce RRS, shown in Figure 11, one can quickly determine that the cabinet will amplify the base motion and could experience a 1.5 g acceleration in the side -to -side, a 2.0 g in the front -to -back direction, and a 0.9 g in the vertical direction. The engineer may then proceed to compute the resultant forces and moments on the structural elements and internal components. If one engineer desires to design the cabinet foundation, he /she may proceed to apply these accelerations at the cabinet Center of Gravity (C.G.) and multiply them with the total mass of the equipment. At this point, we would account for cross - coupling effects and close -mode contributions. Next, we would then proceed to determine the resultant moments, forces and shear on the mounting bolts and weld. Only the acceleration associated with the cabinet domi- nant natural frequencies need to be selected from the spectrum curves. For example, the front -to -back direction RRS has a peak spectral acceleration (3.2 g) in the frequency range 1.5 to 3 Hz. This acceleration has little or no effect on the cabinet since the cabinet front -to -back frequencies of 10Hz do not coincide with this frequency range (1.5 to 3Hz). A good engineering practice is then to design equipment with natural frequencies that are not matching (in resonance or harmony) the frequencies in the earthquake time history. Since most earthquakes tend to include low frequencies (1 to 3 Hz), Cutler- Hammer engineers understood this phenomenon and proceeded to design equipment with resonance frequencies above that. All Cutler- Hammer equipment is designed with frequencies above 3.2 Hz and will have minimal tendency to amplify earthquake motion. This is further discussed when developing the seismic requirements in the next section, Part 111. Page 11 � Alaska 4 . 4' a/ Hawaii d f Aleutian Islands 1 r Puerto Rico C : 2 1 /� a .EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Part 111 Seismic Requirements Consistent with Cutler- Hammer's commitment to total quality and producing equipment that exceeds present and future requirements, products have been designed, manufactured, and seismically tested to meet the most rigorous seismic standards. Uniform Building Code (UBC), (Reference 1) The 1997 Uniform Building Code, Chapter 16 of Division IV- Earthquake Design, requires that structures and portions of structures shall be designed to withstand the seismic ground motion specified in the codes. Section 1632 of the codes - Lateral Force on Elements of Structures, Nonstructural Components and Equipment Supported by Structures, and under subsection Section 1632.1: General, states that: "Elements of structures and their attachments, permanent nonstructural components and their attach- ments, and the attachments for permanent equipment supported by a structure shall be designed to resist the total design seismic forces prescribed in Section 1632.2." Section 1632.2, Design for Total Lateral Force, specifies that the total design lateral static seismic force, F is defined as (see equation 32 -1 in code, page 2 -18): F 4.0C Figure 12. Seismic Zone Map of the United States. Page 12 Where: Uniform Building Code Seismic Zones C is the Seismic Coefficient for Zone 4, Table 16 -Q. It is equal to a maximum of 0.44 N where N is Near Source Factor and is equal to a maximum of 1.5 (see Table 16 - S, page 2 - 35). The seismic Zone Map of the United States is shown in Figure 12 (Figure 16 - of the UBC, Chapter 16). C is taken equal to the maximum of 0.44 x 1.5 = 0.66 I is the Seismic Importance Factor (Table 16 -K, page 2- 30). It is taken as maximum and equal to 1.5 W is the Equipment Operating Weight Therefore, the maximum theoretical static seismic loads (including all the conservatism possible) are: F = 4.0 x (0.44 x 1.5) x 1.5 x 1N The maximum theoretical acceleration associated with the static load is then equal to: Max. Theoretical Spectral Accel. = F = 3.96 g The codes state that the design lateral accelerations and resultant loads, determined above, are static loads to be distributed in proportion to the mass distribution of the element or component. Therefore, assuming a uniformly distributed mass, the static loads computed in the above formula are imposed at the C.G. or at conservatively one half the height of the equipment from its base. No further information is provided regarding how the equipment could be tested in this configuration to these static loads. No damage Minor damage Moderate damage 2B Moderate damage Major damage Those areas within Zone 3 determined by the proximity to certain major au is One may proceed as follows: a. determine the location of the center of gravity b. physically connect it to a forcing mechanism c. proceed to push the equipment until the total lateral force is reached d. observe the results e. repeat this process in the other two remaining directions This approach, however, will not truly subject the equipment to seismic vibration nor will it confirm the equipment seismic acceptability. It will not cause the equipment to vibrate or the internals to move relative to each other. Basically, this approach may be useful only in confirming the mounting configurations of the equipment. The codes do not supply a formulation for the required seismic loads at the base for actual test purposes. To develop these loads based on the C.G. loads described above, the load requirements would need to be determined. Test data of motor control centers; switchgear assemblies; liquid and dry-type transformers; transfer switch cabinets; Ampgard assemblies; and other products, clearly indicate that base supported electrical equipment tends to vibrate in its natural dominant frequencies as a free cantilever beam supported at the bottom and free at the top. The seismic response at the middle point of the equipment close to its C.G. is at least 50% higher than the floor input at the equipment natural frequency. Therefore, the base forces associated with the static loads at the C.G. of the equipment could be computed as: F (at the base) = (4.0 x 0.66 x 1.5 ) /1.5 Peak theoretical acceleration at the base is then equal to: 3.96 g/l.5 = 2.64 W This is the equivalent force at the base. Along with this lateral force theoretical formulation, the codes provide the Design Response Spectrum, Figure 13, for the Design Basis Ground Motion (see Section 1627, pages 2 -9, and Figure 16 -3, pages 2 -38 of the codes). The peak spectral acceleration is equal to 2.5 x C C was defined as the Seismic Coefficient for the Seismic Zones and is taken equal to the maximum number possible in the tables, 1.5 x 0.44 = 0.66. The peak spectral acceleration is then computed equal to 2.5 x 0.66 = 1.65 g. This, together with the maximum theoretical acceleration (which was computed above based on the lateral force requirements) provide a conservative average of (1.65 + 2.64) / 2 = 2.15 g. This number is considered to be the peak spectral acceleration for the equipment base motion. The Zero Period Acceleration (ZPA) is defined in Figure 13 equal to C C was computed maximum of 0.66. Since the average peak acceleration we computed (2.15 g) is higher than the code requirements (1.65 g), the ZPA can now be normalized to the higher peak accelera- tion. The maximum ZPA is equal to: ZPA =0.66x2.15/1.65 =0.868 At low frequencies, the code defines the spectral accelera- tion equal to CST. C„ is defined as a seismic coefficient which relates the Seismic Zones with the Soil Profile Type and has a maximum value of 0.96 N (see Table 16 -R, pages 2 -35 of the code). N„ is defined as the Near Source Factor and is equal to a maximum of 1.5 (see Table 16 -T, pages 2 -35 of the code). This produces a maximum value of C equal to 0.66 x 1.5 = 1.0. As shown in Figure 13, T and T can now be computed as follows: T =C 1.0/(2.5x0.66) = 0.46 seconds or 2.15 Hz T = 0.2 T = 0.2 x 0.46 = 0.09 seconds or 11 Hz At high periods of vibration, and close to zero frequencies, the spectral acceleration is equal to 0.5 x C = 0.5 x 0.66 = 0.33 g. The complete Response Spectrum Curve now can be defined. The curve starts at 0.33 g at 1.0 Hz, linearly increases to 2.15 g at 2.15 Hz (T The peak spectral accelerations then covers a wide band of frequencies up to 11 Hz (T then gradually decreases to 0.86 g (ZPA) at 33 Hz. This curve represents the complete 1997 UBC Design Response Spectrum. California Building Code, (Reference 2) California Building Code adopted the 1997 UBC as the CBC -Title 24. The seismic requirements are basically the same as described in the UBC. When considering the maximum seismic requirements, the UBC and CBC are basically identical. Again, as in the UBC, the Response Spectrum Curve starts at 0.33 g at 1.0 Hz, linearly increases to 2.15 g at 2.15 Hz (T The peak spectral accelerations then cover a wide band of frequencies up to 11 Hz (T then gradually decrease to 0.86 g (ZPA) at 33 Hz. Figure 13. Response Spectrum Curve 3 is I ( t I i T 2.5C T. Period (Seconds) CONTROL PERIODS T = C,I2.5C T = 0.2T C,JT Page 13 Nasky _� 0.05 � eill.:3° o.1s 0.30 0.30 0 - / � . 0.10 0.20�� /0.40 0.40, 0.40 0 QO/ Hawaii 0.05 d 0.10 0.15 0.20 C) 0.30 Aleutian Islands 1 • 0.40 co 0.20 Puerto Rico 4 o Gv �� ✓ p 0.30 ; d EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER • DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Building Official and Code Administrators (BOCA), (Reference 3) Our interpretation of the BOCA seismic requirements is discussed below: a. Section 1612.1.3: Provides the Seismic Ground Acceleration Maps; Contour Map of Effective Peak Velocity - Related Acceleration Coefficient (A Figure 14, and Contour Map of Effective Peak Acceleration Coefficient (A Figure 15. (Figure 1612.1.3(1) and (2) of code). Page 14 According to the maps, the maximum effective peak acceleration (Coefficient AO is equal to 0.4 g. The maximum effective peak velocity related acceleration (Coefficient A is equal to 0.4 g. b. Section 1612.1.4: Site- Specific Response Spectra, this section does not provide a normalized RRS. The development of the site RRS is left up to the designer with certain limitations. c. Section 1612.1.5: Seismic Hazard Exposure Groups (Table 1612.1.5) for essential buildings and facilities we used "Group Ill." d. Section 1612.1.7: Seismic Performance Category (Table 1612.1.7), for Effective Peak Velocity - Related Acceleration (A above 0.2 and Seismic Hazard Exposure Group Ill, the Seismic Performance Category is defined as "E." Figure 14. Contour Map of Effective Peak Velocity - Related Acceleration Coefficient (A„) e. Section 1612.6.4: Mechanical and Electrical Compo- nents and System Design, this section specifies that mechanical and electrical components and systems and their attachments shall be designed to seismic force (F determined from the following formula (see Table 612.6.4): F A,C Where: C is the Seismic Coefficient (MCC, SWGR, Bus Ducts, etc.) and is taken maximum equal to 2.0 P: is the Performance Criteria Factor for Seismic Hazard Exposure Group Ill, and is taken maximum equal to 1.5 a is the Attachment Amplification Factor for Equipment resonance +1-40% of the building resonance and is taken equal to the maximum of 2.0 W the Equipment Operating Weight Therefore, the seismic loads (including all the conserva- tism possible) are: F = 0.4x2.Ox1.5x2.OxIN, Then the Spectral Acceleration is equal to: F = 2.4g The codes specify that this acceleration is to be imposed at the C.G. of the equipment. 0 0.10 0.20 0.40 Alaska 0.05 0.15 0.30 0.30 0.30 x 0.40 0<)/eN, Hawaii 0.05 d 0.10 0.15 020 _._._.. 0.30 Aleutian Islands • y .. 0.4o u 0.20 Puerto Rico , o ex. A 0.30 d Finite element dynamic analysis of several switchgear and motor control center assemblies along with actual test data revealed that electrical equipment support at the base will tend to vibrate in its natural dominant frequen- cies as a free cantilever beam, supported at the base and free at the top. The response at the middle is at least 50% higher than the floor input. Therefore, the base forces equivalent to the forces in the formulation is then computed from: F = (0.4x2.0x1.5x2.0xW Then the peak acceleration is equal to: Peak Spectral Acceleration = F = 1.6 g The BOCA code, is not very clear as to how the equipment certified by testing should be tested. Section 1612.6.1 specifies that the equipment must be designed to with- stand the seismic loads at its center of gravity (one direction at time). The vertical levels are nonsimultaneous and are equal to 33% of the horizontal level. Based on the test results, Cutler- Hammer equipment has no dominant frequencies below 3.2 Hz. Therefore, there is no need to test below 3.2 Hz. Basically, the equipment will not experience loading in this frequency range. Therefore, ramping up the RRS from 0.5 g at 1.0 Hz to peak spectral acceleration of 1.6 g at 3.2 Hz is acceptable. This peak acceleration will then cover the entire frequency range of the curve up to 16 Hz then drop down to connect with the zero period acceleration at 33 Hz. Figure 15. Contour Map of Effective Peak Acceleration Coefficient (A a) The results are tabulated as follows: Frequency (Hz) 1.0 3.2 14.0 20.0 33.0 Acceleration (g) 0.5 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.0 ANSI C37.81, (Reference 5) The seismic requirements for Class 1E switchgear in nuclear power plants are defined in ANSI C37.81. Cutler - Hammer elected to test the equipment to 2/3 of the nuclear requirements. Year 2000 International Building Code (IBC), (Reference 4) On December 9, 1994, the International Code Council (ICC) was established as a nonprofit organization dedicated to developing a single set of comprehensive and coordinated national codes. The ICC founders - the Building Officials and Code Administrators (BOCA), the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO), and the Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI) - created the ICC in response to technical disparities among the three nationally recognized model codes now in use in the U.S. The ICC offers a single, complete set of construction codes without regional limitations - the International IBC Codes. Page 15 . EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES According to Chapter 16, Structure Design, the seismic requirements of electrical equipment in buildings may be computed in two steps. The first step is to determine the maximum ground motion to be considered at the site. The second step is to evaluate the equipment mounting and attachments inside the building or structure. The two sets are then evaluated to determine appropriate seismic test requirements. The ground motion, the in- structure seismic requirements of the equipment, and the seismic response spectrum requirements are discussed below. a. Ground Motion: According to the proposed code, the first and most important step in the process is to determine the Maxi- mum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response Accelera- tion at short periods of 0.2 seconds (Ss) and at a period of 1.0 second (S1). These values are determined from a set of 24 Spectral Acceleration Maps which include numerous contour lines indicating the severity of the earthquake requirements at a particular location in the country. The maps indicate low to moderate seismic requirements for the entire country, with the exception of two particular areas; the West Coast (the State of California) and the Midwest (the New Madrid Areas). The seismic require- ments at the New Madrid are approximately 40% higher than the maximum requirements of the West Coast. The maps also suggest that the high seismic requirements in both regions, West Coast and Midwest, are on the fault line then quickly decreases as one moves away from the fault. In other words, the high requirements are only limited to a relatively narrow strip along the fault line. Just a few miles away from this strip, only a small percentage of the maximum requirements is indicated. To provide a realistic estimate of the seismic requirements for the entire country we initially focused our attention on the West Coast, which covered all of the USA with the exception of the New Madrid area. We will proceed to the New Madrid area seismic requirements separately so we may not impose unreasonable requirements on the entire country. Assuming the worst condition, that is a site directly located on a fault, Figures 16 and 17 indicate the Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response Acceleration at short periods of 0.2 seconds (Ss) is equal to 256% gravity and at 1.0 second period (S1) is 124% gravity. These numbers are the maximum numbers for the entire country except for the New Madrid area. This particular site is very close to the Northwest corner of California. Figures 16 and 17 are developed for Site Class B, at 5% of critical damping. To determine the Maximum Considered Earthquake Ground Motion for all other site classes, the code intro- duces site coefficients which when applied on the site B Maximum Considered Earthquake Ground Motion produces the Adjusted Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response Acceleration for the required site. The site coefficients are defined as F at 0.2 seconds short period and as F„ at 1- second period. From the tables in the code, the highest adjusting factor for Ss is equal to 1.0 and the highest adjusting factor for S is 1.50. Page 16 Figure 16. Maximum Considered Earthquake Ground Motion 0.2 sec Spectral Response Acceleration (5% of Critical Damping), Site Class B Figure 17. Maximum Considered Earthquake Ground Motion 1.0 sec Spectral Response Acceleration (5% of Critical Damping), Site Class B As a result, the adjusted maximum considered earthquake spectral response for 0.2 second short period (SMS) and at 1.0 second (SMI ), adjusted for site class effects, are determined from the following equations: SMS = F a S5= 1.0x2.568 =2.568 SM7= FVS1= 1.5x1.24g =1.868 The codes provide a plot of the final shape of the Design Response Spectral of the ground. The plot is shown in Figure 18. The design spectral acceleration curve can now be computed. The peak spectral acceleration (SDS ) and the spectral acceleration at 1.0 second (SD1) may now be computed from the following formulas in the code: SOS = 2/3 xSMS= 2/3x2.56 =1.708 SD7 2/3xSM1= 2/3x1.86 =1.248 The Sin, the peak spectral acceleration, extends between T and T . T and T are defined in the codes as follows: T = 5D1 / hog = 1.24/1.7 = 0.73 Seconds (1.37 Hz) To = 0.2 SDI / SDg = 0.2 x 1.24/1.7 = 0.145 Seconds (6.9 Hz) According to the codes, the spectral acceleration (S at periods less than 1.45 seconds may be computed by using the following formula in the code: Sa = SDS (0.6 T/T0 + 0.4) Where T is the period where S is being calculated: Therefore, the acceleration at 0.0417 seconds (24 Hz), for example, is equal to: S =1. 7x(0.6(0.0417/0.145) +0.4) =0.978 the acceleration at 0.03 seconds (33 Hz) is equal to: S = 1.7 x (0.6 (0.03/ 0.145)+ 0.4) = 0.89 g (ZPA) At zero period, T = 0.0, the acceleration is equal to acceleration is equal to: S = 1.7 x (0.6 (0.0/ 0.145)+ 0.4) = 0.68 g (ZPA) Figure 18. Response Spectrum Curve - Ground SOS Sof T. T Period T 1.0 This completes the ground motion Design Response Spectrum. The spectral accelerations are equal to 0.68 g at zero period (ZPA), increases linearly to a peak acceleration of 1.7 g at 0.145 Seconds (or 6.9 Hz) and stay constant to 0.73 seconds (or 1.37 Hz) then gradually decreases to 1.24 g at 1 seconds (or 1 Hz). This final curve is shown in Figure 19. The code does not provide formulation for the seismic spectral requirements inside buildings or above grade. Instead, the code provides formulation of the equivalent loads at the C.G. of the equipment inside structures. The purpose is to ensure the structural and mounting integrity of the equipment during and immediately after the seismic event. We will discuss these requirements then proceed to determine realistic in- structure seismic requirements for equipment mounted inside or on top of a particular building. b. In- Structure Seismic Requirements of Equipment: The code provides a formula for computing the seismic requirements of electrical and mechanical equipment inside a building or a structure. The formula is designed for evaluating the equipment attachment to the equipment foundations. The seismic loads are defined in Section 1621.1.4 as: F = 0.4 a SDS Wp (1 + 2 Z/h) / (R I Where: F seismic design force imposed at the component's C.G. and distributed relative to component mass distribution a component amplification factor that varies from 1.00 to 2.50 SDS: spectral acceleration, short period, as determined in the previous section W component operating weight R component response modification factor that varies from 1.0 to 5.0 I component importance factor that is either 1.0 or 1.5 Z: highest point of equipment in a structure relative to grade elevation h: average roof height of structure relative to grade elevation Figure 19. Specific Response Spectrum Curve - Ground (1.7. 1.7 g u v m Vl o G y c Q: 2 0.68 g v) 0.145 (6.9 Hz) 0.73 (1.37 Hz) Period T (Frequency) 1.0 (1.0 Hz) Page 17 . EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES To produce the maximum required force, the following parameters were chosen: Z is taken equal to h (equipment on roof) I is taken equal to 1.5 Ap is taken equal to 2.5 R is taken equal to 2.5 S0S is equal to 1.7 g as computed in previous section The acceleration at C.G. of equipment is then computed equal to: Acceleration = 0.4 x 2.5 x 1.7 g (1 + 2) / (2.5/1.5) = 3.06 g For equipment on grade, the acceleration at C.G. is then computed equal to: Acceleration = 0.4 x 2.5 x 1.7 g (1 + 0) / (2.5 /1.5) = 1.02 g Figure 20. Response Spectrum Curve - Ground (New Madrid Area) Page 18 Figure 21. Bellcore Earthquake Zone Map Uniform Building Code Seismic Zones 0 No damage Minor damage Moderate damage 2B Moderate damage According to this criterion, in order to establish the seismic acceptability of a piece of equipment inside a structure or a building, one must impose an equivalent static load at the equipment C.G. and report the results. This approach is very difficult and perhaps impossible to apply. The C.G. will first have to be located then physically coupled to a forcing mechanism supported by some kind of a fixture and a reaction mass. The approach is not a complete one either. Applying a static load will push the entire system as one unit in the force direction without causing much relative motion to the internals. It does not tell much about the equipment flexibility, the internal's relative motion to the cabinet structure or the dynamics and resonance of the equipment. A more realistic approach is to expose the equipment to the floor motion causing the inertia forces to occur in the opposite direction when the mass is suddenly accelerated. Bolting a piece of equipment to a shake table at the base and quickly accelerating it will certainly expose the equipment to inertia loads higher than the base input. This is a more realistic way of showing the seismic acceptabil- ity of electrical equipment. As explained before, many seismic test programs on electrical equipment clearly indicated that electrical equipment, which are supported at the base, tend to vibrate in its natural dominant frequencies as a free cantilever beam supported at the bottom and free at the top. The seismic response at the middle point of the equipment close to its C.G. is at least 50% higher than the floor input at the equipment natural frequency. Therefore, the base forces associated with the static loads at the C.G. of the equipment could be computed as 3.06/1.5 = 2.04 g. Major damage Those areas within Zone 3 determined by the proximity to certain major faults Coordinate Point Frequency (Hz) Values for Upper Floor Acceleration (g) Zones 1 and 2 1 0.3 0.2 2 0.6 2.0 11 5.0 2.0 12 15.0 0.6 13 50.0 0.6 Zone 3 1 0.3 0.2 2 0.6 2.0 7 1.0 3.0 8 5.0 3.0 9 15.0 1.0 10 50.0 1.0 Coordinate Point Frequency (Hz) Values for Upper Floor Acceleration (g) Zone 4 1 0.3 0.2 2 0.6 2.0 3 2.0 5.0 4 5.0 5.0 5 15.0 1.6 6 50.0 1.6 In light of this discussion, Cutler- Hammer seismic ,o requirements will be: 1. For equipment on grade, the base seismic require- ments are shown in Figure 19. 2. For equipment inside a structure or on top of the roof, 1 'r the base input acceleration at the equipment natural frequency must exceed the levels of 2.04 g base accelera- tion or 3.06 g at the equipment C.G. c. New Madrid Seismic Requirements: According to IBC the New Madrid fault maximum consid- ered earthquake ground motion is equal to 369% of g. The method to develop the required spectrum and required forces at the C.G. is the same as described above. Since all equations are linear of first order, the requirements can be directly determined by linearly increasing the complete levels and static force requirements by the ratio of 3.69/ 2.56 = 1.44. The resultant Response Spectrum Curve is shown in Figure 20, and the maximum seismic forces at the center of gravity for equipment mounted at the top floor will be equal to 1.44 x 3.06 = 4.4 g. Cutler- Hammer seismic requirements for (equipment on or in proximity to) the New Madrid area is: 1. For equipment on grade, the base seismic require- ments are shown in Figure 20. 2. For equipment inside a structure or on top of the roof, the base input acceleration at the equipment natural frequency must exceed the levels of 2.88 g base acceleration or 4.4 g at the equipment C.G. Bellcore Requirements (Reference 10) The Bellcore Generic Requirements (GR -63 -CORE, Issue 1, dated 1995) for the Network Equipment - Building System (NEBS) (Reference 10), and the Physical Protection Section 5.4 of the code includes a map of the seismic zones (Figure 21), as well as a proposed Response Spectrum Curve for testing communication equipment (Figure 22). Descriptions of the test requirements and test levels of equipment are also included. The seismic requirements in terms of 2% damping are shown in Figure 22. The code requires that the equipment be tested in each of the three principal directions, one direction at a time. This test is obviously less severe than three - direction testing when the equipment is subjected to all three directions, simultaneously. It is difficult to determine exactly how a simultaneous three - dimensional test relates to a single directional test:Our data suggests that at least 25% cross coupling effects between two horizontals is a conservative magnitude. Therefore, the peak acceleration can be reduced by 25% yielding a 3.75 g peak acceleration at 2% damping and 1.2 g ZPA. Figure 22. Bellcore Seismic Requirements Page 19 EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Final Combined Requirements To better compare all seismic levels and determine the final envelop seismic requirements, the UBC, CBC, BOCA, Y2K IBC for the West Coast, Y2K IBC for New Madrid area, and Bellcore final seismic requirements are plotted in Figure 23. All curves are plotted at 5% damping. An envelopment of the seismic levels in the frequency range of 3.2 Hz to 100 Hz is also shown. This level is taken as Cutler- Hammer generic seismic test requirements for all certifications. The levels are also plotted in Figure 24. The vertical levels are taken equal to 2/3 g the horizontal requirements Figure 23. Required Response Spectrum Curve Figure 24. Cutler- Hammer Test Required Response Spectrum Curve 9• a A • • Figure 25. Test Response Spectrum Curve (front to back) g Sn O 1 C s • CH Seismic Envelop � ■ m•Milio us■ 1111111 � ruly. Bellcore es . ./11111sm1 E 1 ■1 a m, — — MI uac and CRC IBC, New Madrid s s • Frequency Hz e• ' Frequency Hz a• 1 120% of CH Seismic Envelop 1 / CH Seismic Envelop I Shake Table Actual Test Levels Page 20 s • w e Frequency Hz IGO In addition, Cutler- Hammer performs additional seismic test runs on the equipment at approximately 120% of the generic enveloping seismic requirements (see Figure 24). The testing is designed to establish additional margin and prepare for future changes in the codes. For seismic certification of the New Madrid area, Cutler- Hammer will proceed as follows: 1. Complete testing to the generic levels shown in Figures 23 and 24. 2. Proceed to perform additional test runs at approxi- mately 25% higher seismic levels shown in Figures 23 and 24. During, August, 2000, Cutler- Hammer performed seismic testing on several test units. Cutler- Hammer electrical distribution equipment was further tested to seismic levels higher than the combined requirements, and approximately equal to the Bellcore requirements. Some of the equipment tested are shown in Figures 25, 26 and 27. The levels are provided in the front -to -back, side -to -side and vertical directions. As indicated, the actual test levels were much higher than the required enveloping, and equivalent to the Bellcore requirements in the frequency range of 3.2 Hz. to 100 Hz. Figure 26. Test Response Spectrum Curve (side to side) s s Figure 27. Test Response Spectrum Curve (vertical) 111111 1 Shake Table Actual Test Lords Envelop Seismic Requirements • T Frequency Hz e oa • Frequency Hz m fill I Shake Table Actual Test Levels — ,. Envelop Seismic Requirement. 1111 11111w Part IV Test Facility and Test Methodology Test Specimens More than 100 specimens were selected for testing of the combined seismic applications. Since it was not feasible to test every single configuration, it was necessary to select a number of test specimens that adequately represent the total product lines. Each product line was reviewed and evaluated to determine the number and design configurations of the test specimens. Criteria were established for representation of all equipment in each product line. 1. The test unit structure shall be similar to the major structural configurations being supplied in the product lines. If more than one major structure is being offered, then these configurations shall also be selected for testing. 2. The mounting configuration of the test units to the shake table shall simulate the different mounting conditions for the product line. If several mounting configurations are used, then they have to be simulated in the test. 3. The major electrical components should be simulated in the test specimens. The components shall be mounted to the specimen structure at similar locations to their mounting locations in production configurations. The components shall be mounted to the structure using the same mounting hardware used in the typical design. 4. The weight of the test units shall be similar to the typical weight of the equipment being represented. Equal and higher weights than the typical weight shall be acceptable. 5. Other variations such as number of cabinets in produc- tion assemblies, and indoor and outdoor applications, will also be represented by the test specimens. Figure 28. Test Specimen Typical Test unit Response ' Accelerometers S Table/ • Motion ometers f( I Front -to -Back Side -to -Side Base Input Base Input Shake Table Vertical Base Input Figure 29. Control of Test Motion. Test Facility and Test Table The test specimens were tested on a truly independent tri- axial shake table at the Wyle Seismic Test Laboratory, Huntsville, Alabama. The table and control systems are capable of exciting the test specimens in all three direc- tions using statistically independent and phase incoherent seismic input signals. A sketch of a test unit mounted to the shake table is shown in Figure 28. Test Sequence The seismic verification testing consisted of the following ten steps for each specimen: 1. Receipt and inspection 2. Functional operation 3. Hi -Pot electrical testing 4. Resonance search testing 5. Seismic test at 50% of the combined seismic requirements 6. Seismic test at 100% of the combined seismic requirements 7. Seismic test at higher than the combined seismic requirements 8. Functional operation 9. Hi -pot electrical testing 10. Final inspection Resonance Search Test Resonance search (sine sweep) tests were performed on all test specimens. The sine sweep tests were performed in the three principal axes of the test specimens; front -to- back, side -to -side, and vertical directions. The sine sweep tests were conducted at amplitude of 0.2 g. The sine sweep tests were performed from 1 Hz to 50 Hz at a sweep rate of 1 octave per minute. Seismic Test Input The seismic inputs were generated using random signals with a frequency and energy content up to 100 Hz. The test inputs were independent in the three principal directions of the test specimens: front -to -back, side -to- side, and vertical directions. All seismic test inputs were 30 seconds long. (See Figure 30) Page 21 • EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER - HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILRIES Data Acquisition The test inputs to the shake table were monitored using three accelerometers mounted on the shake table. The accelerometers were oriented in the shake table principal axes, which coincide with the equipment front -to -back, side -to -side, and vertical directions. The seismic response of the test specimens were monitored using several accelerometers mounted on the test specimen and oriented along the three principal axes of each test specimen. The test input and seismic response of the equipment was recorded on FM tapes and analyzed using a shock spectra analyzer. The test response spectra were derived at 5% damping. (See Figures 30 and 31) Electrical Connection and Test Specimen Monitoring As stated before, the acceptability of the test specimen to the UBC applications requires that all equipment maintain structural integrity and perform its intended function before and after the seismic test. Test Assembly and Mounting Conditions At the beginning of each test, the test units were mounted to the shake table (Figure 32) using the specified seismic mounting conditions. Figure 30. Test Input 3.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -2.0 .00 Figure 31. Test Data Acquisition. Page 22 MIN =- .1921E +01 MAX =O .1588E +01 G Min/Max x: B in Size = 8 Time (sec) x interval = 2.0000 30.00 Test Procedure All test specimens identified in Part VI. were subjected to the seismic test requirements specified in Figure 24. Testing was conducted in accordance with UBC, CBC, BOCA, IBC and ANSI C37 -81, test requirements. The test pro- grams are documented in Wyle Seismic Laboratory test reports. Acceptance Criteria The seismic verification of the test specimens was based on the following acceptance criteria: 1. The test specimens' structure shall maintain structural integrity with no major structural failure that may impact the electrical performance of the test specimens or impact adjacent cabinets. 2. The test specimens shall perform their electrical function before and immediately after seismic testing. 3. The test specimens shall pass hi -pot testing per ANSI standards after seismic testing. Figure 32. Typical Arrangement of Equipment for Test. Part V Shared Responsibilities The equipment manufacturer and the equipment specifier/ installer have a shared responsibility to ensure the installation will meet the seismic requirements of the code. The equipment manufacturer determines that the equipment will be functional following a seismic event and the equipment specifier /installer determines that the equipment is rigidly supported and will not leave its foundation during a seismic event. Previously in this paper we have discussed the Cutler - Hammer interpretation of the various codes and standards as well as the levels of the test response spectra used in testing. The testing results insure that Cutler- Hammer equipment will perform the intended function after the seismic event. However, the foundation and the anchor- age must also meet the codes and standards for the entire installation to be functional after a seismic event. Equip- ment poorly mounted or mounted to a flexible foundation will not meet the requirements. The anchoring of electrical equipment recommended by the design engineer is critical. If the equipment is not attached to the building structure in accordance with the minimum standards recommended, the complete equipment installation might become too flexible and may overturn or shear the attachment devices and slide off its foundation. Such movement may damage either the building structure or other components, including items connected to the equipment. Engineers formulate methods of attachment that are applicable to each specific condition based on past experience. They evaluate the equipment, methods and techniques of attachment and tested anchoring systems. The structural /civil engineers responsible for the structural design review the proposed method of attachment. Based on both established criteria and direct calculation, they verify its performance and the capability of the building's structural elements to accommodate the seismic forces. In many states, registered professional civil engineers must attest that the design is adequate for the seismic environ- ment and apply their seal. In evaluating the equipment mounting, the engineer performs calculations based on data received from the equipment manufacturer specifying the size, weight, center of gravity, and mounting provisions of the equip- ment. The embedded concrete anchors or steel attach- ments must be adequate to resist the forces established by the UBC or the CBC. For either attachment, bolts of the proper grade of steel must be correctly sized and torqued. If an embedded anchor is used, engineering data for the anchoring hardware will allow the engineer to determine the size required. The mounting depth and the strength of concrete to contain it will also be determined. The embedded anchors must be correctly installed in accor- dance with the method specified by the anchor manufacturer. The reliability of electrical connections within the system must also be considered. Electrical equipment is installed as part of a system. Busway or conduits connect indi- vidual components of the electrical system to each other. Interface methods that will prevent damage from an earthquake should be specified. For example, bottom entry of conduits is recommended for transformers and switchgear. If top entry is necessary, seismic fittings or a flexible conduit is needed. Transformers are often close coupled to switchgear with flexible bus to minimize transfer of relative motion. Likewise, flexible bus can be used to connect generators to busway, and the addition of insulat- ing boots usually improves the integrity of such installations. The availability of electrical power following a disaster is often critical. It is certain that earthquakes will occur in the future. It is the responsibility of the engineer to design and specify reliable equipment and systems that will withstand them. The Uniform Building Code, the California Building Code, and the International Building Code establish minimum requirements for equipment seismic design and installation. To help achieve seismically safe designs, Cutler- Hammer has equipment available that has been seismically certified. When specified, such equipment increases the likelihood that the electrical system will function in the aftermath of an earthquake. Part VI Page 23 Cutler- Hammer Equipment Zone 4 Applications Indoor Outdoor Low Voltage Panelboards is Pow-R -Line C la, 2a, 3a, 4, 5p, F16, Column Type 1 1 Low Voltage Switchboards • Pow -R -Line C ■ Pow -R -Line i • Multimeter • Instant ■ IFS 1 1 Motor Control Centers is Advantage • Series 2100 • Freedom 2100 1 1 Low Voltage Busway ■ Pow-R-Way and Associated Fittings ■ Pow -R -Way 111 and Associated Fittings 1 1 Transfer Switch Equipment 1 1 Low Voltage Metal- Enclosed Switchgear ■ Type DS II is Magnum • DS -VSR Size 5 Vacuum Starter* 1 1 Network Protectors ■ Submersible Type CMD and Type CM -22 is Wall Mounted 1 1 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers ■ Types EP, EPT, DS, DT3 1 1 Substation Transformers • Dry-Type • Liquid 1 1 Unitized Dry -Type Power Centers ■ 750 kVA Maximum 1 1 Excitation Control Assemblies is MGR, PRX -400B, WDR1000, WDR2000, WTA -3008 ■ ECS 2100 1 N/A Metal- Enclosed Load Interrupter Switchgear ■ Type WLI 5,15 and 38kV • Type WVB 5 and 15 kV ■ Type MVS 5 and 15 kV 1 1 Medium Voltage Metal -Clad Switchgear • Type VacClad -W 1 1 Metal- Enclosed Non - Segregated Phase Bus • 600V, 5 and 15 kV 1 1 Medium Voltage Control ■ Ampgard t / 1 Vacuum Replacement Circuit Breakers ■ DHP -VR for DHP Switchgear• 1 1 Load Centers 1 1 Heavy Duty Safety Switches 1 1 Enclosed Control 1 1 . EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER- HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Product Specific Test Summaries Selection of Test Units Table 3. Distribution Equipment Qualified for Applications through Seismic Zone 4 • When applied in a qualified assembly. Test Units, Test Dates, and Test Facilities Based on the criteria as stated in Part III, the following test specimens were selected for the UBC and applications. To reduce cost and maximize use of the shake table, it was decided to group and test specimens into several groups then test each group simultaneously on the shake table. The test groups and test dates are also identified below. Page 24 Test Group No. 1 November, 1990 Westinghouse Advanced Energy Systems Division Test Laboratory 1. WTA-300B Excitation Control Assembly. 2. WDR -2000 Excitation Control Assembly. Test Group No. 2 December, 1991 /January, 1992 Westinghouse Advanced Energy Systems Division Test Laboratory 3. Type VacClad -W Medium Voltage Metal -Clad Switchgear. Test Group No. 3 March /April, 1992 Wyle Laboratory 4. 600V Motor Control Center. Test Group No. 4 May, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 5. Pow -R -Line C Low Voltage Switchboard. 6. Types WLI and WVB Metal- Enclosed Medium Voltage Switchgear. Test Group No. 5 May, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 7. Pow -R -Line 4 Low Voltage Panelboard, indoor applications. 8. Pow -R -Line 1 and 2 Low Voltage Panelboards, indoor applications. 9. Pow -R -Line 1 and 2 Low Voltage Panelboards NEMA 12/3R, outdoor applications. 10. Pow -R -Line 3a Low Voltage Panelboard, indoor applications. 11. Pow -R -Line 4 Low Voltage Panelboard NEMA 12/3R, outdoor applications. 12. Neutral Grounding Resistor Assembly. 13. 112 kVA Dry-Type Substation Transformer. 14. Control Power Transformer. Test Group No. 6 May, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 15. Ampgard Medium Voltage Control. Test Group No. 7 May, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 16. Multi -Meter Low Voltage Switchboard. 17. Instant Low Voltage Switchboard. 18. Pow -R -Way Low Voltage Busway. Test Group No. 8 August, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 19. Pow -R -M -S Low Voltage Switchgear Assembly. 20. MGR Excitation Control Assembly. 21. PRX-400B Excitation Control Assembly. Test Group No. 9 August, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 22. 1000A Transfer Switch Equipment. 23. 600A Transfer Switch Equipment. 24. 1000A Transfer Switch Equipment, (New Mechanism). 25. 1200A Transfer Switch Equipment, Mini -SPB Type. 26. 4000A Transfer Switch Equipment. 27. 2000A Transfer Switch Equipment, (with IQ Transfer). Test Group No. 10 August, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 28. 1000A Transfer Switch Equipment. 29. 750 kVA Unitized Dry-Type Power Center. Test Group No. 11 August, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 30. Type CM -22 Network Protector, 1600A. 31. Type CMD Network Protector, 1875A. Test Group No. 12 October, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 32. Type DSII Metal- Enclosed Low Voltage Switchgear (Including DS Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers). Test Group No. 13 December, 1993 Wyle Laboratory 33. Low Voltage Busway and Medium Voltage Bus Run Assemblies. Test Group No. 14 December, 1994 Wyle Laboratory 34. Type DS II Metal- Enclosed Low Voltage Switchgear. 35. DS -VSR Vacuum Starter. 36. C -HRG Wall- Mounted Ground Systems. Test Group No. 15 December, 1994 Wyle Laboratory 37. C -HRG Floor- Mounted Ground Systems. Test Group No. 16 April, 1995 Wyle Laboratory 38. Advantage Motor Control Center. 39. Series 2100 Motor Control Center. 40. Freedom 2100 Motor Control Center. Test Group No. 17 January, 1996 Wyle Laboratory 41.2500 kVA Liquid Filled Transformer. 42. 3000 kVA Liquid Filled Transformer. 43.3000 kVA Dry-Type Transformer. 44. Pow -R -Line la, 3a, 4, 5a Low Voltage Panelboards. 45. Network Protectors. 46. Substation Breaker. Test Group No. 18 December, 1996 Wyle Laboratory 47.38 kV Metal -Clad Switchgear. 48. Pow- R -Way ll Low Voltage Busway. 49. DS II Low Voltage Switchgear. 50. Heavy Duty Safety Switches. Test Group No. 19 January, 1998 Wyle Laboratory 51. Main Breaker Ampgard. 52. Multi -Meter Low Voltage Switchboard. 53. Magnum Low Voltage Switchgear. 54. Pow -R -Line 5P Low Voltage Panelboard. 55. Pow -R -Line la Low Voltage Panelboard. 56. Combination Starters NEMA. 57. Type CH and BR Loadcenters. Test Group No. 20 November, 1999 Wyle Laboratory 58. Ampgard RVSS Medium Voltage Control. 59. Ampgard SL Medium Voltage Control. 60. SL Medium Voltage Contractor. 61. Type MVS Metal- Enclosed Medium Voltage Switchgear. 62. Soft Load Transfer Switch. 63. Residential Transfer Switch. 64. AG Transfer Switch. 65. Freedom Motor Control Center with SV9000 Drive and IT Softstart. 66. Advantage Motor Control Center with SV9000 Drive and IT Softstart. 67. Type FT -160 Firepump Controller. 68. Advanced Power Center, Power Manager PM9800C, Series A Wall Panel. 69. Clipper VL, RWTCHR1, Cabinet Mounted. 70. Reflected Wave Trap CPS -H- 277 /480Y -ED -MS ( R ), Cabinet Mounted. Test Group No. 21 September, 2000 Wyle Laboratory 71. Type MVS Metal- Enclosed Medium Voltage Switchgear with Shunt Trip. 72. Magnum Low Voltage Switchgear Outdoor. 73. ECS 2100 Control Cubicle. 74. ECS 2100 3 Channel Fixed Bridge System. 75. ECS 2100 2000 A Bridge. 76. ECS 2100 Power Drawer System. 77. IFS Low Voltage Switchboard. 78. F16 Low Voltage Panelboard. 79. Pow -R -Line C Low Voltage Switchboard. 80. 112 +/2 kVA Dry-Type Distribution Transformer. 81. Freedom Motor Control Center with SV9000 and Accusign 82. Advantage Motor Control Center with SV9000 and Accusign Page 25 EARTHQUAIO REQUIREMENTS AND CUTLER - HAMMER DISTRIBUTION & CONTROL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC CAPABILITIES Figure 33. Sample Seismic Certificate Page 26 TEST CERTIFICATE OF SEISMIC WITHSTAND CAPABILITY The Cutler- Hammer equipment identified below was mounted onto a shake table and tested in accordance with the earthquake requirements as specified in both the Uniform Building Code and the California Building Code. As required by the codes, the equipment demonstrated its ability to function after the seismic tests. The seismic capability of the equipment exceeds the worst -case Zone 4 required levels, as illustrated in the figure below. Metal- Enclosed Low Voltage Switchgear — Magnum 25- 2.0 Response Acceleration 1.5 10) Period (seconds) .31 .25 .20 .16 .13 .10 .08 .06 .05 .04 .03 0 - .- .- .- .- .- .—. —.� •∎ • Cutler.Hamner Equipment CapabSty - - IBC 2000 Code CBC 1898 end UBC 1997 Zone 4 Requirement BOCA1996 -., Dapping - 5% 3.2 4 5 8.4 8 10 13 17 20 28 32 Frequency 012) 2 N The frequency sweep tests revealed that the lowest equipment natural frequency is: 3.5 Hz 30(15 PARTY TEST GINEER IN CHARGE TESTED 6Y Wyle Laboratories September, 2000 SEISMIC QUALIFIED Cutler- Hammer SIGNATUREIDATE OF CERTIFICATION /MODIFICATION For interpretation of testing data refer to Cutler - Hammer Publication SA.125.0I.S.E Drawing Number 69A 1013H01 b Part VII References 1. International Conference of Building Officials, (1997). Uniform Building Code. 5360 Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 2. California Building Standards Commission, (1998). California Building Code. 428 J. Street, Suite 450 Sacramento, CA 95814 3. The Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. W Flossmoor Rd Country Club Hills, II 60478 -5795 4. International Code Council, (2000). International Building Code. 5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 708, Falls Church, Virginia 22031 -3401 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., ANSI /IEEE 344. -1987 Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class IE Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations. East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 -2394 6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., ANSI /IEEE C37.81, (1987). Guide for Seismic Qualification of Class lE Metal Enclosed Power Switchgear Assemblies. East 47th Street. New York, NY 10017 -2394 7. Newmark, Nathan M. and Rosenblueth, Emilio, (1971). Fundamentals of Earthquake Engineering. Prentice -Hall, Inc. Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1971. 8. Wiegel, Robert L, (editor). Earthquake Engineering. Prentice -Hall, Inc. Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1971. 9. Beer, Ferdinand P. and Johnston, E. Russell, Jr., (1962). Vector Mechanics for Engineers Static's and Dynamics. McGraw Hill Book Company New York, NY, 1962 10. Bellcore, ISSUE 1, Generic Requirements GR-63 -CORE, (1995). Network Equipment- Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection. Page 27 • Cutler- Hammer, a part of Eaton Corporation, is a worldwide leader providing customer- driven solutions. From power distribution and electrical control products to industrial automation, Cutler- Hammer utilizes advanced product development, world -class manufacturing, and offers global engineering services and support. For more information on Cutler- Hammer products, call 1- 800 - 525 -2000 or 1- 616 - 982 -1059, for engineering services call 1- 800 -498 -2678, or visit our website at www.cutlerhammer.eaton.com Cutler- Hammer Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania U.S.A. Publication No. SAl25.01.S.E May 2001 Printed in U.S.A. EAT• Date: 05.23.2008 To: Re: PINK Southcenter E03.1 Electrical Lighting Plan E03.3 Light Fixture Schedule E04.4 Electrical Details E05.1 Electrical Panels and riser Diagram F01.1 .Fire Alarm Plan MO2.1 Mechanical Plan 3 LIMITED PARKWAY COLUMBUS, OHIO 43230 (614) 415 -7000 CC: BULLETIN REVISION # 4 From: Greg McFarland Larson Binkley Inc. ( greg .mcfarland @larsonbinkley.com ) ph: 913 - 383 -584 fax: 913- 383 -283 The following instructions are issued to the Contractor. The Contractor shall promptly inform subcontractors and others performing or supplying the Work of revats or T conten tame as dictated b the SP project manager. If o such quotation is submitted within the time specified, no change to the Contract Sum or Ti Time within time fra Time will be allowed. This Bulletin is not a substitute for a Change O rdea which �e �r�� be executed in accordance with the conditions of the Contract for • Sheet Description Summa Mechanical / Electrical / Plumbing E02.1 Electrical Power Plan Revised per new plan. Revised lighting plan per new floor plan. Added and removed Tight fixtures per new plan Revised cash wrap detail. Revised panels per new plan. Revised per new plan. Relocate grilles per new plan. END OF MECHANICAL 1 ELECTRCAL / PLUMBING SECTION END OF BULLETIN REV #4 REVSO NO LO1 RECEIVEr JUN 031008 Pa 1 of 1 FILE C PERMIT CENTEf LARSON BINKLEY January 24, 2008 Bill Rambo City of Tukwila 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 RE: Pink @ Southcenter Seattle, WA City Comment Letter LBI Project No.: 01200745.09 Mr. Plan Reviewer: The following are our responses to comments received on Thursday, January 24, 2008. The comments are in italics and our responses in bold. COMMENTS 1. Note on sheet P02.2 calls for backflow preventer for domestic water. Please provide additional information on your plan: a. Backflow location where it will be installed b. Provide an installation diagram showing how this backflow needs to be installed c. Specify backflow size, manufacturer and model # (make sure subject backflow is a WA State Department of Health approved devise) d. Cut sheet of proposed backflow The backflow preventer will be installed on the cold water line, above the mop sink. Specified will be a Watts Regulator Series 009 model 009M2QT 1" backflow preventer. A cut sheet is provided. 2. The transformer secondary overcurrent protection permitted according to NEC section 450.4, exceeds the overcurrent protection allowed per code. The over current protection is correct per code. 3. The conductors serving panelboard "A" and "B" need to be protected according to NEC section 240.21. The plans do not provide adequate information showing compliance; please clarify on the plans how this requirement will be accomplished. The conductors serving panel boards "A" and "B" are protected according to the code. Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suite 400 Overland Park, KS 66211 -1542 T 913 383 2621 F 913 383 2831 Iarsonbinkley.com , Pink_ 1/29/2008 Page 2 of 2 4. Provide the manufactures data on switchgear identified as "IFS" and seismic D2 installation requirements. Information provided by manufactures. 5. Provide a Toad calculation for the "IFS" switchboard. See sheet E5.1 for panel "IFS" Toad calculations. If you have questions regarding the above responses, please contact this office. Respectfully submitted, G reg cFarland, P.E P roj ect M anager CA Y:\ Projects1Active=07101200745. 09101200745 .09.GEMComments101200745.09 2008 -01 -24 City Comment Letter.doc tir • January 15, 2008 Tim Schenk 1120E 80 St, Ste 211 Bloomington, MN 55420 RE: CORRECTION LETTER #1 Electrical Permit Application Number EL07 -799 Pink — 646 Southcenter Mall Dear Mr. Schenk, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your electrical permit can be approved. All correction requests from the Building Department must be addressed and reflected on your drawings. Building Department: Bill Buterbaugh, at 206 973 -4758, if you have questions regarding the attached memo. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that three (3) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, please contact me at (206) 433 -7165. Six>cerely,, n� ifer M shall it Technician encl xc: File No. EL07 -799 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director P:\Pemut Cents, Correction Letters\200TEL07 -799 Correction LIT #1.DOC jem Jim Haggerton, Mayor 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 • Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 JB'S ELECTRICAL PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS CITY OF TUKWILA Building Permit # EL07 -799 Date January 8, 2008 Status: The following items are needed in order to complete plan review. Also items to be attached or marked on the final plans. ITEMS NEEDED FROM PERMIT APPLICANT 1. The transformer secondary overcurrent protection permitted according to NEC section 450.4, exceeds the overcurrent protection allowed per code. 2. The conductors serving panelboard "A" and `B" need to be protected according to NEC section 240.21. The plans do not provide adequate information showing compliance; please clarify on the plans how this requirement will be accomplished. 3. Provide the manufactures data on switchgear identified as "IFS" and seismic D2 installation requirements. 4. Provide a load calculation for the "IFS" switchboard. ITEMS TO BE RED LINED OR ATTACHED TO FINAL PLANS ACTIVITY NUMBER: EL07-799 DATE: 06-03-08 PROJECT NAME: PINK SITE ADDRESS: 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # X Revision # 1 After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Bu ng vision Public Works LI DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) DUE DATE: 06-05-08 Complete Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: TUES/THURS R TING: Please Route Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 PERMIT WORD COPY"' PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Fire Prevention Structural Incomplete Structural Review Required LI Planning Division El Permit Coordinator Not Applicable No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE: 07-03-08 Approved Approved with Conditions 11] Not Approved (attach comments) II Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: ACTIVITY NUMBER: EL07 -799 DATE: 02 -06 -08 PROJECT NAME: PINK SITE ADDRESS: 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL Original Plan Submittal X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works Comments: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28-02 REVIEWER'S INITIALS: `-°PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP Fire Prevention Structural DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete IA Incomplete ❑ APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required ❑ No further Review Required DATE: DATE: C DUE DATE: 02-12-08 Not Applicable ❑ Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: n DUE DATE: 03-11-08 Not Approved (attach comments) n Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: ACTIVITY NUMBER: EL07 -799 DATE: 12 -21 -07 PROJECT NAME: PINK SITE ADDRESS: 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL X Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # Response to Correction Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTMEN S: • 4 BP ing Itvisioon� Public Works ❑ DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Documents/routing slip.doc 2 -28 -02 ../PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP Fire Prevention Structural Incomplete ❑ ❑ Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator C C DUE DATE: 12-27-07 Not Applicable C Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Structural Review Required No further Review Required DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: L .1, i► Departments issued corrections: Bldg V, Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: n DUE DATE: 01 -24-08 Approved n Approved with Conditions ❑ Not Approved (attach comments) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF 1N TIALS i Le- ,o 9 IN it,t,` Summary of Revision: v4e e1. -ec-M ' , ov4 1 ti L4-4, .nt{ .. ca ov c,-e k ■ �. . \ - 1 t . _ 1 - _ Received by: /C le L REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: REVISION NO. DATE RECEIVED STAFF INITIALS ISSUED DATE STAFF INITIALS Summary of Revision: Received by: PROJECT NAME: p te,k SITE ADDRESS: (p 4 [. So.Lr Xw bf REVISION LOG �� PERMIT NO: /-7 ORIGINAL ISSUE DATE: 1 1— 16 -0 (please print) (please print) (please print) (please print) (please print) City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 -431 -3670 Fax: 206 -431 -3665 Web site: http: //www.ci.tukwila.wa.us fir' Steven M Mullet, Mayor Steve Lancaster, Director Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: Plan Check/Permit Number: ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ❑ Response to Correction Letter # Er Revision # / after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: P Project Address: 444 So Lf e..-, 4 ✓ /774 11 Contact Person: Th r /-cf R ad i r Phone Number: Summary of Revision: FD2 . / - E 03./ E 63 .3 - Ea 5 1 . 4 - /s se_ E OS . / - lee. 5 e 1 � 9 IS - /w i5 ,C,'re 4/4r / o .tf f�ev i 5�-Q .2v1.. GO 9- Sk , Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: Entered in Permits Plus on I Q lapplications\fonns- applications on line\rcvision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 ato 7 -77 Sit eri ma-47 0 i re-' a-i ay, 5 4 S !'� //.'-s - P f PDT b i c-t e 4- n)-1 -r p /Q,r. p e e / .pc Ares eevi5e4 eS- w S /� s - 137 O- LG 7 i ' 44'1 «_ Sheet Number(s): 102 • / j £ D L . 2 E 03. / x 03. 3, 4) 9. j Ee S -/ l �0 /- / "Claud" or highlight all areas of revision inc date ofrevljlion ntc.tWED CITY OF TUKWILA 1 1 JUN o 3 2000 PERMIT CENTER City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206 - 431 -3670 Fax: 206 - 431 -3665 Web site: http: / /www.ci.tukwila.wa.us REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: Plan Check/Permit Number: EL07 -799 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ® Response to Correction Letter # 1 ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner SheetNumber(s): Gr.S, "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Entered in Permits Plus on \applications\forms- applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8 -13 -2004 Revised: Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Steve Lancaster, Director crr FEl- 0 6 2008 Project Name: Pink Project Address: 646 Southcenter Mall Contact Person: 1 tin sal a k• Phone Number: l • laOO • S 4 I- (757. Summary of Revision: 0.435('O€4SG 1'a u1M l Cn 7 f2uSL QrC riarch reN0 Lerna'l, •ecdep, 6)-(6/ 1_ Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: License Information License FARMEE *42509 Licensee Name FARMERS ELECTRIC Licensee Type ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR UBI 600107216 Ind. Ins. Account Id Business Type CORPORATION Address 1 30 E HEMLOCK Address 2 City OTHELLO County ADAMS State WA Zip 99344 Phone 5094882822 Status ACTIVE Specialty 1 GENERAL Specialty 2 UNUSED Effective Date 9/29/1958 Expiration Date 7/31/2008 Suspend Date Separation Date Parent Company Previous License Next License Associated License BOOTHF *093LA Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date BOOTH, FRANK 01/01/1980 BOOTH, BRENDA 01/01/1980 BOOTH, JOSH 01/01/1980 BOOTH, FRANK AGENT 01/01/1980 Look Up a Contractor, Electrician or Plumber License Detail Page 1 of 2 Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Electrical Contractor A business licensed by L &I to contract electrical work within the scope of its specialty. Electrical Contractors must maintain a surety bond or assignment of savings account. They also must have a designated Electrical Administrator or Master Electrician who is a member of the firm or a full - time supervisory employee. Electrical Administrator Information License Name Status BOOTHF *093LA BOOTH, FRANK ACTIVE https: // fortress. wa. gov /lni/bbip /printer.aspx ?License= FARMEE *42509 04/16/2008 PANELS A & B 036" A.F.F. 060 A.F.F. MICRO REF E04.1 NON -SALES 036" A.F.F. EQUIPME FURNISH DISCONN ANA OFFI I � � ,1 1 #12 GR CORRIDOR ELEVATOR ROOM (N.I.C.) FPVAV -1 I T MANUFACTURER D AND INSTALLED ; CT SWITCH. MDP -2 1/2 C, -#T2 THHN CU - 1 GR B -23,25 3/4° CONDUIT TO TELCO SECTION OF IFS SWITCHGEAR. B -18 HALLWAY WOME TOILE FITTING OM ALCOVE ADJACENT TENANT EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED DISCONNECT SWITCH. EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED DISCONNECT SWITCH. EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED DISCONNECT SWITCH. ADJACENT TENANT FPVAV FPVAV -4 LANDLORD COMMENT: LANDLORD WILL PROVIDE A COMMUNICATION CABLE TRAY LOCATED IN THE UTILITY CORRIDOR FOR TENANT'S USE. NO CONDUIT WILL BE PROVIDED. LANDLORD WILL PROVIDE A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL BOARD WITHIN EACH LANDLORD ELECTRICAL ROOM. TENANT SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL A COMPLETE TELEPHONE SERVICE SUPPORT FACILITIES AS REQUIRED BY THE SERVICING TELEPHONE COMPANY. ALL TENANT TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE CONTAINED WITHIN THE TENANTS SPACE. TENANT'S TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT IS NOT PERMITTED IN LANDLORD'S TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT ROOM. TENANT SHALL PROVIDE PLENUM RATED WIRE FROM THE TELEPHONE ROOM TO THE TENANT'S TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT WITHIN THE DEMISED PREMISES UTILIZING THE LANDLORD SUPPLIED CABLE TRAY. ANY CORRIDOR WALL PENETRATIONS WILL NEED TO BE FIRE CAULKED AS REQUIRED. REVISIONS Public No changes shall be made to the scope of work without prior approval of Iii Tukwila Building Division. 0 NOTE: Revisions will require a new plan submittal / ? and may include additional plan review feed • 1 . REVISION E L0`- l 99 FILE DOPY RECEIVED JUN 0 3200 PERMIT CENTER Ptar review approval Is stglect to err= rovalofconstniction documenb3 does not authefiza �� ���� mgt andaon is m, a BY Date: - 7 -14 —O fty 5 C ofTukwila ING DIVISION NOTE: REFER TO SHEETS F01.1, F01.2, AND F01.3 FOR FIRE ALARM REQUIREMENTS. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET E02.2 FOR POWER CODED NOTES. Larson Blnkley, Inc. 6363 College 8Ivd.. Su' Overland Park. Kansas 6 T 913 -383 -2621 F 913- 383 -2831 Iarsonbinkley.com COPYRIGHT 2907 a - x z W I ._ 2 In 4 -a c o � O O w I n W F U C ] = U O U W Ia W � W 52-'761-2=w C ¢ 22ci U P 2cQn 2 W - U jozgic U .. a = d 2 vw %gq C W K re ° a W F w W w p N li Oili I1 H ° 2 W IT Q D U 22 >-_ N o a Oa- : C/' V gOF- F=-~ : - J:6- m 09! OI - :U j U O t A � 0 wsoa a z O. = x P= w W O H U d U !!!!!! 2 2 = JJ Q V 1 o aQ p � F ,f 0� I_ d0 :: U U w :817-5 J U Q Q O a s v, � .z 0 O y a Or H � � o ° 2¢ a ti !! Z N , 1=42- a 0 w 0 0 [c w ° I. a : W H N = I = f n m '274' 0 Emw = W 0 4 o w z O g 2 m 3 a ° ° o ¢ a =�H av W i �_o wa V! L C = Uw w s - s 0. W w = r .' Q I ° FfELtS N C�NIMIOFfi DESIGN CHANGES • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET REVISIONS: DRAWING NUMBER: = W W 6 ¢ W C U 0 4 I., o a�� 0 i= - QOM 0 - Q � d ¢ U U � N W U 4 I D N W F H H a O . V ° m 0 4 0 L S 2 s � 0 a a a c? a zr o a U h 1C = ] 6 S a O U 4 fn¢ w ° a 4 O IA J ° y [ar 0 cc lrw - W F Z 7 = d CC � = N o Y W J 1., r a o 6 o r W W UTA NOZ z3i!ii o a H Y IA U m ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN REQUIRED BY: DATE 01/25/08 EN DESIGN CHANG 5/ UPDATES 03/21/06 05/23/08 DATE ISSUED: 12/14/2007 DESIGNED BY: LJW DRAWN BY: LJW CHECKED BY: GLB THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILJTY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN 1/4" ; T -0" A L A R S O N B I N K L E Y "VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID" LO1- 7R 9 • NOTE: REFER TO SHEETS F01.1, F01.2 AND F01.3 FOR FIRE ALARM REQUIREMENTS. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET E02.2 FOR POWER CODED AND CONSTRUCTION NOTES. RECEIVED JUN 0 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER z W W N - Q w ¢ x' a W . C Vf W H _- c-, I� - UO(J w 4 W m v uu a�a ° 2tn x W — U' (j (1 z E iei: g 0. ° C K a o F it Vl 4 p W :=22 F p -, � y "="411 O o x x � - . —c x 3 . ED: !i'l, J inpn _CS (n m W U m (A a =u,r O W x O p- y 2 = S P C W W O 1 H V d G2 0) $act 0 0 cp REQUIRED BY °w w �C = 0 m .=s y ~ 4 J ! —1;21 v=i3w W = ° p N .c �4 ��o 11! --6112. Oy0. O - a 6 LL 0 = (1 y ~ 0 d a w x N : :a :0 (n wa ° � o N � � p ! ° y a E; i .C.1 4 p UO W J y = o w � w1- V W w i = i-m m p i 0 W 0 O W i �y�ca a w . c c Ox~(ajN 00 w S[-W Y d � w 2 2ZW� 1- H 4�4 DESIGN CHANGES INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET 0 g • V) W � O] Z J �n W 1— J W s UVI W O N W �n tO REVISIONS: DRAWING NUMBER: n n O DATE 01/25/05 03/21/08 04/18/08 05/25/08 DATE ISSUED: 12/14/2007 DESIGNED BY: LJW DRAWN BY: LJW CHECKED BY: GLB ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN ® RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES IN "NON- SALES" SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. MOUNT ALL RECEPTACLES AT 18" A.F.F., EXCEPT AS NOTED ON PLAN. 0 CONDUIT FOR TRAFFIC COUNTER. INSTALL 1" CONDUIT FROM IFS ENCLOSURE TO THE MAIN ENTRY OF STORE AND FINISH CONDUIT WITH AN INSULATED BUSHING (INSULATED CAP) FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION OF THE TRAFFIC COUNTER. ® INSTALL A DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. LSD &C SHALL FURNISH A COMPLETE EDWARDS DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM, COMPLETE WITH TRANSFORMER, BUZZERS, LOUVERED COVERPLATES, AND PUSHBUTTON (WEATHERPROOF FOR OUTSIDE LOCATIONS). THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY JUNCTION BOXES, CONDUIT, AND WIRE TO COMPLETELY INSTALL THE DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM. ALL JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE MOUNTED VERTICALLY. ® TELEPHONE OUTLET IN WALL. INSTALL EMPTY 3/4" CONDUIT, WITH PULLWIRE, BACK TO TELCO SECTION OF IFS ENCLOSURE. TELEPHONE WIRE AND #RJ14C JACK FOR TWO LINE TELEPHONE BY OTHERS. MOUNT AT 52" A.F.F., EXCEPT AS NOTED ON PLANS. © EXTEND 1" TELEPHONE CONDUIT FROM SERVICE ENTRANCE AT DEMISING WALL TO TELEPHONE /DATA SECTION OF IFS ENCLOSURE. d SOUND SYSTEM. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND PERFORM ALL WORK AS INDICATED IN THE DETAIL. ® FURNISH AND INSTALL A 3/4" CONDUIT WITH PULLWIRE FROM HVAC SECTION OF IFS ENCLOSURE, UP TO ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENT WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ® PROVIDE A DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND DATA BOX AT 15" AFF FOR ACES SYSTEM. RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES IN "SALES" SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR (UNLESS ROOM HAS BLACK PILASTERS OR BLACK VSS TRANSITIONS, WHEREAS THE RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES SHALL THEN BE BLACK). REFER TO DETAIL FOR MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS. �n •Ile n� JV AIM LJ IFS ENCLOSURE. ALL CONDUITS STUBBED INTO IFS ENCLOSURE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A CLEAN AND NEAT MANNER. ANCHOR IFS ENCLOSURE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCAL CODES IN SEISMIC AREAS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND E05.1 FOR MORE INFORMATION. CASHWRAP /BACKWRAP COUNTER. PERFORM ALL WORK AS INDICATED IN THE DETAIL. JUNCTION BOX INSTALLED AT 48" A.F.F. WITH FACE FLUSH TO DRYWALL AND 1/2" CONDUIT UP IN WALL TO ABOVE CEILING FOR TEMPERATURE T- STAT(S) /SENSOR(S). COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL LSD &C FURNISHED CONTROL CABLE FROM JUNCTION BOX TO HVAC UNITS. ® Al R DEVICE OR ACC THE CEILING. THI CONTRAC !/ 0) 20 AMP RECEPTACLE _ 18" A.F.F. FOR REFRIGERATOR. IF PLAN LOCATION I5 NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. og JUNCTION BOX FOR WATER HEATER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. FURNISH AND INSTALL CODE REQUIRED DISCONNECT SWITCH. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND RELATED REQUIREMENTS WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. 0 JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED AT 42" A.F.F FOR HAND DRYER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT AND LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. 0 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR. MOTION DETECTOR TO BE IN 11 ALARM VER EXACT LOC vna_r�nw(�nma_n 11 • 4" WING DOORS. 0 JUNCTION BOX AND CODE REQUIRED DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR MOTORIZED ROLL -UP GRILLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND RELATED REQUIREMENTS WITH LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. 0 120V, GFI, W.P. UNIT RECEPTACLE. FURNISH AND INSTALL CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT FOR 120V POWER. 0 QUAD RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE, WHITE IN COLOR, FOR FOCAL CABINETS. 11 .. ..�v.r. .. .��. �.� .v r...v....rv.r..�r..� v.�.r.. �... . v.� �...--.v. �vvi GFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE FOR RESTROOM SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. MOUNT AT 42" A.F.F. RECEPTACLES AND COVERT LATES WITIIIN SIIOW WINDOW SI IALL BE WIIITE IN COLOR MOUNT ADOVE SHOW WINDOW 0 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. MOUNT AT 18" A.F.F. FITTING ROOM PAGING SYSTEM. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM ALL WORK AS INDICATED IN THE DETAIL. 0 ENCLOSURE WITH SENSORMATIC POWER PACK AND ISOLATED GROUND TYPE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED ON VERTICAL FACE OF SOFFIT ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE SENSORMATIC FREQUENCY WITH ADJACENT TENANT SENSORMATIC SYSTEMS. 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DEDICATED SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE FOR PORTABLE HAND STEAMERS. REFER TO SAW CUT /CORE DRILL AND PATCH I FLOOR SLAD AS REQUIRED FOR UNDERSLAB CONDUI KEYPAD FO GI G YS E , M • U E ' 0 T TAL 0 T E ' A i L -5 ' E • F H NON -SALES DOOR LEADING TO THE SALES AREA AT DOOR CLOSEST /MOST LOGICAL TO FITTING ROOMS. INSTALLATION. SENSORMATIC SYSTEM PROVIDED BY LSD &C. REFER TO SENSORMATIC DETAIL FOR ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES. ®1 20 AMP RECEPTACLE © 18" A.F.F. FOR MICROWAVE. LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. CADI CANNOT BE OBTAINED, CONTACT REVISION NO*L 11 HE REFER TO RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT POWER PLAN CODED NOTES THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON 15 SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN NTS 1/4" ; 1' -0" B A LARSON B I NKLEY Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suite 400 Overland Park, Kansas 66211 T 913-383-2621 F 913 - 383 -2831 larsanbinkley.cam COPYRIGHT 2007 ELECTRICAL PANELS r ADJACENT TENANT (N.I. ANAGER'S OFFICE 4 A -1 EM /N ) (NL) CORRIDOR ROOM (N.I.C.) NON -SALES ac ELEVATOR Z 1 4 c E04.1 EF 1 n "VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID" ADJACENT TENANT (N.I.C.) NOTE: GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY CEILING FIRE RATING WITH ARCHITECT, AND BOX OR TENT ALL RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES, IF REQUIRED, TO MAINTAIN CEILING FIRE RATING. LANDLORD COMMENTS: TENANT'S UGHTING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS SYSTEM SHALL COMPLY WITH THE WASHINGTON STATE NON- RESIDENTIAL ENERGY CODE. STOREFRONT SIGNAGE AND UGHTING TIME CLOCKS SHALL BE SET TO MALL'S OPERATING HOURS. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET E05.1 FOR PANEL SCHEDULE AND LIGHTING ZONE DESIGNATIONS. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET E03.3 FOR ELECTRICAL LIGHTING SCHEDULE AND LIGHT DESCRIPTIONS. REVISION N ELO1 1 R 9 \ RECEIVED JUN 0 3 2000 PERMIT CENTER NOTE: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR SUSPENDED LIGHTING IN NON -SALES AREA. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET E03.2 FOR UGHTING CODED AND CONSTRUCTION NOTES. THIS SHEET I5 PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY 15 ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN 1/4" = 1' -0" A 0 Lii REQUIRED BY: DESIGN CHANGES • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET 0 CNI 7 uT 4� 0 REVISIONS: DRAWING NUMBER: 2 0 2 O W a x w x N rn W W O W 2 � � _= p le N �� w W W CpS w � ' FQ �x Q � - UN��. a2� V-I = � u, ti m NO r � i:V 3 x 00 Qr m c�°- zi � � H � - 2U n u ; U- O w y Oa w0 d . 0 W O w w U U VI J c7 p 0 O a � a s0 ��c=i 0 I- V] y H W O WW C- 0 2 a 2 • r V 7 f- p V �cc N U a- w 2 0 2 Z W U Q � - p± ` V , m� 4L. SJ N , c [.+ 1o+ 2aWJ x �r- o H 0 N H N ww < L.., a� • M 0 I a 3 a VI d' =ti. g : a p "� W U fA O 2 O sy,.°.Iz 2 °S 2 2 a 'J ~2 a 2 o ° o a x 3 3 3 0 0 x � vf � Q - Qr -w O p p -I- ,� p .. c - - W Y w H [] '! 00 C I Cp¢w x F- 2 f/I w C C U , 1 z 5 C] W Y Vl U 0 C Ow d 2 'rp - Hw I dw aen V w� li1-O w r a v U= QO12 C.n N N Lc) ) N Q CC W H Z 0 I— D z 0 co CO co Q Ld Co G Z J W �■ W (4_ �o "1. — / H e 1- I" 0J z w o ■ LIJ ( < o cn o EL ix a fncG V)0J DATE ��ppNNpp��,pp ���� 01/25/08 WEG R eHANGar R UPDATES 03/21/08 DE CD 04/18/08 05/23/08 DATE ISSUED: 12/14/2007 DESIGNED BY: LJW DRAWN BY: LJW CHECKED BY: GLB ELECTRICAL 4 LIGHTING PLAN LARSON BINKLEY Larson Binkley, Inc. T 913 - 383 --2621 5363 College Blvd., Suite 400 F 913 - 383 -2831 Overland Park, Kansas 66211 Iarsonbinkley.com _ COPYRIGHT 2007 7 00052394e033.dwg 05 -21 -08 10 :55 lisa.wyant FIRE RATED PENETRATION SCHEDULE TYPE OF PENETRATION METAL CONDUITS MAX. 4" PVC CONDUIT 2" AND SMALLER PVC CONDUITS 2" THRU 4" CABLE TRAY STEEL OR ALUMINUM ELECTRICAL BUS DUCT MAX. 3" CABLE BUNDLES CONCRETE OR MASONRY FLOORS UL SYSTEM # CAJ1080 CAJ1213 CAJ1198 CAJ2031 CAJ2038 CAJ2045 CAJ2124 CAJ4029 CAJ4020 CAJ6003 CAJ6008 CAJ3154 WALLS UL SYSTEM # CAJ108O WJ1030 CAJ1198 WJ2018 CAJ2038 CAJ2045 CAJ2124 WJ4021 CAJ4020 WJ4009 CAJ6003 CAJ6008 WJ3022 GYPSUM BOARD /FRAME FLOORS UL SYSTEM FC1010 FC2032 FC2033 WALLS UL SYSTEM j WL1049 WL1088 WL1062 WL2093 WL2029 WL2059 WL4008 WL4005 WL6001 WL3076 "SPECSEAL FIRESTOP" PRODUCTS SSS100 SEALANT LC150 SEALANT PEN300 SILICONE SSS100 SEALANT FIRESTOP COLLAR FIRESTOP COLLAR WRAP STRIPS FIRESTOP PILLOWS FIRESTOP MORTAR 555100 SEALANT PEN300 SILICONE SSS100 SEALANT SSS100 SEALANT NOTES: 1. ALL U.L. USTED SYSTEMS SHOWN ABOVE ARE BASED ON PROVIDING A 1 & 2 HOUR RATED FIRESTOP. WHERE 3 HOUR RATING IS REQUIRED, CONTACT FIRESTOP PRODUCT MANUFACTURER FOR DESIGN MODIFICATIONS. 2. ALL U.L. USTED SYSTEMS SHOWN ABOVE ARE BASED ON "SpecSeal Fires-lop" PRODUCTS FROM SPECIFIED TECHNOLOGIES, INC. OR APPROVED EQUAL PRODUCTS FROM "3 —M" OR HILT!, INC. FIRE PENETRATION SCHEDULE SYMBOL r _ B A EM A A 0 X2 0 MS $D NL EM € cp i)=1 SC SM E_1 DESCRIPTION RECESSED DOWNLIGHT TRACK LIGHT TRACK HEAD SHOW WINDOW FLUORESCENT STRIP EMERGENCY FLUOR. STRIP FLUORESCENT TROFFER SCONCE DECORATIVE PENDANTS EXIT SIGN EMERGENCY LIGHT, SEMI - RECESSED EMERGENCY UGHT, RECESSED SWITCH SWITCH - MOTION SENSOR SWITCH - DIMMER NIGHT LIGHT EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING EXHAUST FAN TRAFFIC COUNTER SPEAKERS SUBWOOFER SECURITY CAMERA VIEW MONITOR FOR SECURITY SYSTEM NTS OODE033MOSCHD S MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR UGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR UGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR UGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION HUBBELL WS1277W2 PASSIVE INFRARED, DOUBLE POLE SINGLE THROW WALL SWITCH SENSOR WITH TWO SEPARATE RELAYS. WHITE COLOR FINISH. HUBBELL 561W, SINGLE POLE, SINGLE THROW WALL DIMMER SWITCH. WHITE COLOR FINISH. GC160, 120 VOLT, 1 PHASE, 115 WATTS NOTE: WALL MOUNTED /CEILING MOUNTED NOTE: ALL SYMBOLS MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS PROJECT. SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. LIGHTING SYMBOL SCHEDULE 1. LIGHTING SHALL BE CIRCUITED EXACTLY AS SHOWN ON PLANS. CIRCUITING SHALL BE "THRU - WIRING" WHERE AND WHENEVER POSSIBLE. MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS TO A SINGLE LIGHT FIXTURE FOR VOLTAGE DROP CONDITIONS OR AS A RESULT OF A FIELD CONDITION ARE ACCEPTABLE. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE MANUFACTURED TO ACCOMMODATE "THRU- WIRING ". ANY RELATED COSTS FOR MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE INCLUDED IN BID. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S BID SHALL INCLUDE THE INSTALLATION OF ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND ASSOCIATED LAMPS FURNISHED BY LSD &C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR I5 RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THE ADJUSTABIUTY OF ALL DIRECTIONAL FIXTURES AFTER INSTALLATION AND AIM THEM PER GC DIRECTION. UGHT FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS MAY VARY. IF THIS IS THE CASE, CONTRACTOR I5 TO CALL LSD &C PURCHASING AGENT WHO WILL THEN CALL THE DISTRIBUTOR FOR EXACT SPECIFICATION OF UGHTING FIXTURES. IF THE CEILING SYSTEMS ARE FIRE RATED, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO CLOSELY COORDINATE FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS WITH LSD &C. 3. EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTS SHALL BE INSTALLED AND CIRCUITED PER LOCAL AND LATEST NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODES. ALL EMERGENCY AND EXIT FIXTURES SHALL BE DUAL VOLTAGE WITH BATTERY BACK UP (120/277 VOLT INPUT). INSTALL A CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM WHERE THE USE OF INDIVIDUAL BATTERY UNITS ARE PROHIBITED BY LOCAL CODES. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. 4. ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS UP TO 100' -0" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #12 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS FROM 100' -1" TO 150' -0" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #10 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS 150' -01" UP TO 250' -O" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #8 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. CIRCUITS ABOVE 251' -0" SHALL UTILIZE #6 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED FOR A FULLY COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM. 6. EXIT /EMERGENCY LIGHTS AT STOREFRONT ARE TO BE CEILING MOUNTED AND CENTERED OVER OPENING. EXIT /EMERGENCY LIGHTS AT DOOR TO NON -SALES SHALL BE CEILING MOUNTED AND CENTERED ABOVE DOOR. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT THE LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. 7. IT WILL BE THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO UNLOAD INVENTORY AND STORE UGHTING PACKAGE. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL ALSO SHIP ANY EXCESS MATERIALS BACK TO THE ELECTRICAL PACKAGE DISTRIBUTOR. 8. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER BACK TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ALL WALL MOUNTED EMERGENCY EGRESS AND EXIT FIXTURES. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. 9. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR COORDINATION AND EXACT LOCATION OF EXIT SIGNS, EMERGENCY UGHTING FIXTURES, SPEAKERS, DIFFUSERS, AND OTHER ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS. 10. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MUST INCLUDE IN THE BID TWO (2) HOURS OF START -UP TIME FOR THE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO REPAIR OR REPLACE COMPONENTS FOUND TO BE DEFECTIVE. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MUST COORDINATE UGHTING CONTROL START -UP WITH HVAC MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY REQUIRE THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO RETURN TO THE JOB SITE TO PERFORM START -UP AT A FUTURE DATE AT THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S OWN EXPENSE. LIGHTING PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES NTS OODE033KOSCHD P NTS NIT11 It17ikTOI f el ! f.� i N ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE NOTES ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE 1. ALL FIXTURES ARE FURNISHED BY LSD&C UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND WIRING METHODS WITHIN PLENUM CEILING SHALL BE 'PLENUM APPROVED" AS PER LOCAL ORDINANCES. 3. ALL UGHT FIXTURES WITH 'EM' AFTER FIXTURE DESIGNATION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH AN EMERGENCY BALLAST, PRODUCING A MINIMUM OF 1000 LUMENS FOR ONE (1) 48" LAMP. HALO — PORTFOLIO: C7032 -1E- 7001 —H U W UGHTO ER —CAL LIFE: 8021 CCOP. 96132BU JUNO: CV6- 126/32T- 6000 —SF 26 waft, T4, 4Pin GX24q -3 Base, Triple Compact Fluorescent, 3000K. 82CRI, 10,000 Hrs. OLTAG SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER HEIGHT LAMP WATTAGE VOLTAGE RECESSED EMERGENCY LIGHT FOR SALES FLOOR USE, HIGHLfIES: AG -1 - 16 X9 ADJUSTABLE LAMP, INTEGRAL BATTERY FOR EMERGENCY UGHTALARMS 605P1/1115 — (1) 1iW Halogen 8 120 OPERATION WATTS VOLTS SEMI — RECESSED CEILING MOUNTED LED EXIT SIGN, EDGE UT, SINGLE FACE, INJECTION— MOLDED, 4 120 XB WEDGE SHAPED ACRYLIC, RED LETTERS, INTEGRAL HIGHLITES: LED BPN RXFO 2 — RC :35 - 122 — LED WATTS VOLTS EMERGENCY 90 MINUTE LIGHT BATTERY BACK —UP 5 . ICE ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER HEIGHT OLTAG RECEIVED JUN 0 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER 0 4 F 0 2 W U CC La 2 y In w 4 w a 2 VI � .. u.r O a - VI W .. '� U 0 C4] 1- 000 CC - a m U1 In 1- O 21.14 U 0 2 In 0 - La 2 REQUIRED BY: • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: REVISIONS: DRAWING NUMBER: .c Li3 2 o 7- Q W,- 6 2 1Y p CO 2 W w 4 U a W 0 a d CL q = La = W 2 2 U O O W 4 Lu La LL1 La cc Lo a re a 0 LL a-. Q ^ 0 ~ C O W d 4 U V O O H ¢ VI, -- V y W j N U �a U 4 0 D W N �_ m F 0 H a ,, �� W W O m a a c� 2 z� o H 7 U w>-x 0.[7 = V C O [ n a w ° zc ~ iv ii C_l O L] ., 0 Y _. d Y N O = 2 Z Z 0 cc w w ,i HJ W W 2 0 ? w 400 ,nl a la. W 20 J a0 JAN,- Q L: r1 "' V, g_ 7 .F2,? v. 0 .- 4 07 N a S - , fl w EC La = �2�a ^� ,j, 2 ul - 2 pF,O -- 4. w a,,, l..w .c > o a i- d z�w � d °� ,„ � `'� -c =ma 0 2 2 20 20 O2 g 2- 2 S Q Q 0 W 2 U 4 p 4 2 = $ a 0 r0 -- 4, Q N 6N Z g W N wr Q � O � H V1 0 C �- V O U } 1,..1_ ia 0 W -. 00 -re U' r :z- 0 t m W W 0 W 00o G E W 2 ; N 0 a a H N x U 6"1' D- V l U L.9-L1 J a 2 W w 0 1- 4re4 U= a- 0 N_1 U C C U [��77�$ 01 /25/08 ESIGN C HANGES /MASTER UPDATES 03/21/06 04/18/08 DESIGN CHANGES 05/23/08 12/14/2007 LJ W LJW GLB ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE SYMBOL A6 AF AJ BL BQ CF CS F3 F4 FG FR FW L3 4 L5 N1E NE TS X2 X6 DESCRIPTION 6' DIAMETER RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT, CLEAR CONE, MATTE FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, SELF FLANGED REFLECTOR 6" DIAMETER RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT, EMERGENCY BALLAST, CLEAR CONE, MATTE FINISH WITH EM TEST SWITCH IN TRIM 6" DIAMETER RECESSED HORIZONTAL LAMP COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT, CLEAR CONE, MATTE FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, SELF FLANGED REFLECTOR 6" DIAMETER RECESSED HORIZONTAL LAMP COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT, CLEAR CONE, MATTE FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, SELF FLANGED REFLECTOR EM BALLAST INSTALLED 4' DIAMETER ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT CLEAR MATT FINISH, SEMI DIFFUSSED REFLECTOR. ELECTRONIC TRANSFORMER. 3' DIAMETER RECESSED ADJUSTABLE MR16 ACCENT LIGHT, CONICAL DROP HINGE LAMP, MATTE WHITE FINISH, 358' ROTATION, 85• ADJUSTABILRY, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC TRANSFORMER, SECURE HOUSING TO STRUCTURE CERAMIC METAL HALIDE TRACK HEAD, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, COLOR CORRECTION REFLECTOR, WHITE FINISH METAL HALIDE, 2 LAMPS, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, WHITE FINISH 3' BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION 4' BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION 4' SURFACE MOUNTED BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION. WITH EMERGENCY PACK. WIRE GUARD. 4' SURFACE MOUNTED BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION WIRE GUARD 16' SURFACE MOUNTED BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION, (4) 4' SECTIONS TANDEM WIRED ON ONE BALLAST, QUICK CONNECT PLUGS WIRE GUARD 16' SURFACE MOUNTED LOW PROFILE LINEAR FLUORESCENT CHANNEL, INTEGRAL LOW BALLAST FACTOR ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN PROFILE 6' BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC LOW BALLAST FACTOR BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION 1' X 4 SURFACE MOUNTED SINGLE LAMP FLUORESCENT TROFFER, PRISMATIC ACRYLIC LENS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST WITH EMPK "PINK" NEON PRIMEUTE 40/19 WHITE PENDANT WITH 6" CANOPY WHITE FINISH 4 1/2' STEM WHITE FINISH, 18" IN DIAMETER SOCKET LABEL FOR 60W. ''�TTTT T T r 4 1/4 DIAMETER TRACK MOUNTED PAR30 METAL HALIDE TRACKHEAD, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, MATTE WHITE FINISH SURFACE MOUNTED SINGLE CIRCUIT TRACK, MATTE WHITE FINISH SEMI — RECESSED CEILING MOUNTED LED EXIT SIGN, EDGE UT, SINGLE FACE, INJECTION — MOLDED, WEDGE SHAPED ACRYUC, RED LETTERS. INTEGRAL EMERGENCY SERVICE THERMOPLASTIC EXIT SIGN, UNIVERSAL MOUNTING CERUNG/WALL, LID LAMPS AND INTEGRAL BATTERY BACK UP FOR 90 MINUTES MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER UGHTOU ER—CALCULfIE: 8021 CCDPE. 6132BUEM HALO — PORTFOLIO: C6132 -1E- 6051 —H UGHTOUER— CALCUUTE: B031CCDP. 6132BU UGHTOUER: 8031CCOP. 61328UEM UGHTOUER: C4LV: C4MRACCDW RSA: MLV3084. C500 /EL/MBA -35 COON -TEC LVR316. 75 AMERLUX: CYTL 20 MM E WT TJ1 120 FI. DR269Q AMERLUX: CYLSR 2 20 MM E WT 120 FL DB2690 WH MERCURY: MM- 125-0CT -0— EL13-120V METALUX: SN- 125 —LRS- 120 —EB81_ DURAY: E0H1125 MERCURY: MM- 132— OCT —C —ELB -1201 METAIJJX: SN- 132 —LR5- 120 —EB81 .URAY: EQH113Z MERCURY: M14- 132— OCT— C— E18-120V —EMPK MERCURY: MM- 132— OCT— C— ELB -120V. WG —MM -140 METAWX: SN- 132 —LRS- 120 —EB81. WG /SN -4FT DURAY: EOH1132. WG-3" MERCURY: MM- 132— OCT /16T —C— LLB -120V. (4).WG— MM-140 METALUX: 16TSN- 132 —LRS- 120 —EB81. (4)WG /SN -4FT DURAY: EOH1132TZ -16'. (4)WG -3" BARTCO: (4)BFL255 -32(1 BALLAST WIRED IN TANDEM) MERCURY: MM- 125 —OCT /6T— C— ELB— LW -120V MEtAUXK 6TSN- 125 —LRS- 120 — I E0081 DURAY: EQH1125TZ MERCURY: U30- 132— OCT- 9A— ELB- 120V —ELJI( PROVIDED BY OTHERS PRIMELTTE: 40/19- 18 -4.5" CON —TECH: LACM- 39MHE1 QTL1610M- 39MH— P— FA- 37A— LF30 -73 CON —TECH: LT2P. LT4P—LTBP. LTBP. LT12P as required JUNO: T2WH. T4W11. T6WH. TBWH. T12WH as required HALO: 1650P. L651 P. L652P. L653P as required INDY: 2T —W. 4T —W. 6T —W. 8T —W. 12T —W as required HIGH —LIES:LED— BPN—RXFO -2 —RC ASTRAUTE: TPURWEM HEIGHT 9 5/8" 7 1/4" 7 1/4 5 1/2" 3 1/2" 5 7/16" 3 1/4" 3 1/4' 3 1/4" 3 1/4" 3 1/4" 2 1/2" 3 1/4" 3 3/4' 11/16' LAMP 26 watt, T4, 4Pin GX24q -3 Base, Triple Compact Fluorescent, 3000K, 82CRI, 10,000 Hrs. 26 watt, T4, 4Pin GX24q -3 Base, Triple Compact Fluorescent, 3000K. 82CRI, 10,000 Hrs. 26 watt. T4, 4Pin GX24q -3 Base, Triple Compact Fluorescent, 3000K, 82CRI, 10,000 Hrs. 35 watt HIR, MR16, 2 Pin GX 5.3 Base, Quartz Halogen, Narrow Flood 24% 5000 Hrs. 35 watt FOR, MR16, 2 Pin GX 5.3 Base, Quartz Halogen, Narrow Flood 24', 5000 Hrs. 20 watt, Ceramic Metal Halide. T4, PGJ5 base, 3000K, 12,000 HRS. 2 -20 watt, Metal Hafde, PGJ5 base, 3000K, 12,000 HRS. 25waft, T8, Medium Bi —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000k, B2CRI, 20,000 Hrs. 32 Watt, TB, Medium BI —Pin Base, Linear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRI, 20,000 Hrs. 32 Watt, TB, Medium N—Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRI, 20,000 Hrs. 32 Watt, TB, Medium Bi —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRI, 20,000 Hrs. 32 Watt, T8. Medium BI —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRI, 20.000 Hrs. 32 Waft, TB, Medium BI —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRI, 20.000 Hrs. 25watt, T8, Medium BI —Pin Base, Linear Fluorescent, 3000k, 82CRI. 20.000 Hrs. 32 Watt, T8, Medium BI—Pin Base, Linear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRI, 20.000 Hrs. Pink Colored Neon LED LED 32 WATTS 32 WATTS 32 WATTS 35 WATTS 35 WATTS 26 WATTS 52 WATTS 27 WATTS 32 WAITS 32 WATTS 32 WATTS 112 WATTS 98 WATTS 42 WATTS 32 WATTS 10 1/2" 60 Watt, 130 Soft White, Medium Screw Base, Incandescent, 4000 Hrs. 39 Watt, PAR30, Medium Base, Metal Halide, Clear, 3000K, 85 CR1, no 30•, 9000 Hrs. 60 WATTS VOLTS 4 WATTS 4 WATTS 120 V 120 V 120 V 120 VOLTS 12/120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 12/120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHDWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. NTS OODEO33AOSCHD A L A R S O N B I N K L E Y Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suite 400 Overland Park, Kansas 66211 T 913 - 383 - 2621 F 913 - 383 -2831 larsanbinkley.com COPYRIGHT 2007 NOTE DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (E) INNER CONDUIT TO ANTENNA 8" MIN. (F) CAP BOX TO REMOTE ALARM 7' MAX. (G) POWER PACK TO REMOTE ALARM 25')MAX. (H) ANTENNA SEPERATION 2" MIN TO 24" MAX (J) OUTER CONDUIT TO ANTENNA 10" MIN (K) WIDTH OF EXCAVATION 4' -3" NOTE DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (A) SURFACE TO ANTENNA 1.25" MIN. TO 2" MAX. (B) ANTENNA THICKNESS 0.75" (C) ANTENNA TO REBAR 8" MIN. (D) DEPTH OF EXCAVATION 2" MIN. TO 2.75" MAX. NO OF ANTENNAS POWER PACK(S) REQUIRED CAP ENCLOSURE(S) REQUIRED 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 2 4 2 2 NOTE NO OF ANTENNAS LENGTH OF EXCAVATION (L) 1 7' -2" 2 14' -3" 3 21' -4" 4 28' -5" NO METAL REBAR OR WIRE MESH WITHIN 21CM (8 ") OF BOTTOM AND 31CM (12 ") OF SIDES OF ANTENNA FRONT ELEVATION NTS f (K) LEASE LINE (FIELD VERIFY) PLAN VIEW NTS 8 °MIN STORE SIDE (L) 1 (H) f \, r ,� l l I 8 "MIN MALL SIDE POWER PACK ANTENNAS REBAR, MESH, PAN OR OTHER METAL REINFORCEMENT (G) CONDUIT RUN 10.5M (35') OR 1 6.8M (55') MAX. CAP BOARD ENCLOSURE REMOTE ALARM POWER PACK EMOTE ALARM CEILING LINE SENSORMATIC DIGITAL FLOOR MAX SYSTEM NOTES �1 INDIVIDUAL 3/4 INCH EMT CONDUIT INTERCONNECTS BETWEEN EACH FLOOR PANEL AND ITS RESPECTIVE CAP ENCLOSURE BOX - CAP ENCLOSURE BOXES ARE LOCATED ABOVE CEILING WITHIN 2 FEET OF POWER PACK. CONDUIT ABOVE CEILING SHALL BE ROUTED CLEAR OF ACCESS OPENING. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF CONDUIT SHALL NOT EXCEED 35' FROM FLOOR PANEL TO CAP BOX. NOTE: CONDUIT RUNS UNDERFLOOR SHALL BE RMC OR IMC. CAP BOARD ENCLOSURE. EACH CAP BOX MUST BE MOUNTED WITHIN 2 FEET OF POWER PACK. ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE, SIZED PER CODE, LOCATED IN AREA ABOVE CEILING. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ARE 120V. AC, THREE WIRE, DEDICATED CIRCUIT, 24 HOUR CIRCUIT WITH LESS THAN 0.5V. AC BETWEEN NEUTRAL AND GROUND. • RETURN AIR GRILLE OR ACCESS PANEL TO BE USED FOR SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE ROUGH -IN OF JUNCTION BOX AND RECEPTACLE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. CRILLE /ACCESS PANEL MUST BE 24 IN. BY 24 IN. MINIMUM. ® 1 -1/2 INCHES DEEP X 4 FOOT WIDE (APPROXIMATE) SAWCUT FOR EACH FLOOR PANEL DEPTH OF CUT SHALL BE LEVEL THROUGHOUT. CONFIRM ACTUAL DIMENSIONS OF SAWCUTS WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. IF THE SLAB CANNOT BE CUT FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE FLOOR (ANTENNA) PANELS, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUST INVESTIGATE THE OPTION OF "FLOATING" THE PANELS IN AN ADDITIONAL LAYER OF POURED CONCRETE ('RAMPING UP'). THIS WILL DEPEND ON THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR INSIDE THE STORE IN RELATION TO THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR IN THE MALL. THE TYPE OF FINISHED FLOORING WILL HAVE SOME EFFECT ON THE ACTUAL DEPTH OF THE FLOOR PANELS IN THE SLAB. THE THICKNESS OF THE FLOORING PLUS THE THICKNESS OF THE CONCRETE PATCH OVER THE PANELS SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY 1 -1/2 INCHES. 6® SAWCUT FLOOR 1" WIDE X 1 -1/2" DEEP FOR INSTALLATION OF 3/4" CONDUIT. • NOTCH TRENCHES AT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS OF FLOOR PANELS. TYPICAL OF ALL FLOOR PANELS. Q JUNCTION BOX WITH 120V. AC POWER FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO SENSORMATIC POWER PACKS. INSTALLATION OF POWER PACKS AND PLUG -IN OF PACKS TO RECEPTACLE BY SENSORMATIC. NOTE: CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY AN UNOBSTRUCTED MINIMUM FREE AREA OF 3 FEET VERTICALLY AND 3 FEET WIDE IN EVERY DIRECTION ABOVE THE ACCESS PANEL TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION OF THE SENSORMATIC POWER PACK AND CAP ENCLOSURE BOXES. IF FREE AREA CANNOT BE OBTAINED IN THIS LOCATION, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER FOR FURTHER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. NOTE: GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF THE SENSORMATIC SYSTEM WITH SENSORMATIC MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS. "ON- GRADE" SENSORMATIC FLOORMAX SYSTEM DETAIL (11' -O" OR GREATER GRILLE OPENING) THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. NTS 05DE044JOSENS J BACK ELEVATION NTS NTS 0 0 PLAN VIEW (I (> 11 ( ) O 1� REGISTERS SHALL SHARE 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DEDICATED CIRCUIT WITH A SEPARATE ISOLATED NEUTRAL & 3RD WIRE GROUND. STUB UP 3/4" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.) WHERE SHOWN ON DETAIL INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO J -BOX AND CONNECT TO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ORANGE #1G5362 RECEPTACLES (HUBBELL). CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO PANEL LOCATED INSIDE IFS ENCLOSURE. REFER TO POWER PLAN AND PANEL SCHEDULES FOR CIRCUIT DESIGNATIONS. 0 20 AMP, 120V, CIRCUITS FOR UTILITY POWER W /DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. STUB UP 3/4" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.) WHERE SHOWN ON DETAIL. INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO J -BOX AND CONNECT TO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND BACK TO PANEL AS INDICATED ON POWER PLAN. 0 0 ALL RECEPTACLES LOCATED IN AREA ACCESSED BY REMOVABLE DOOR INSIDE OF CASHWRAP CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN ON POWER PLAN CASHWRAP & TELE /COMP SYSTEM NOTES 0 0 0 6' 8 REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF CASHWRAP. FACE OF WALL ® STUB UP 1" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.). INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO 4X4 J -BOX FOR DATA. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP IN WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO TELECO STRUCTURE PORTION OF THE IFS SWITCHGEAR. WIRE FOR DATA LINES TO BE PULLED AND CONNECTED BY P.O.S. CONTRACTOR. DATA TERMINALS AND CONNECTIONS BY P.O.S. CONTRACTOR NOTE: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION POWER /DATA REQUIREMENTS FOR 4 REGISTER CASHWRAP (COMPRESSED) NTS 05DE044C34CMPW 0 0 L BACK ELEVATION NTS NTS PLAN VIEW 20 AMP, 120V, CIRCUIT FOR UTILITY POWER W /DUPLEX RECEPTACLE BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CONNECT TO CIRCUIT AS SHOWN ON POWER PLAN. NOTE: LABEL AND TAG ALL PULLWIRE RUNS AT EACH END WITH ORIGIN /DESIGNATION. 0 BACKWRAP & TELE /COMP SYSTEM NOTES TELEPHONE OUTLET ON INSIDE OF BACKWRAP UNIT. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO INSALL 3/4" TELEPHONE CONDUIT WITH PULLWIRE DOWN WALL FROM CEILING SPACE TO 9" AFF. TELEPHONE WIRE AND #RJ14C JACK BY OTHERS. EDWARDS 1064 -G5 BUZZER. SEE POWER PLAN FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. T r +9" A.F.F. +9" A.F.F. +9" A.F.F. 6' -5" L°J 0 itir 0 0 BACK WALL CONNECT TO BUZZER TRANSFORMER SHOWN ON PLAN CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SH WN ON POWER PLAN 9" A.F.F. +9" A.F.F. REVISION N0, LOT NOTE: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RECEIVED JUN 0 3 2006 PErim I CENTER POWER DATA REQUIREMENTS FOR BACKWRAP (BW161) NTS LARSON BI N K L E Y Larson Binkley, In 6363 College Blvd.. Overland Park, Kansas T 913 - 383 -2621 0 E 913 - 383 -2831 Iarsonbinkley.com COPYRIGHT 2007 Suite 66211 U N r yw 3 � x w w W a =:. rcw 0 0 0 1 xaa x sc3 4 W t'1 Q Q ! Zi0 2 0 4 U F U O ii j 0 n tn � o V ) y m V I w Q JJO p t; E" . 2 V. F N J W v rF =3 v4� C7 r eaa d r 0 a d O W ¢N awaN a t , '�jo �w O T (C 0 0� o Ww e o y H 4 � 4 Q O � W 4 p 4 H v to K U w W - a - W = =a� a v 2 io REQUIRED BY: W vl H w ce DESIGN CHANGES REVISIONS: 4 . INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: ELECTRICAL DETAILS ce ❑ Z WNU< LL wrn1 W DRAWING NUMBER: CL u.� LLJ Er Is E75 00 co o) 0 0 Ui N z mc'-34 aa 0 ljr C# w G = W O a d ar=F w W = :Q 4 x 0 O :... �ri ^ p C H 1 :, ::: a Na� ° m 0 o a� d a z ¢ z 7 UO21 a C9 _ :00 O VI t: �w 0 JJ d w a :6-62912:- C Z a O v! �N 2 r H W = C: 126::: w Y O 1;1 a c � z c n i l=6; a�cv =, U tn ' 0 = x 33o ` = � i vi vi 3- N oE Mt..,m U = C __DI = w 12/14/2007 LJW LJW GLB DATE 01/25/0$ 03/21/08 04/18/08 05/23/08 PANELBOARD A LOCATION: WR ENCLOSURE (IFS) VOLTAGE 120 /208V., 3PH, 4W MOUNTING SURFACE 60A M.C.B BUS RATING 100A A.I.C.: 10,000A LCL .40.4..F.ale;rme,Am: LTG CCT LOAD -- , ;0i Aso. CB LOAD CB LOAD DESCRIPTION CCT NO. LTG ZONE LCL ari, 411111isa B C AMP POLE X X AMA X • 7 • AMIN D 1 w AMA 7 SALES AREA NUEMG w W F w Now R • 5E N AMA .NIIIIN. AMA ..IINNA. AM. SALES TRACK LTS 20 �► 1 0 AMA ANNA 20 °- /` 1 STOCK ROOM LTS. 2 6 X -- X X - ,;, 166 692 H I L A 'O F R u LT SALES AREA LTS. • 6 8 - - C 101 .; 00 642 AMA ANNO... Esv 078 � ...:::sF 1 1 a ' 0 0.000 360 ':x:Y -A'. X D 9 SALES TRACK LTS k g I Fir' v I :I z 'i 1, 2 20 1 '• .... ' 79 20 SALES AREA TS. 1 / 4 C X D 11 SALES TRACK LTS 20 1 , «.F ` :• # 1 21 fl0& 20 ■ SALES AREA LTS. 12 C X i X D 13 NEON SIGNS 20 1 8 C 6.000 ELEC. HEAT _ - � rr���� 4 1.."w' - e 5 G` ;. ∎ P ■ ..•H 0. :; .: f . 20 n:l ,y ... 1 1 KITTY CORNER RCPT SALES AREA RCPT 10 12 C C -- 6.000 HEAT SPARE 16 C THRU UNIT DI SW. 15A -3P D 17 SPARE 1 900 360. t 't. ` ': ` 4 4- '' 0... 1. AC' TOGGLE SWITCH 2. DISCONNECT SWITCH SPARE 18 w Now E � .:� 2185 : I :I 2,1851 ? =strP.. D 19 SPARE 20 0 0.'F''`z , » „.x 20 SPARE 20 16 21 SPARE SOUND SYSTEM %'r� x p mow; w H EE x t / :1E 800 1 540 SPACE ONLY 22 RESTROOM RCPT 18 23 SPACE ONLY 19 20 SPACE ONLY 24 1 DRINKING FOUNTAIN 20 25 SPACE ONLY 0 ,. fFw.... ; MICROWAVE SPACE ONLY 26 20 1 (WR) TEMP. CONTROL 22 27 SPACE ONLY 1 ° 0 sj ' iit 23 SPACE ONLY 28 ..z. , 2 y .; - - 1 500 380 20 1 (WR) TELEPHONE 29 SPACE ONLY a z33 » p yj'' mr'r'+.i { { {:: SPACE ONLY 30 rc n .µ 1,00 fl ` 20 1 31 SPACE ONLY 0 : %„rl.:,r.'( SPACE ONLY 32 HAND DRYER 20 1,20D 1 gg " 20 33 SPACE ONLY 28 p a'` SPACE ONLY 34 29 HAND DRYER 35 SPACE ONLY 20 A ,IM } 0 FACP SPACE ONLY 36 31 37 SPACE ONLY 1 0 }'' ' 0 '' 1 SPACE ONLY 38 39 SPACE ONLY 20 0 0 SPACE ONLY 40 34 41 SPACE ONLY` ` 0 SPACE ONLY 42 SPACE ONLY LOAD /PH: (NEC CONNECTED) 2,842 3,651 4,122 TOTAL VA: 13,269 VA LCL @ 25% PER PHASE 711 913 1,031 TOTAL AMPS: 37 A TOTAL LOAD /PH: (NEC DEMAND) 3,553 4,564 5,153 NOTES: ALL aRCL1TS BREAKERS TO BE 20 A -, 1 -POLE UNLESS OTt -MSE NOTED, ACTUAL LOA' A 2,842 kW NEC CONNECTED TOTALS A 3,553 kW B 3,651 kW B 4,564 kW C 4,122 kW C 5,153 kW TOTAL 10,615 kW TOTAL 13,269 kW (ALL PHASES SHALL B ;r• • ••v7•' u A II • L ••D •TA ) BREAKER OPTIONS: 0 44 d `w - ABR - SOLENOID OPERATED BABR LO - HANDLE LOCK -OFF DEVICE ST - SHUNT TRIP AUX AUXILIARY CONTACTS PA- HANDLE PADLOCK ATTACHMENT GFCI - GROUNDFAULTINTERRUPT HACK - HEATING, NC & REFRIGERATION LCL - CONTINUOUS LOAD PANELBOARD B LOCATION: WR ENCLOSURE (IFS) VOLTAGE 120/208V., 3PH, 4W MOUNTING SURFACE 90A M.C.B BUS RATING 100A &LC.: 10,000A LCL LTG ZONE CCT NO. LOAD DESCRIPTION CB LOAD CB LOAD DESCRIP11ON CCT NO. LTG ZONE LCL AMP POLE A 8 C AMP POLE WATER HEATER 208V, 10 1 ROLLING GRILLE 20 1 1 € >} • " .. 'AC' TOGGLE SWITCH 1 HAND STEAMER RCPT. 2 C 0.000 360 ':x:Y 277/480V, 30 _ E. ELEC. HEAT S NSs MiTIC 0 1 1' z.; 20 1 HAND STEAMER RCPT. 4 C n �J FPVAV 2 (WITH HEA 277/480V, 30 5 BACK WRAP RCPT • ,r -•+ R . 20 ■ 1 1 RxN'',w, " '' 1 1 .:.. wvvs" . .n � .•n ta 360 K x �. � ..: r 20 20 1 SPARE 6 C SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW 1 HAND STEAMER RCPT. 8 C 6.000 ELEC. HEAT _ - 4 #12 THHN 1 #12 G 9 CASH WRAP IG 20 20 " ill � 5 40 - "' ail 1 20 20 1 1 KITTY CORNER RCPT SALES AREA RCPT 10 12 C C -- 6.000 HEAT __ 11 MANAGER RCPT THRU UNIT DI SW. 15A -3P 13 MANAGER RCPT fG 20 1 900 360. t 't. ` ': ` �0 1. AC' TOGGLE SWITCH 2. DISCONNECT SWITCH w w 'ow 15 w Now E � .:� 2185 : I :I 2,1851 ? =strP.. 15 15 PAGING SYSTEM 20 1 360' 900 " ?1r : %r . 20 1 STOCK ROOM RCPT 16 17 SOUND SYSTEM 20 w H EE x t / :1E 800 1 540 20 1 RESTROOM RCPT 18 19 REFRIGERATOR 20 1,200 1.: I :: I I ,. , .. . . 1 € 600, . 20 1 DRINKING FOUNTAIN 20 21 MICROWAVE 20 1 ) 1 20 500 20 1 (WR) TEMP. CONTROL 22 TRANSFORMER 45 KVA 6 23 WATER HEATER 20 ..z. , 2 y .; - - 1 500 380 20 1 (WR) TELEPHONE 24 25 rc n .µ 1,00 fl ` 20 1 SPARE 26 TOTAL LOAD /PH: (NEC DEMAND) 19,106 20,097 19,686 NOTES: ALL CIRCUITS BREAKERS TO BE 20 AMP, 1 -POLE UNLESS 011 NOTED. ACTUAL LOAD A 19,106 kW N E C CONNECTED TOTALS A 19,106 kW . .. B 20,097 kW B 20,097 kW '• C19,686kW C19,686kW •' •.° TOTAL 58,888 kW TOTAL 58,888 kW •'' (ALL PHASES SI-ALL BE BALANCEDWTH 7% USING ACTUAL LOAD TOTALS) . • .. 27 HAND DRYER 20 1,20D 1 gg " 20 1 ACES 28 29 HAND DRYER 20 4. l .: 1 2 . `. 1 ,,55 55 -rd 200 20 1 FACP 30 31 SPARE 20 1 0 }'' ' 20 1 SPARE 32 33 SPARE 20 1 ". 0 , # SPACE ONLY 34 35 SPARE 20 1 =$ p SPACE ONLY 36 37 SPACE ONLY 0 44 d `w SPACE ONLY 38 39 SPACE ONLY SPACE ONLY 40 41 SPACE ONLY .................. . s n %, • fl SPACE ONLY 42 LOAD /PH: (NEC CONNECTED) ,601 ,580 6, :1 TOTAL VA: 21,760 VA TOTAL AMPS: 60 A 2 LCL @ 25% PER PHASE 0 0 0 TOTAL LOAD/PH: (NEC DEMAND) 7,600 7,580 6,580 NOTES: ALL CIRCUITS BREAKERS TO BE 20 AMP - • E UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTES ACTUAL LO - A 7.600 kW NEC CONNECTED TOTALS A 7,600 kW B 7,580 kW B 7,580 kW C 6,580 kW C 6,580 kW TOTAL 21,760 kW TOTAL 21,760 k ALL PHASES SHALL BE BA LANCED WTI -17% USING ACTUAL LOAD TOTALS) BREAKER OPTIONS: BABR - SOLENOID OPERATED BABR LO - HANDLE LOCK -OFF DEVICE ST -SHUNT TRIP AUX- AUXILIARY CONTACTS PA- HANDLE PADLOCK ATTACHMENT GFCI - GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT HACR - HEATING, NC & REFRIGERATION LCL - CONTINUOUS LOAD ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DATA SYM. ITEM VOLTAGE HP. KW. F.L.A. FEEDERS TYPE OF CONN. BRANCH BREAKER DISC. SW. BUS/ FUSES REMARKS WIRE COND. riTh WATER HEATER 208V, 10 -- 3.0 -- 2 #12 THHN 1#12 G 1/2" 'AC' TOGGLE SWITCH 20A -2P 1. ; - -- SEE NOTE NO. 1 BELOW 0.000 FPVAV -1 (WITH HEATING) 277/480V, 30 _ E. ELEC. HEAT -- 4 #12 THHN 1 #12 G 1/2" 1/2 THRU UNIT DISC. SW. 15A -3P - -- - -- SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW n �J FPVAV 2 (WITH HEA 277/480V, 30 -- 7.000 ELEC. HEAT __ 4 #12 THHN 1#12 G 1 2 " / THRU UNIT DISC. SW. 15A -3P --- --- SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW ® FPVAV -3 (WITH HEATING) 277/480V, 30 -- 6.000 ELEC. HEAT _ - 4 #12 THHN 1 #12 G 1/2-3P THRU UNIT DISC. SW. 3.000 --- --- SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW Q FPVAV -4 (WITH HEATING) 3007/480V, -- 6.000 HEAT __ 4#12 THHN 1 #12 G " 1/2" THRU UNIT DI SW. 15A -3P -- -_ SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW NOTE: TO BE FURNISHED BY LSD &C AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL SUPPLIER. 1. AC' TOGGLE SWITCH 2. DISCONNECT SWITCH PANELBOARD IFS LOCATION: WR ENCLOSURE (IFS) VOLTAGE 277/480V., 3PH, 4W MOUNTING SURFACE BUS RATING 400A NONE A.I.C.: 65,000A LCL LTG ZONE CCT NO. LOAD DESCRIPTION CB LOAD CB 10.615 LOAD DESCRIPTION CCT NO. LTG ZONE LCL AMP POLE A B C AMP POLE 1.a< 10Kw 0.5 REMAINING 7 Y O i - S_ 0.101 .1 1. ; 1,065 2,518 w w: •gg ,." 0.000 AIR CONDITIONING 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 1.0 0.000 WATER HEATER 1 FPVAV 1 15 3 1 2 518 15 3 10.840 FPVAV - 2 2 10.840 1.0 10.840 TOTAL USE 32.375 KVA 480- 120/208V, 32.375 32.375 1.0 ... ;,'•, rc x '' 1,065 : ,I 2.518 3 PHASE TRANSFORMER 1 l ® o 1.0 3.000 3.000 1.0 3.000 MISCELLANEOUS 10. :�1_ • 1/ 2 a - 2,185 2,185 • ` =E ':'... 's € €: / :�0 TOTAL NOTES: * ** * ** * * ** "6.234 OF THE -42 REQUIREMENT REQURIEMENT MOTOR kW *1000 56.048 56.234 OR ACTUAL CONNECTED) CONNECTED) AMPERAGE NEW 200A SERVICE 60.590 w USE GREATER LOAD NEC ARTICLE 220 NEC ARTICLE 220 125% OF THE LARGEST NEC DEMAND 3 FPVAV -3 15 3 E � .:� 2185 : I :I 2,1851 ? =strP.. 15 3 FPVAV-4 4 >: ww >;;{ 2,185 I( 2,185 11,153: Me10 5 SPACE f ' { `' 0 #A ' " 5'' Il ls 12,144 i.' " rx 70 3 TRANSFORMER 45 KVA 6 �s . ,z;;�: 11,733 LOAD /PH: (NEC CONNECTED) 19,106 20,097 19,686 TOTAL VA: 58,888 VA TOTAL AMPS: 71 A LCL @ 25% PER PHASE TOTAL LOAD /PH: (NEC DEMAND) 19,106 20,097 19,686 NOTES: ALL CIRCUITS BREAKERS TO BE 20 AMP, 1 -POLE UNLESS 011 NOTED. ACTUAL LOAD A 19,106 kW N E C CONNECTED TOTALS A 19,106 kW . .. B 20,097 kW B 20,097 kW '• C19,686kW C19,686kW •' •.° TOTAL 58,888 kW TOTAL 58,888 kW •'' (ALL PHASES SI-ALL BE BALANCEDWTH 7% USING ACTUAL LOAD TOTALS) . • .. BREAKER OPTIONS: -••'•'••••'•••'•• "' °" • '' "'^ ^ • ' "' ''' ' • . x ` . Y ,.. , • f .. ,.. X, • ^ n . TRANSFORMER LOAD SUMMARY DESCRIPTION ACTUAL CONNECTED /k POWER FACTOR ACTUAL DEMAND .VA NEC CONNECTED kW VA NEC DEMAND FACTOR NEC DEMAND kVA) LIGHTING 10.615 1.0 10..15 0.61 1.25 13. • - RECEPTACLES 7.920 1.0 7.920 7.920 1.a< 10Kw 0.5 REMAINING 7 Y O i - S_ 0.101 .1 1. ; a ; ; . -- 1. i- 0.000 AIR CONDITIONING 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 1.0 0.000 WATER HEATER 3.000 1.0 3.000 3.000 1.0 3.000 MISCELLANEOUS 10.840 1.0 10.840 10.840 1.0 10.840 TOTAL USE 32.375 KVA 480- 120/208V, 32.375 32.375 1.0 35,029 45 3 PHASE TRANSFORMER 1 PANEL "A" 60A -3P MCB X7000 DESCRIPTION ACTUAL CONNECTED I ®0 gD m NEC CONNECTED NEC DEMAND FACTOR I� ❑- PPPPP „„, 6.205 1.0 aaaaa 6.205 1.25 7.756 RACK LIGHTING 4.410 1.0 4.410 4.410 ■] 0 m 150VA /2FT * ** 6.750 PRP mm I'■ ■ 7.920 .fl 8888 p 'ww 11 r / * 1 1'I. 1.0 7.920 q 0 m 1 .■ 10K 0.5 REMAINING 7.920 T om I D: 8888 mm dddddd 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 1 0.000 ELECTRIC HEATING * 21.999 1.0 21.999 21.999 0 m 1 l ® o 4 ELECTRICAL LOAD SUMMARY DESCRIPTION ACTUAL CONNECTED POWER FACTOR ACTUAL DEMAND NEC CONNECTED NEC DEMAND FACTOR NEC DEMAND LIGHTING 6.205 1.0 6.205 6.205 1.25 7.756 RACK LIGHTING 4.410 1.0 4.410 4.410 90 FT 150VA /2FT * ** 6.750 - C' II;;Y'��I RECEPTACLES - I'■ ■ 7.920 .fl p 'ww 11 r / * 1 1'I. 1.0 7.920 7.920 1 .■ 10K 0.5 REMAINING 7.920 7- AIR CONDITIONING 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 1.0 * * ** 0.000 ELECTRIC HEATING * 21.999 1.0 21.999 21.999 1.0 21.999 WATER HEATER 3.000 1.0 3.000 3.000 1.0 3.000 MISCELLANEOUS 10. :�1_ • 1/ 2 a - 0.. 1.1 / :�0 TOTAL NOTES: * ** * ** * * ** "6.234 OF THE -42 REQUIREMENT REQURIEMENT MOTOR kW *1000 56.048 56.234 OR ACTUAL CONNECTED) CONNECTED) AMPERAGE NEW 200A SERVICE 60.590 w USE GREATER LOAD NEC ARTICLE 220 NEC ARTICLE 220 125% OF THE LARGEST NEC DEMAND 11111111•1111.11"1111111"1111111. TWO CATAGORI (200VA (150VA OR COMPRESSOR _ ES PER FOOT /2FT OR ACTUAL IN SYSTEM MINIMUM FEEDER 73 A SYSTEM VOLTAGE * 1.732 60.590 * 1000 480 *1.732 ELECTRICAL POWER GENERAL NOTES 1. HVAC CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE "HACR" TYPE WHEN REQUIRED BY EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE PER N.E.C. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXACT K.A.I.C. RATING (BUILDING SERVICE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT) OF LANDLORDS DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. IF FOUND TO BE HIGHER THAN PANEL RATING, NOTIFY YOUR LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER IMMEDIATELY. 3. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BALANCE ALL PANELS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TO 7% (+/-) BETWEEN PHASES: A /B, B /C, A /C, REGARDLESS OF CIRCUITING INDICATED. 4. PROPER CLEARANCE MUST BE MAINTAINED ABOUT ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PER N.E.C. FIELD VERIFY EXACT MOUNTING SPACE AVAILABLE IN ELECTRICAL ROOM /AREA PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 5. ALL PANEL BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE BOLT -ON TYPE. 6. ALL PANEL BUS BARS SHALL BE COPPER. 7. MOUNT A TYPEWRITTEN DIRECTORY BEHIND GLASS OR PLASTIC ON THE INSIDE OF EACH PANEL DOOR AND, ON THE DIRECTORY, SHOW THE CIRCUIT NUMBER AND COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF ALL OUTLETS ON EACH CIRCUIT. 8. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 9. ALL PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS AND LINE VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FACTORY MARKED TO WARN QUALIFIED PERSONS OF POTENTIAL ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARDS. MARKING SHALL BE LOCATED SO AS TO BE CLEARLY VISIBLE TO QUALIFIED PERSONS BEFORE EXAMINATION, ADJUSTING, SERVICING OR MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT. 10. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE SURE ENTIRE INSTALLATION CONFORMS TO N.E.C. 110.3 - EXAMINATION, IDENTIFICATION, INSTALLATION, AND USE OF EQUIPMENT. 11. SWITCHBOARDS, PANELBOARDS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, AND CONTACTORS ARE TO BE "LISTED" AND "IDENTIFIED" AS RATED FOR A MINIMUM OF 75•C CONDUCTOR TERMINATION. 12. IFS ENCLOSURE LIGHTING CONTROLS: SOLENOID OPERATED BABR BREAKERS ARE PROVIDED WITH IFS PANELS FOR STORE LIGHTING CONTROLS AND STOREFRONT SIGNS. SEE PANEL SCHEDULES FOR LIGHTING ZONE DESIGNATIONS (ie: ZONE A, B, C, D) 13. IFS ENCLOSURE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS HEREIN DESCRIBED: 14. 1. A. UNIT WILL BE SHIPPED TO PROJECT IN MULTIPLE SECTIONS AND THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OFF- LOADING OF EQUIPMENT, INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT FOR DAMAGE, VERIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT RECEIVED FOR PROPER STORAGE, SETTING AND MOVING OF EQUIPMENT INTO SPACE AS WELL AS REASSEMBLING OF SECTIONS INTO ONE COMPLETE UNIT PER MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTATION. B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT ALL PROVIDED INTERCONNECTING CABLES BETWEEN SECTIONS AND TORQUE CONNECTIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. C. ALL CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE TELEPHONE /DATA SECTION AND HVAC CONTROL SECTION OF THE IFS ENCLOSURE WILL BE DONE BY OTHERS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF LOW VOLTAGE CONDUIT SYSTEM (IF REQUIRED BY CODE OR LANDLORD) INTO THESE SECTIONS ONLY. D. SWITCHBOARD WILL BE SHIPPED ON AN ENCLOSED SEMI - TRAILER. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MUST ARRANGE FOR A FORKLIFT TO OFF-LOAD AT JOB SITE. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL RECEIVE 24 NOTICE PRIOR TO DELIVERY. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL COSTS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL LOW VOLTAGE WIRING IN CONDUIT, AS PART OF BASE BID. DEMARC DEMOLITION NOTES THE G.C. SHALL NOT CUT THE MAIN TELEPHONE WIRES LEADING TO THE TERMINATION STRIP (DEMARC BLOCK) OR PHONE SYSTEM. 2. IF THE DEMARC I5 TO BE RELOCATED, IT SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH LIMITED TECHNICAL SERVICES (LTS). THE PRIMARY CONTACT IS BRENDEN SPIVEY AT 614 - 415 -4077, AND THE SECONDARY CONTACT IS ZELDA WARD AT 614- 415 -2160. 3. THE G.C. SHALL ALLOW ADEQUATE TIME FOR RELOCATION IN THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE. 4. IF THE WALL WITH THE TELEPHONE BLOCK IS SCHEDULED FOR DEMOLITION, THE ENTIRE BACKING PANEL SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE WALL (WITHOUT DISCONNECTING THE WIRING) AND IT SHALL BE SAFELY SECURED IN THE CEILING UNTIL IT CAN BE RELOCATED TO THE NEW AREA OR REINSTALLED ON WALL. 1. SERIES RATED NOTES MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER IN 'PANEL IFS' SHALL BE FULLY RATED TO PROVIDE AN INTERRUPTING RATING OF 65,000 AMPS RMS. 2. MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER SHALL BE "SERIES" RATED WITH ALL OTHER FEEDER BREAKERS IN 'PANEL IFS' TO PROVIDE AN INTERRUPTING RATING OF 65,000 AMPS RMS. 3. PANELBOARDS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT THAT IS PROTECTED BY "SERIES" RATED OVERCURRENT PROTECTED DEVICES UPSTREAM SHALL BE MARKED WITH A PERMANENT LABEL THAT INDICATES THE SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING OF THE SERIES COMBINATION AND CALLS OUT THE SPECIFIC REPLACEMENT OVERCURRENT DEVICE(S) THAT CAN BE UTILIZED. ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM, PANEL SCHEDULES, AND NOTES D LANDLORD COMMENTS ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL UTILIZE LANDLORD PROVIDED FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH LOCATED WITH IN TENANT SPACE, ON BACK WALL, FOR TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL FOR CONSTRUCTION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY TRANSFORMER AND PANEL AS REQUIRED WITH IN TENANT SPACE. LANDLORD PROVIDED MASTER METERING EQUIPMENT IN THE LANDLORD'S ELECTRICAL ROOM. THE LANDLORD OWNED NETWORK METERING SYSTEM WILL METER TENANT POWER CONSUMPTION. TENANT'S ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AN IDENTIFICATION NAME PLATE ON TENANT'S MAIN DISCONNECT SWITCH IN LANDLORD'S SWITCHBOARD. NAME PLATES SHALL BE ONE - EIGHTH INCH (1/8 ") THICK PLASTIC, BLACK ON WHITE AND ETCHED LETTERS. THE MINIMUM SIZE SHALL BE ONE INCH (1 ") WITH ONLY THE TENANT'S SPACE NUMBER ENGRAVED ON SUCH, PERMANENTLY AFFIXED. STOREFRONT SIGNAGE AND LIGHTING TIME CLOCKS SHALL BE SET TO MALL'S OPERATION HOURS. EXISTING 200A, 277/480V, 30, TENANT MAIN DISCONNECT SWITCH WITH (3) 200 LPS -RK FUSES. FIELD VERIFY REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LANDLORD ENGINEER PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. EXISTING TENANT ELECTRICAL SERVICE METER COMPLETE WITH CT'S. FIELD VERIFY REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LANDLORD AND /OR UTILITY COMPANY, PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. Lighting Time Control Legend: A - Marketing Level Lighting Show Window Lights Show Window Receptacles Exterior Signage B - Stocking Stockroom (Non - Sales) Lighting C - Task Level 2/3 Sales Floor Lighting evenly distributed (preferably Down Lights) General Sales Floor Receptacles ❑ - Sales Level Lighting Balance of Sales Floor Lighting Interior Display Lighting Display Cabinet Lighting Receptacles r LANDLORD MAIN SWITCHBOARD (MS), 1200A, 277/480V, 30, 4W, 60HZ. FIELD VERIFY. EXISTING 2" CONDUIT WITH q 3/0 KCMIL THHN + 1f6 CU G. NOTE: G.C. IS TO VERIFY LOCATION AND SIZE OF LANDLORD ELECTRICAL STUB -UP (IF EXISTING) PRIOR TO BEGINNING OF CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING OTHER RELATED WORKS. REFER TO FIELD SURVEY OR DESIGN CRITERIA. ,LEASE LINE LANDLORD TENANT SPACE ASSUMED FAULT CURRENT IS 65,000 SYM AMPS AT LL PANEL. IFS I5 A SINGLE SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE THAT MEETS NEMA STANDAR PB -2 AND UL 891 (SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION). TRANSFORMER AND PANEL FEEDER FURNISHED BY IFS MFGR. AS REQUIRED. E.C. TO MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO PANELBOARD (TYP.) ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO BALANCE TRANSFORMER TO SUPPLY 120V±3% AFTER ALL CONNECTIONS ARE MADE AND RUNNING. PROVIDE BALANCE SHEET TO THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER AT PUNCHLIST. FIELD VERIFY EXACT DISTANCE PRIOR TO BID. SEE SERIES RATED NOTE #1. EXISTING 200A, 277/480V, 30, TENANT MAIN DISCONNECT SWITCH WITH (3) 200 LPS -RK FUSES. FIELD VERIFY REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LANDLORD ENGINEER PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. J FPVAV -3 15A/3P O 0 SPACE L 0 45 KVA { 0 0 LO. FPVAV -1 FPVAV -2 15A/3P 15A/3P O O O FPVAV -4 15A /3P TRANSFORMER 70A 3P EE SERIES RATED NOTE #2. 3 #4 THHN LO. ' + 1i1D t4/6 #3 + 1 #8 XHHW �� ■■ter i J ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO EXTEND THE SERVICE FEEDER AS SHOWN, 2 "C, 4# 3/0 KCMIL THHN + 1#6 G. FIELD VERIFY. FAULT CURRENT I5 63,105 SYM AMPS. PANEL IFS; 277/480V; 30; 4W; 60HZ SUPPLY; 400A BUSS; 65,000 A.I.C. a � r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 1 PANEL " B " 90A -3P MCB 7 0 7 7 O m O m O 01 O m D m O m O 01 O m D m O m 0 m 0 CO O m O m O CO CI m O m O m n CU O m o m IIIIIIIII N Ili NMI m CI ICI 0 m 0 M 0 ID 0 El 0 m 0 m 0 113 0 ED 0 m 0 m 0 m 0 II 0 II 0 ID 0 ID 0 M 0 m 0 El 0 U3 0 C C I E.C. SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL A 3/4" CONDUIT AND PULLWIRE FROM DEMARC TO IFS ENCLOSURE. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 B-22 # 6 THHN GROUND CONDUCTOR (SYSTEM BONDING JUMPER) TO BLDG. STEEL METALLIC WATER PIPE AND /OR GROUND ROD PER N.E.C. AND LOCAL CODES. TELEPHONE /HVAC EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANEL B -24 1. LO. LO. LO. THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. - : EWED R C ODECOMP LIANCE WOO -NEC AIL THING D I � . RIOF LINE LEVEL CEILING LINE PANEL HEIGHT, TOP OF IFS PANEL DEMARCATION POINT PROVIDED BY PHONE CO. (REFER TO DEMARC DEMOLITION NOTES). .C. TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL PLYWOOD SURFACE MOUNTED BACKBOARD ON WALL. LOCATE ADJACENT TO IFS PANEL LECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL #6 THHN GROUND CONDUCTOR, TERMINATED AT GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR, CONFORMING TO N.E.C. 800.40 AND LOCAL UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. REVISION N FINISH FLOOR LEVEL RECEIVED Jai 0 3 2008 PERMIT CENTER N.T.S. A LARSON BINKLEY Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd.. Suite 400 Overland Park, Kansas 11 T 913-383-2621 F 913- 383 -2831 larsanbinkley.com COPYRIGHT 2007 REQUIRED BY: FTEIIS callasi DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: P72 g 2a w W 2 �ooca wm x ▪ Y , z 0 3 $ W JJ . W x O H C � ~ W Z . W 0 Wi p�� Fmtn a O • W - J 0 • Z L.. CU m O O - t0 I n 0 m ,,, - 0 0. LO 0 w U U U o 1 0 ! III- , a- N 0.ai < 0 C.N ° z a s r_i � $ � N =O I rW L. :-',.: TO m = � = Q �0 �,y 0 Z z CC �o °Oa Z 4 � W :0_2' = 0 W w W - U W W } • W S s .c . t, 0 • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET REVISIONS: DRAWING NUMBER: � aoa0� w�az� 0 W W Q 4 W C d Z - � - s 1 =.. 0 - W = E Q: w 4 a a B la ;67:- p C. ti O N w � • � • W o : 72 Q IF. = 0 _ 0 W 2 ..,0 � w � Q o Y 2 H } 0 a = 0. L?42 � = C-' :::: ! n C 0 1 L U 0 W = C = 0 N O 2 a o 3yc.. a v 1 J U I=n � Q C. j H w W o `� W I-y= - W : 0 J LL' � O'4y N V/ 4�c? 0 Y W = y N j 2 0 2 0 } a U N • 1l1 p I- • y : 0 '1 0 Q I:-- u a y • ° s vi vl 0 0 H S C WD U U= a � w f a BUILDING DEPARTMENT COMMENTS 01/25/08 DESIGN CHANGES /MAR UPDATES 03/21/06 04/18/08 12/14/2007 LJ W LJW GLB nc PD 1 3:* 3 1>11% PROJECT INFORMATION: 0501449 PROHIBITION ON REUSE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED FOR USE ON A SPECIFIC SITE CONTEMPORANEOUSLY WITH THEIR ISSUE DATE. THEY ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON A DIFFERENT 'o" PROJECT SITE OR AT A LATER TIME. REUSE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, OR ANY AR RE 2 g REPRODUCTION THEREOF, ON ANOTHER PROJECT IS PROHIBITED AND CONTRARY TO LAW UNLESS EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY LIMITED STORE PLANNING, INC., D/B/A UMITED STORE DESIGN AND LImIte w ' (---4 . '''''''''''' I (1 :: - .-- , -I i :::'''':.,..,.,.,) ,.„.....__..,. 1, / -.i PINK! CONSTRUCTION ("LSDC"). THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF LSOC AND SHALL NOT BE DISPLAYED IN i c, 7<w 7 ANY MANNER OR USED ON ANY OTHER PROJECT EXCEPT BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LSDC. NO l'-' .. ' -- . - . ..- • • ..< CP 50 pc REPRODUCTION OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN . (0 - — - ) Z .. .. m 2=2 g r4 2 WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER AUTHORIZATION OF THE LSE. ALL ORIGINALS OR REPRODUCTIONS OF THESE DRAWINGS AND 1, , '-' tl. c D V) SPACE #1125 SPECIFICATIONS MUST BE RETURNED TO LSDC UPON COMPLETION OF THEIR INTENDED USE, UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED BY THE LSDC. LIMITT:D STORE PLANNING INIn • 0 0 k ' NJ • E ed9 THESE ORAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE COPYRIGHTED AND SUBJECT TO COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AS AN d/b/a ,',73 TORE DESIGN & , CiONSTIRLJ(1)TION t pH "r1 —I - SEATTLE, WA 98188 'ARCHITECTURAL WORK' UNDER SEC. 102 OF THE COPYRIGHT ACT, 17 U.S.C. AS AMENDED DECEMBER Allar01117...i.-46111' E 3 1990; KNOWN AS THE ARCHITECTURAL WORKS COPYRIGHT PROTECTION ACT OF 1990. THE PROTECTION - II - a . CD Three Limited Parkway , Columbus, Ohio 43230 ....... ... . 11 XI Z > -.1- Pa INCLUDES, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE OVERALL FORM, ARRANGEMENT AND COMPOSITION OF SPACES, AND ELEMENTS OF THE DESIGN. UNDER SUCH PROTECTION, UNAUTHORIZED USE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND e SPECIFICATIONS MAY RESULT IN CESSATION OF CONSTRUCTION, BUILDING SEIZURE, AND/OR MONETARY Telephone:. 614,415,7000 , Fax; 614,.415,734.9 1 _ - -- zi - o - ri I K. L' ... . DESIGN TYPE: PINK GENERATION: LIABILITY. . . _____— ,ap oi co Co in LSD&C PROJECT #: 00052394 A/E PROJECT #: 07577 TO BE CONNECTED TO THE MAIN MALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. MANAGER'S OFFICE NON -SALES TO FACP ZONE 1 TO FACP FPVAV CORRIDOR ELEVATOR ROOM (N.I.C.) TO FACP TO FACP TO FACP MEN TOILET RELAY HALLWAY TO FACP WOMEN TOILET ROOM *3 TO FACP I FPVAV 1 \ 3 ) ADJACENT TENANT ADJACENT TENANT ROOM *2 TO FACP 1 FPVAV 1 L- 4 1 ROOM *1 LANDLORD COMMENTS:, LANDLORD SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ONE FIRE ALARM JUNCTION BOX INSIDE THE DEMISED PREMISES FOR EACH TENANT'S USE IN CONNECTING THEIR INDIVIDUAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS OR COMPONENTS. TENANT SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY INITIATION DEVICES, ANNUNCIATION DEVICES AND CONTROLS AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. TENANT SHALL CONTRACT WITH LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM FOR DESIGN, PROGRAMMING AND FINAL CONNECTIONS TO LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AT TENANT'S EXPENSE. TENANT SHALL USE ONLY LANDLORD'S DESIGNATED FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT TO ENSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. A COPY OF FIRE ALARM DRAWINGS SHALL BE ISSUED TO THE LOCAL FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE. TO FACP TO FACP REVISION N0. �LU1-7 9 9 FeEIVEQ N 3 3 2008 I'I_NMIT CENTER NOTE: REFER TO SHEET F01.2 FOR FIRE ALARM CODED AND SHEET F01.3 CONSTRUCTION NOTES. Larson Binkley, Inc. 6353 College Blvd., Suite 400 Overland Park. Kansas T 913 -363 -2621 F 913 - 383 -2831 Iarsonbinkley.com COPYRIGHT 2007 0 a _ W REQUIRED BY: DESIGN CHANGES • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET REVISIONS: FIRE ALARM PLAN 0 DRAWING NUMBER: 1 _o 0 a wa�� 4 0 6! W N W H L7� _ 4 0 o 4 D S H O p - W � a a - 2 ~= O • 4 a 0 v -En:- W 0 011- 0 C n U �Q p� Sa W ^ _ ¢ � 0 O H J �' Ha m O � W� _ C 4= a o W = 0 = :1!--- • 0 0 flti q F U � � V 0 - • J r o • : g. o JID fA O u, 0 W IL 0 - d9a 0: 187:2 . vr, a i,,, = J .. Q O H H 4 U r11 :°-1 � t�i p � az_ i = ~V ' agl }r Q a r=j 0 W H O U � SCw = g W 0 0 • - �� i rOJ � ,1 m U i Q�S W v ll 0 01/25/08 DESIGN CHANG 5 (FER UPDATES 03/21/08 DESIGN CHANGES/ FIELD CONDITIONS 04/18/08 05/23/0@ DATE ISSUED: 12/14/2007 DESIGNED BY: LJW DRAWN BY: LJW CHECKED BY: GLB THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS AStOMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. FIRE ALARM PLAN 1/4" = 1' -O" A LARSON BINKLEY DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. NOTES 1. THE ABBREVIATION LSD &C WHEREVER IT APPEARS IN THESE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND /OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL REFER TO "LIMITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ". ANY REFERENCE TO TENANT'S PROJECT MANAGER OR FURNISHED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE REFERS TO LSD &C. 2. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND ALL OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO THIS AND THE OTHER SECTIONS OF DIVISION 26. 3. THE CONTRACTOR FOR THIS DIVISION OF WORK IS REQUIRED TO READ THE SPECIFICATIONS AND REVIEW DRAWINGS FOR ALL DIVISIONS OF WORK AND IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF THIS WORK AND THE WORK OF HIS OR HER SUBCONTRACTORS WITH ALL DIVISIONS OF WORK. IT IS THIS CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE HIS OR HER SUBCONTRACTORS WITH A COMPLETE SET OF BID DOCUMENTS. 4. THIS ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SCHEDULING THE COMPLETION AND INSPECTION OF THIS WORK TO COMPLY WITH THE LSD &C SCHEDULE AND THE PROJECT COMPLETION DATE. 5. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF BID TO DETERMINE CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK. ANY ITEMS WHICH ARE NOT COVERED IN THE BID DOCUMENTS OR ANY PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE LISTED SEPARATELY AND QUALIFIED IN THE CONTRACTORS BID. SUBMITTAL OF BID SHALL SERVE AS EVIDENCE OF KNOWLEDGE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ANY MODIFICATIONS WHICH ARE REQUIRED TO MEET THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. FAILURE TO VISIT THE SITE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY IN PERFORMANCE OF HIS OR HER WORK. 6. REFER TO RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON SHEET E02.3 OF THIS SET FOR INFORMATION IN REGARD TO RESPONSIBILITY OF WORK OR ITEMS WHICH MAY AFFECT BID. B. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICES, TOOLS, TRANSPORTATION, INCIDENTALS AND DETAILS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, AND AS REQUIRED BY JOB CONDITIONS. ALL WORK NOT SPECIFICALLY NOTED AS BEING BY THE LANDLORD OR LSD &C SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. CLOSELY COORDINATE THE ENTIRE INSTALLATION WITH THE LANDLORD AND THE LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER, AS REQUIRED. 2. THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED TO SUPPLEMENT EACH OTHER AND ANY MATERIAL OR LABOR CALLED FOR IN ONE SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EVEN THOUGH NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED IN BOTH. ANY MATERIAL OR LABOR WHICH IS NEITHER SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS NOR CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, BUT WHICH IS OBVIOUSLY NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK, AND WHICH IS USUALLY INCLUDED IN WORK OF SIMILAR CHARACTER, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS PART OF CONTRACT. 3. WHERE THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS CALL FOR ITEMS WHICH EXCEED CODES OR THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA, THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING AND INSTAWNG THE SYSTEM WITH THE MORE STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS AS DESIGNED AND DESCRIBED ON THESE DRAWINGS, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 4. ALL WORK IN THIS SECTION SHALL BE INSTALLED 50 AS TO BE READILY ACCESSIBLE FOR OPERATING, SERVICING, MAINTAINING, AND REPAIRING. THIS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING SUFFICIENT SERVICE ACCESS TO ALL EQUIPMENT. 5. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A NEAT PROFESSIONAL MANNER USING GOOD CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES. 6. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE, MATERIALS, PRODUCTS, AND EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING ALL COMPONENTS THEREOF, SHALL BE NEW, UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES LISTED AND LABELED AND SIZED IN CONFORMITY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF STATE AND LOCAL CODES, WHICHEVER IS MORE STRINGENT. 7. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL CUTTING, CHASING AND CHANNELING REQUIRED FOR ANY WORK UNDER THIS DIVISION. CUTTING SHALL HAVE PRIOR APPROVAL BY LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER AND THE LANDLORD. ALL PATCHING SHALL BE BY G.C. AND SHALL MATCH THE SURROUNDING SURFACES. 8. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATING SYSTEM. C. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 1. D. CODES THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL TEMPORARY WIRING AND RELATED GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTION PROTECTION FOR LIGHT AND POWER FOR ALL CONTRACTORS AND IS RESPONSIBLE FOR IT'S REMOVAL 2. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SETS UP ALL ELECTRICAL UTILITIES IN THE NAME OF LIMITED BRANDS. LIMITED BRANDS PAYS FOR ALL UTILITIES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. 1. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE LANDLORDS' CRITERIA, THE STATE'S, COUNTY'S, CITY'S AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES, SAFETY AND HEALTH CODES, NFPA CODES, ENERGY CODES AND ALL OTHER APPLICABLE CODES AND REQUIREMENTS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INQUIRE INTO AND COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ANY CHANGES REQUIRED BY CODES IN THE BID AND IF THESE HANGERS ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE BID, THEY SHALL BE QUALIFIED 5 A SEPARATE LINE ITEM IN THE BID. AFTER CONTRACT IS AWARDED, CHANGE ORDERS FOR INCREASED COSTS DUE TO CODE ISSUES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED BY LSD &C, UNLESS ALLOWANCES HAVE PREVIOUSLY BEEN AGREED UPON. E. LICENSES, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS & FEES 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL LICENSES, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, AND FEES REQUIRED OR RELATED TO HIS OR HER WORK. 2. FURNISH TO THE LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER ALL CERTIFICATES OF INSPECTION AND FINAL INSPECTION APPROVAL AT COMPLETION OF PROJECT. F. TRADE NAMES, MANUFACTURERS & SHOP DRAWINGS 1. WHERE TRADE NAMES AND MANUFACTURERS ARE USED ON THE DRAWINGS OR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, THE EXACT EQUIPMENT SHALL BE USED AS A MINIMUM FOR THE BASE BID. MANUFACTURERS CONSIDERED AS AN EQUAL OR BETTER IN ALL ASPECTS TO THAT SPECIFIED WILL BE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL IN WRITING BY LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER THROUGH SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCESS FOR ACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO INSTALLATIONS. THE USE OF ANY UNAUTHORIZED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT ONLY SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS TO LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR APPROVAL SUBMISSIONS SHALL BE MADE EARLY ENOUGH IN PROJECT TO ALLOW FOUR (4) WORKING DAYS FOR LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER'S REVIEW WITHOUT CAUSING DELAYS OR CONFLICTS TO THE JOB'S PROGRESS. SUBMITTALS SHALL BEAR THE STAMP OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND THE SUBCONTRACTOR SHOWING THAT HE HAS REVIEWED AND CONFIRMED THAT THE SUBMITTALS ARE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR INDICATE WHERE EXCEPTIONS HAVE BEEN TAKEN. G. GUARANTEE 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL MATERIALS AND WORK PROVIDED UNDER HIS OR HER CONTRACT AND SHALL MAKE GOOD, REPAIR OR REPLACE AT HIS OR HER OWN EXPENSE, ANY DEFECTIVE WORK, MATERIAL, OR EQUIPMENT WHICH MAY BE DISCOVERED WITHIN A PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS FROM THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THE INSTALLATION BY LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER (IN WRITING). EXTENDED WARRANTIES ARE AS SPECIFIED WITH INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT. 2. THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER SHALL GUARANTEE AND PROVIDE A 12 MONTH GUARANTEE TO LSD &C FROM THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL WARRANT THE INSTALLATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT AND WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE AND /OR MALFUNCTION CAUSED BY THE INSTALLATION. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT BEAR ADDITIONAL WARRANTIES BEYOND A COMPLETE WORKING SYSTEM. H. RECORD DRAWINGS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN ONE SET OF DRAWINGS ON THE JOB SITE UPDATED WEEKLY TO RECORD ALL DEVIATIONS FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS, SUCH AS: a. b. c. K. DEMOLITION LOCATION OF CONCEALED PULLBOXES. REVISIONS, ADDENDUMS, AND CHANGE ORDERS. SIGNIFICANT DEVIATIONS MADE NECESSARY BY FIELD CONDITIONS, APPROVED EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS, AND CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. 2. AT COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT AND BEFORE FINAL APPROVAL, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ANY FINAL CORRECTIONS TO DRAWINGS AND CERTIFY THE ACCURACY OF EACH PRINT BY SIGNATURE THEREON. FAILURE TO KEEP THESE RECORDS WILL ALLOW LSD &C TO DIRECT THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THESE RECORDS AT HIS OR HER EXPENSE PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT. L DISCREPANCES IN DOCUMENTS 1. DRAWINGS (PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND DETAILS) ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE THE GENERAL LOCATION AND INTENT OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. WHERE DRAWINGS, EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS, SPECIFICATIONS OR OTHER TRADES CONFLICT OR ARE UNCLEAR, ADVISE THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IN WRITING, PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF BID. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO ADVISE LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER, IN WRITING, OF VARIATIONS TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF BID. OTHERWISE, LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER'S INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR CONDITIONS SHALL BE FINAL WITH NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION PERMITTED. J. PHASING REOWREMENTS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR IS TO INCLUDE IN HIS OR HER BID ALL NECESSARY SERVICE REQUIRED TO KEEP THE OPERATING PHASE OF THE STORE'S HVAC, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND SPRINKLER SERVICE IN OPERATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE IN WRITING WITH LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER AND THE LANDLORD ONE WEEK PRIOR TO ANY SHUT DOWN OF THE HVAC, PLUMBING OR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS. 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF THE DEMOLITION OF EXISTING WORK AND THE DEMOLITION PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ANY EXISTING EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO BE LEFT INTACT. 2. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE, AND WILL BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR, THE REMOVAL OF ALL EXISTING CONDUIT, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, SWITCH GEAR, PITCH POCKETS AND EQUIPMENT ETC.. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY WITH THE LANDLORD ALL PRESUMED ABANDONED EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT AND SWITCH GEAR PRIOR TO REMOVAL PITCH POCKETS SHALL BE REMOVED AND THE ROOF PATCHED, AS REQUIRED BY THE LANDLORD. ALL EXTRANEOUS ITEMS IN THE SPACE OR ON THE ROOF NOT APPLICABLE TO THE NEW WORK SHALL BE REMOVED AND ROOF /WALL /FLOOR PATCHED /REPAIRED TO LIKE NEW CONDITION. EXISTING ABANDONED CONDUIT OR EQUIPMENT IN THE FLOOR, EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE, OR OTHERWISE INACCESSIBLE, ARE TO BE CUT OFF AND SEALED BELOW OR WITHIN FLOOR OR WALL LEVEL WHEN THEY ARE NOT TO BE REUSED IN THIS PROJECT. IF REQUIRED BY LANDLORD OR CODES, ABANDONED CONDUIT SHALL BE REMOVED TO POINT OF ORIGINATION. CONFIRM EXTENT OF DEMOLITION PRIOR TO BID AND INCLUDE IN PROPOSAL 3. ALL UNUSED COMMUNICATION, DATA, AND LOW VOLTAGE CABLING I5 TO BE REMOVED IN ACCORDANCE WITH N.E.C. 725.(3)B AND 760.3(A). L. SLEEVES 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SLEEVES TO PROTECT EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES IN THE INSTALLATION. EACH SLEEVE SHALL EXTEND FLOOR, WALL OR PARTITION AND SHALL BE EACH IT'S RESPECTIVE F CUT FLUSH WITH EA H SURFACE EXCEPT SLEEVES THAT PENETRATE THE FLOOR, WHICH SHALL EXTEND 2" ABOVE THE FLOOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THROUGH THE LANDLORD ANY CORE DRILLING OR CUTTING OF OPENINGS IN MASONRY FLOORS OR WALLS. 2. ALL SLEEVES AND OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS AND /OR FLOORS SHALL BE FIRE SEALED WITH CALCIUM SILICATE, SILICONE "RTV" FOAM, "3M" FIRE RATED SEALANTS OR EQUAL, 50 AS TO RETAIN THEIR FIRE RATING. 3. SLEEVES IN BEARING AND MASONRY WALLS, FLOORS, AND PARTITIONS SHALL BE STANDARD WEIGHT STEEL PIPE FINISHED WITH SMOOTH EDGES. FOR OTHER THAN MASONRY PARTITIONS, THROUGH SUSPENDED CEILINGS, OR FOR CONCEALED VERTICAL PIPING, SLEEVES SHALL BE NO. 22 U.S.G. GALVANIZED STEEL MINIMUM. M. HANGERS 1. HANGERS SHALL INCLUDE ALL MISCELLANEOUS STEEL SUCH AS ANGLE IRON, BANDS, C- CLAMPS WITH RETAINING CLIPS, CHANNELS, HANGER RODS, ETC., NECESSARY FOR THE INSTALLATION OF WORK. 2. HANGERS SHALL BE FASTENED TO BUILDING STEEL CONCRETE, OR MASONRY, BUT NOT TO PIPING. HANGING FROM METAL DECK IS NOT PERMITTED. HANGERS SHALL BE ATTACHED TO UPPER CHORD OF BAR D J015T. WHERE INTERFERENCES OCCUR, AND IN ORDER TO SUPPORT DUCTWORK OR PIPING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL TRAPEZE TYPE HANGERS OR SUPPORTS WHICH SHALL BE LOCATED WHERE THEY DO NOT INTERFERE WITH ACCESS TO FIRE DAMPERS, VALVES, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT. HANGER TYPES AND INSTALLATION METHODS ARE ALSO SUBJECT TO LANDLORD CRITERIA. 3. HANGERS FOR ALL INSULATED PIPING SHALL BE SIZED AND INSTALLED FOR THE OUTER DIAMETER OF INSULATION. INSTALL 6" LONG SPLIT CIRCLE GALVANIZED SADDLE BETWEEN THE HANGER AND THE PIPE INSULATION. 4. HANGERS AND PIPING OF DISSIMILAR METALS SHALL BE DI- ELECTRICALLY SEPARATED. N. FINAL ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS 1. ASIDE FROM NORMAL INTERIM INSPECTIONS OF WORK IN PLACE, LSD &C MAY HAVE AN INDEPENDENT ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR INSPECT THE FINISHED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION UPON COMPLETION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES. THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO BRING ALL ITEMS REPORTED BY THE INDEPENDENT ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR UP TO PLANS AND SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. O. SCOPE OF WORK 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICES, TOOLS, TRANSPORTATION, AND FACILITIES NECESSARY FOR, REASONABLY IMPLIED AND INCIDENTAL TO, THE FURNISHING, INSTALLATION, COMPLETION AND TESTING OF ALL THE WORK FOR THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, AND AS REQUIRED BY JOB CONDITIONS, TO INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: a. A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM INCLUDING THE INSTALLATION OF LSD &C FURNISHED POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM UNIT, SAFETY SWITCHES, DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND MOTOR STARTERS (SOMETIMES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR), AND LIGHTING. IT IS THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO INCLUDE IN HIS OR HER BID FOR PROVIDING SERVICE EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR TIE -IN TO LANDLORD'S DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT OR TO OBTAIN SERVICE FROM LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY. REFER TO ELECTRICAL RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE AND ELECTRICAL POWER RISER DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. b. CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN BID ALL NECESSARY MATERIALS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE SYSTEM INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, FEEDERS, BRANCH CIRCUITS, JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES, WIRING DEVICES, COVERPLATES, CONDUITS, MOTOR STARTERS, DISCONNECTS, ETC. c. METERING AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AS REQUIRED BY DRAWINGS, LSD &C, UTILITY COMPANY, AND /OR LANDLORD. d. THE WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AS OUTLINED ON THE BID SET DRAWINGS AND IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. WORK SHALL INCLUDE WIRING OF ALL STARTERS, DISCONNECTS, AND POWER WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL LOW VOLTAGE (24. VOLT) EMS TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED SPECIFICALLY ON DRAWING. 0. INSTALLATION OF LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS INCLUDING ALL DEVICES, EQUIPMENT, ETC. REQUIRED FOR MOUNTING. f. A COMPLETE CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR TELEPHONE /DATA INCLUDING BRANCH CONDUITS, OUTLET BOXES, PULL WIRES, GROUND CONDUCTORS, COVER PLATES, ETC. OR AS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. 9. A COMPLETE EMERGENCY AND EXIT UGHTING SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. h. TEMPORARY SERVICE AS INDICATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, INCLUDING IT'S REMOVAL i. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL SIGNS, CORNICE UGHTING, CASE LIGHTING, ETC. AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, IF INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, INSTALLATION AND WIRING OF SPEAKERS, AMPLIFIERS, CONDUIT AND FINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SOUND SYSTEM AS SHOWN. k. SMOKE /FIRE ALARM WIRING, DEVICES AND CONDUIT, AS SHOWN OR DESCRIBED ON DRAWINGS OR AS NECESSARY TO MEET LANDLORD, STATE, LOCAL, INSURANCE AND FIRE DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS. I. INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS STUBBED TO ABOVE CEILING FOR HVAC. ALSO, ANY ADDITIONAL CONDUIT FOR HVAC CONTROL EQUIPMENT WHERE PLENUM RATED CABLES ARE NOT PERMITTED. m. BALANCING LOADS. n. AS- BUILTS, PANEL DESCRIPTION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER SPECIFIC LABELING. J• 2. WORK NOT INCLUDED THE FOLLOWING ITEMS OF ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT: a. TELEPHONE INSTRUMENTS AND WIRING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. b. DATA CABLE WIRING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. BEFORE STARTING WORK, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL EXAMINE THE ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION, MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO SEQUENCE, COORDINATE, AND INTEGRATE THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS TO AVOID INTERFERENCES AND CONFRONTATIONS. P. CLEANING 1. AT THE END OF THE PROJECT, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN ALL EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING LIGHT FIXTURES, TO THE SATISFACTION OF LSD &C. ALL DUST, DIRT, DEBRIS, AND FOREIGN MATTER SHALL BE REMOVED FROM ALL EQUIPMENT. END OF SECTION 26 00 00 SECTION 26 01 26 - MAINTENANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1. ALL CONNECTIONS AT PANELS, LIGHTING CONTACTORS AND SWITCHES ARE TO BE MADE, ALL SPLICES COMPLETE, ALL FUSES IN PLACE, AND ALL CIRCUITS CONTINUOUS FROM POINT OF SERVICE CONNECTION TO ITS FINAL DESTINATION, AND ALL COVERS AND PLATES INSTALLED PRIOR TO THE TIME OF FINAL INSPECTION BY LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER. 2. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, ALL PARTS OF THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SHALL BE TESTED AND PROVED FREE OF UNWANTED GROUNDS AND OTHER DEFECTS. 3. ALL OVERLOAD DEVICES, INCLUDING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS, SHALL BE SET AND ADJUSTED TO SUIT THE LOAD CONDITIONS, 4. TEST AND MAKE CORRECTIONS /ADJUSTMENTS FOR PHASE BALANCING. 5. THIS CONTRACTOR 15 TO BALANCE THE VOLTAGE LEAVING THE STEP -DOWN TRANSFORMER TO PROVIDE A SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF 120 MINIMUM TO 125 VOLTS MAXIMUM BY ADJUSTING THE TRANSFORMER TAPS ONCE ALL THE FINAL CONNECTIONS HAVE BEEN MADE TO THE LOW VOLTAGE PANELBOARD. INCLUDE FINAL BALANCE REPORT WITH AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. END OF SECTION 26 01 26 SECTION 26 05 19 - ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1. CONDUCTORS FOR FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE COPPER AND THE AWG SIZE AND TYPE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. MINIMUM WIRE SIZE SHALL BE #12 AND THE CONDUCTORS SHALL BE 600 VOLT INSULATION TYPE THW, THWN OR THHN. 2. MINIMUM WIRE SIZE - 20 AMP BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE AWG LISTED SIZE PER DISTANCE SHOWN BELOW. DISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED FROM THE PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER TO THE FARTHEST OUTLET. a. #12 LESS THAN 100 FEET b. #10 BETWEEN 100 - 150 FEET c. #8 BETWEEN 150 - 250 FEET d. #6 OVER 250 FEET 3. ON ALL 20 AMP BRANCH CIRCUITS, CONDUCTORS LARGER THAN #10 AWG SHALL BE REDUCED TO #10 AWG WITHIN 10 FEET OF PANELBOARD AND DEVICE IN JUNCTION BOXES ON RATED TERMINAL STRIPS. 4. CONDUCTORS MAY BE STRANDED FOR SIZES #10 AWG AND LARGER. CONDUCTORS SIZE #12 SHALL BE SOLID. 5. ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS ARE NOT PERMITTED, EXCEPT AT SERVICE ENTRANCE, WHERE REQUIRED BY LANDLORD. CONDUCTOR CONNECTION SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER WHEN USED. 6. ALL WIRING SHALL BE IN CONDUIT, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE (IE. LOW VOLTAGE PLENUM RATED WIRE). 7. THE USE OF ROMEX OR BX CABLE I5 NOT PERMITTED. 8. WIRE CONNECTORS SHALL BE EQUAL TO "SCOTCH LOCK" FOR #8 AWG WIRE AND SMALLER AND EQUAL TO T & B "LOCKTIGHT" FOR # AWG AND LARGER. 9. NO OTHER CIRCUITS ARE TO BE RUN IN SAME CONDUIT FEEDING ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 SECTION 26 05 23 - CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A SYSTEM OF CONDUIT RACEWAYS, OUTLET BOXES AND PULL WIRES AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS, TELEPHONE SWITCHING APPARATUS, CONDUCTORS, INSTRUMENTS, MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND APPURTENANCES ARE NOT PART OF THIS CONTRACT AND WILL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY LSD &C. 2. OUTLET BOXES TO BE 4" SQUARE MINIMUM WITH SINGLE DEVICE COVER AND TELEPHONE PLATE. 3. CONDUIT RUNS FROM IFS ENCLOSURE OR MANAGER'S OFFICE FOR TELEPHONE AND DATA LINES TO CASHWRAPS ARE TO BE CONTINUOUS WITH NO JUNCTION BOXES EXCEPT AS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. 4. ALL PULL WIRES ARE TO BE LABELED FOR PURPOSE DESIGNATED. 5. NO OTHER CIRCUITS ARE TO BE RUN IN SAME CONDUIT FEEDING ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES. 6. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL WORK TO BE INCLUDED IN HIS OR HER BID. 7. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL POWER WIRINGS, UNE VOLTAGE WIRINGS, AND LINE VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING INDICATED UNDER THE HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO DO ALL INTERCONNECTING LINE VOLTAGE WIRINGS BETWEEN SWITCHES AS REQUIRED. RELAYS AND WI UIRED. Q 8. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING CONDUIT FOR HVAC CONTROL WIRING WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE OR SHOWN ON PRINTS TO BE IN CONDUIT. REFER TO PLANS FOR REQUIREMENTS AND SIZE. 9. FIRE AND /OR SMOKE DAMPERS SHALL BE WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR FOR POWER REQUIREMENTS. 10. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR AVAILABLE SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS OF EQUIPMENT. END OF SECTION 26 05 23 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL COMPLETE WIRED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SYSTEM, #12 AWG MINIMUM, SIZED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ADOPTED EDITION OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, STATE AND LOCAL CODES, THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA, AS NOTED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, AND AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 2. ALL CONDUITS, INCLUDING FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, SHALL BE GROUNDED WITH A GREEN GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. 3. GROUNDING CONNECTIONS MADE TO THE WATER PIPING SYSTEM SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR AND A BONDING JUMPER INSTALLED AROUND WATER METER PER CODES AND AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 4. ALL DEVICES SHALL BE BONDED TO THE CONDUIT SYSTEM. USE A BONDING JUMPER BETWEEN THE OUTLET BOX AND THE DEVICE GROUNDING TERMINAL METAL -TO -METAL CONTACT BETWEEN THE DEVICE YOKE AND THE OUTLET BOX IS NOT ACCEPTABLE AS A BOND FOR EITHER SURFACE MOUNTED BOXES OR FLUSH TYPE BOXES. ALL JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES, AND PULL BOXES SHALL BE BONDED TO THE CONDUIT SYSTEM. 5. RUN A SEPARATE ISOLATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, #12 AWG MINIMUM, IN EACH CONDUIT FEEDING THE CASHWRAP, THE SENSORMATIC AND OTHER COMPUTERIZED EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 6. ALL ENCLOSURES AND NON - CURRENT CARRYING METAL PARTS ARE TO BE GROUNDED. CONDUIT SYSTEM IS TO BE ELECTRICALLY CONTINUOUS, ALL LOCKNUTS SHALL CUT THROUGH ENAMELED OR PAINTED SURFACES ON ENCLOSURES. WHERE ENCLOSURES AND NON- CURRENT CARRYING METAL PARTS ARE ISOLATED FROM THE CONDUIT SYSTEM, USE BONDING JUMPERS WITH APPROVED CLAMPS. ALL GROUND CLAMPS SHALL BE "PENN - UNION" OR EQUAL, SIMILAR TO "GPL" TYPE. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL CONDUITS SERVING ALL EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, UGHTING, RECEPTACLES, HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, TELEPHONE, DATA, SPEAKERS, SECURITY, PAGER, TRAFFIC COUNTING SYSTEM AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 2. ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE GALVANIZED IMC OR EMT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN SPECIFICATIONS OR ON DRAWINGS. ALL CONDUIT IS TO BE UL LABELED. EMT CONNECTORS SHALL BE STEEL COMPRESSION OR SET SCREW TYPE. CONDUIT UNDER SLAB ON GRADE SHALL BE RIGID STEEL, OR SCHEDULE 40 PVC WITH RIGID STEEL ELLS WHERE PERMITTED BY LANDLORD OR CODE. 3. MINIMUM SIZE OF CONDUIT SHALL BE: a. MAIN FEEDER CONDUIT TO 2" OR LARGER FOR ALL APPLICATIONS. b. 1/2" MINIMUM FOR ALL LOCATIONS (IF ACCEPTABLE BY THE LANDLORD AND LOCAL CODE OFFICIALS), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, OR DRAWINGS. c. IF HVAC CONTROL WIRING IS REQUIRED TO BE RUN IN CONDUIT, IT SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3/4", UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. d. ALL IN /UNDER FLOOR CONDUIT SHALL BE OF MINIMUM 3/4° SIZE. e. ALL FIRE ALARM CONDUIT SHALL BE OF MINIMUM 3/4" SIZE. 4. SUPPORT ALL CONDUIT, INCLUDING SEISMIC AND SWAY BRACING, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NEC AND LOCAL CODES. ON DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS WILL BE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. E� FOR 6. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT OR MC TYPE CABLE CODE ®�p iv a. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT OR MC TYPE CABLE SHALL BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING APPLICATIONS ONLY: o N EC I. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS. FEB 2 i) 2008 II. FINAL CONNECTIONS INTO AND OUT OF THE TRANSFORMER. r IV. INTER-CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ALL RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES AND JUNCTION BOXES. 1 City Of III. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT. V. FINAL CONNECTIONS WHERE RIGID CONDUIT IS NOT PRACTICAL __ 142:F � VI. IN WALLS (FOR LIGHT SWITCHES AND 120 VOLT POWER RECEPTACLES AND HVAC CONTROL EQUIPMENT). ,ION 13. EXTERIOR BOXES SHALL BE CAST RUST - RESISTING METAL WITH GASKETED COVERS. a. SWITCH HEIGHT 48" FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO CENTERLINE OF OUTLET. b. CONVENIENCE OUTLETS: END OF SECTION 26 05 33 1. ALL WIRING SHALL BE COLOR -CODED AS FOLLOWS: 120/208 VOLT SYSTEM NEUTRAL - WHITE PHASE A OR L1 - BLACK PHASE B OR L2 - RED PHASE C OR L3 - BLUE GROUND - GREEN ISOLATED GROUND - GREEN WITH YELLOW TRACER END OF SECTION 26 05 53 SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT END OF SECTION 26 09 23 SECTION 26 22 13 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 277/480 VOLT SYSTEM NEUTRAL - GRAY PHASE A OR L1 - BROWN PHASE B OR L2 - ORANGE PHASE C OR L3 - YELLOW GROUND - GREEN b. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT SHALL BE THE SAME SIZE AS THE IMC OR EMT CONDUIT TO WHICH IT 15 CONNECTED. BOTH THE FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND IT'S FITTINGS ARE TO BE LISTED FOR GROUNDING. A GREEN GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED. ALL CONNECTORS ARE TO BE OF A NEMA APPROVED TYPE. c. LENGTH OF FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT IS NOT TO EXCEED 6' -0 ". d. THE USE OF ROMEX OR BX CABLE I5 NOT PERMITTED. e. CONNECTION TO ANY OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MADE WITH LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT. 7. PROVIDE PULL-WIRE IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS EXCEPT AS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. 8. HOME RUNS AND MAIN CONDUIT RUNS ARE TO BE HELD TIGHT TO STRUCTURE ABOVE OR AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW PROPER SERVICE ACCESS AND OTHER TRADES WORK. CONDUIT SHALL BE TRAPEZED TO ALLOW 3 FEET MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE CEILING. 9. ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE SIZED PER NEC AND LOCAL CODES. 10. ALL SENSORMATIC WIRING SHALL BE PLACED IN EMT, IMC, OR RMC CONDUIT. PVC IS NOT ALLOWED. 11. ALL OUTLET BOXES SHALL BE GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL OF THE STANDARD KNOCKOUT TYPE. NO ROUND OUTLET BOXES SHALL BE PERMITTED UNLESS INDICATED AND FOR UGHTING THAT REQUIRE SUCH CONFIGURATION. CONCEALED BOXES SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 4" SQUARE AND 1 --1/2" DEEP, WITH PLASTER RINGS. 12. ALL KNOCKOUT BOXES, UPON WHICH LIGHTING FIXTURES ARE TO BE INSTALLED, SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH 3/8" FIXTURE STUDS. 14. INSTALL BOXES RIGIDLY FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE AND SUPPORT INDEPENDENTLY OF THE CONDUIT SYSTEM. ALSO PROVIDE SUITABLE BOX EXTENSIONS TO EXTEND BOXES TO FINISHED FACES OF FLOORS, CEILINGS, WALLS ETC. ALL OUTLET BOXES TO BE PROVIDED WITH CADDY "QUICK -MOUNT BOX SUPPORT" TO MINIMIZE THE DEFLECTION THAT OCCURS WHEN PLUGGING /UNPLUGGING INTO THESE DEVICES. 15. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS OR OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, HANDICAP CODES OR LOCAL CODES, OUTLET HEIGHTS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: I. SALES AREAS: MOUNTED ON THE WALL 15" AFF UNLESS INDICATED OR HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED IN BASEBOARD BENEATH CABINETS, AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. SEE DRAWINGS. II. NON -SALES AREA: 15" FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO CENTERLINE OF OUTLET. c. TELEPHONE OUTLETS SHALL BE LOCATED AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. 16. THE PLANS INDICATE ONLY SCHEMATIC ROUTINGS FOR CONDUIT RUNS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ADDITIONAL BOXES WHERE REQUIRED BY FIELD CONDITIONS OR BY CODE. 17. BOXES AND COVERS SHALL BE GALVANIZED STEEL OF CODE GAUGE SIZE 18. ARRANGE CIRCUITS TO AVOID THE USE OF JUNCTION BOXES IN INACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS. THE USE OF JUNCTION BOXES ABOVE DRYWALL CEILINGS SHOULD BE LIMITED TO LOCATIONS NEAR ACCESS FRAMES USED FOR DIFFUSERS AND RETURN AIR GRILLES OR ACCESS PANELS AS LOCATED ON PLANS. APPROVED PI ".."•!.s . +; .7 r.PEO .FICATlON at 1 t' CI .'A ";GED, MODIFIED CR ALTERED WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION FROM THE BUI OFFIC.:J_, ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPROVED P LANS 15 0J3,:ECT TO FIELD INSPECTIONS SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES SHALL BE LABELED WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER IDENTIFICATION AND SYSTEM TYPE ON COVER. 1. UGHTING CONTROL PANEL WILL BE PROVIDED BY LSD&C THROUGH CONTROL MANUFACTURER, MOUNTED IN IFS PANEL WITH CONDUIT, INSTALLED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. THE CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE PROGRAMMED AND COMPLETE WHEN SHIPPED TO THE JOB SITE. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PULL ALL WIRES AS DETAILED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND CIRCUITED EXACTLY AS DIAGRAMMED ON THE ELECTRICAL PLAN DRAWINGS. NO VARIATIONS TO THE CIRCUITING ARE ALLOWED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL BY LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER. 1. TRANSFORMERS ARE GENERALLY INCLUDED IN THE IFS SWITCHGEAR. IF NOT, TRANSFORMER SHALL BE PAD MOUNTED OR SHALL BE SECURELY MOUNTED FROM THE BUILDING STRUCTURE, REINFORCED WALLS OR AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. USE ADDITIONAL VIBRATION ISOLATORS AT POINTS OF MOUNTING TO CUT VIBRATION NOISES. USE FLEXIBLE METAWC CONDUIT WITH GROUNDING BUSHING FOR PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CONNECTIONS TO TRANSFORMER. TRANSFORMERS SHALL BE LOCATED, SET, MOUNTED AND CONNECTED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO KEEP NOISE LEVELS WITHIN THE SURROUNDING AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS AND MAINTAIN ALL CODE REQUIRED CLEARANCES. 5. GENERALLY, ALL CONDUIT SHALL BE CONCEALED EXCEPT FOR UNFINISHED AREAS, SUCH AS EQUIPMENT ROOMS. EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE ALLOWED ONLY AS NOTED ON PLAN AND AS APPROVED BY LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER. PAINTING OF •NDUITS, NOTED 1, i! 2. TRANSFORMER SHALL BE QUIET TYPE CONSTRUCTION AND HAVE SIX (6) 2 -1/2% TAPS, TWO (2) TAPS ABOVE AND FOUR (4) TAPS BELOW NORMAL PRIMARY RATING. END OF SECTION 26 22 13 SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS 1. ALL PANELBOARDS SHALL BE FACTORY ASSEMBLED OF THE BOLTED CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE WITH SOLID COPPER BUSSING, FULL SIZED COPPER NEUTRAL, 100% GROUND BUSHING, AND OVERALL HINGED /LOCKABLE DOOR. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE OF THE QUICK -MAKE AND QUICK -BREAK DESIGN, THERMAL - MAGNETIC TYPE, TRIP FREE AND TRIP-INDICATING. ALL PANELS SHALL BE DEAD FRONT AND FLUSH OR SURFACE MOUNTED AS SHOWN. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL A TYPEWRITTEN DIRECTORY CARD OF THE CIRCUITS AND PLACE IN PANEL DOOR. THE DIRECTORY SHALL IDENTIFY THE SPECIFIC ROOM LOCATION FOR EACH CIRCUIT, 3. ALL PANELBOARDS PHASE AMPERAGE SHALL BE BALANCED TO WITHIN 7 PERCENT MAX. TO MIN. REARRANGE NON- LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED AND NOTE CHANGES ON RECORD DRAWINGS. LIGHTING PANEL CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE INSTALLED AND WIRED EXACTLY AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 4. IF LOOSE PANELBOARDS ARE USED, PANELBOARDS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON MINIMUM 3/4" A/D PLYWOOD AND PAINTED IN A COLOR TO MATCH THE SURROUNDING WALLS OR A COLOR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE. PLYWOOD SHALL EXTEND 1 FOOT MINIMUM BEYOND EDGE OF EQUIPMENT. 5. PANELBOARDS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING AND LUG CONNECTIONS AS FOLLOWS: 120/208 VOLT PANELBOARDS: 10,000 A.I.C. 277/480 VOLT PANELBOARDS: 14,000 A.I.C. VERIFY ACTUAL A.I.C. SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LANDLORD OR UTILITY COMPANY AND VERIFY SWITCHGEAR COMPLIANCE PRIOR TO INSTAWNG EQUIPMENT. ALL LUG CONNECTIONS TO BE 75"C RATED. 6. IFS ENCLOSURE FURNISHED BY LSD &C AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS HEREIN DESCRIBED: a. UNIT WILL BE SHIPPED TO THE PROJECT IN MULTIPLE SECTIONS AND THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OFF - LOADING OF EQUIPMENT, INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT FOR DAMAGES, VERIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT RECEIVED, ENSURING THAT THE EQUIPMENT RECEIVED IS COMPLETE AND MEETS THE SCHEDULED PANELS FOR THE PROJECT, MOVING AND MOUNTING OF SECTIONS AS WELL AS REASSEMBLING OF SAME INTO ONE COMPLETE UNIT PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. b. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 15 TO CONNECT ALL PROVIDED INTERCONNECTING CABLES BETWEEN SECTIONS AND TORQUE CONNECTIONS PER MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR IS TO ANCHOR PANEL SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCAL CODES IN SEISMIC ZONES. c. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO CONNECT LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUITS TO APPROPRIATE LOAD TERMINALS PROVIDED WITHIN IFS ENCLOSURE PER LIGHTING ZONES INDICATED IN THE PANEL SCHEDULE (I.E: ZONE A, 8, C, OR D). LINE SIDE WIRING AND LIGHTING CONTROL WIRING WILL BE PREWIRED BY MANUFACTURER AT FACTORY. COORDINATE EXACT TERMINAL NUMBER FOR EACH CIRCUIT CONNECTION WITH MANUFACTURER'S DRAWINGS. d. ALL LIGHTING, RECEPTACLE AND MISCELLANEOUS BRANCH CIRCUITS NOT SPECIFIED AS BEING CONTROLLED, ARE TO BE WIRED DIRECTLY TO THE CORRESPONDING BRANCH BREAKER IN THE DESIGNATED PANEL e. ALL CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE TELEPHONE /DATA SECTION AND HVAC CONTROL SECTION OF THE IFS ENCLOSURE ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY OTHERS. f. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL ONLY BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF THE CONDUIT SYSTEM INTO THE LOW VOLTAGE SECTION OF THE IFS PANEL. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. COLOR OF DEVICES AND PLATES SHALL BE SELECTED BY LSD &C. THE DEVICES �L2 AND RATINGS LISTED, OR EQUALS BY ARROW -HART, HUBBELL OR PASS & SEYMOUR. WEATHERPROOF GFI INSTALLED WHERE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR AS REQUIRED BY CODE. 2. ALL DEVICE COVERPLATES SHALL BE PASS AND SEYMOUR SERIES " TP " OR EQUAL. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 Date: `_` a mss' g � �A ICER � Tukwila 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BRES DIVIsION 1. SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL BE HEAVY DUTY TYPE, QUICK -MAKE, QUICK -BREAK FUSED OR NON- FUSIBLE WITH RATINGS AND SIZES AS NOTED ON PLANS AND REQUIRED BY CODES. 2. SWITCHES SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF IN OUTDOOR LOCATIONS OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. 3. AT SERVICE ENTRANCE, DISCONNECT SHALL BEAR THE MANUFACTURER'S LABEL INDICATING THE EQUIPMENT IS UL RATED FOR APPLICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CODES. 4. CUTLER HAMMER OR EQUAL MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS, LESS OVERLOAD PROTECTION HEATERS, ARE TO BE USED AS A DISCONNECTING MEANS ONLY WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS FOR MOTORS ABOVE 1 1/2 HP AT 120 VOLTS AND 2 HP AT 240 VOLTS THAT DO NOT REQUIRE AUXILIARY CONTROL MOTORS THAT ARE BELOW THE 1 1/2 HP AT 120 VOLTS, 2 HP AT 240 VOLTS, WATER HEATER AND ROLLING GRILLE ARE TO BE PROVIDED WITH HUBBELL "HBL -1221, OR 1222" AC SWITCH. 5. MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH RESET TYPE OVERLOADS THAT CLOSELY MATCH MOTOR NAMEPLATE RATING AND SHALL BE ELECTRICALLY HELD (MINIMUM SIZE 11 IN A NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE) AND BE USED FOR ALL SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE MOTORS RATED ABOVE 1/2 HP THAT REQUIRE AUXILIARY CONTROL PROVIDE CONTROL DEVICES (AUXILIARY CONTACTS, TRANSFORMERS, H -O -A, ETC.) IN STARTERS AS REQUIRED FOR INTERLOCKS. COORDINATE ALL CONTROL DEVICES WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. COMBINATION STARTER /DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL CONTAIN FUSIBLE SWITCHES AND ONLY USED WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. END OF SECTION 26 28 16 !\."01 Vi i( . ,. ,0:. L`i:. .. ,. .�i;;'iis[ fees 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS AS SHOWN ON THE FIXTURE SCHEDULE. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS ARE SUPPLIED BY LSD &C, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTOR IS TO REPLACE ALL NON - WORKING LAMPS PRIOR TO MERCHANDISE DATE AND IS TO INCLUDE COST IN BID. SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING C. C.B. CCTV CIRC. CELL COL COND CONT. CU. DF DIA. DISC. DISTR DWG F.A. FIXT. FLA 2. ALL RECESSED INCANDESCENT FIXTURES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH APPLICABLE THERMAL PROTECTION. 3. WHERE FLUORESCENT FIXTURES ARE SPECIFIED, THEY SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH HIGH POWER FACTOR RAPID START BALLASTS, U.L LISTED, C.B.M. CERTIFIED, AND E.T.L APPROVED WITH EFFICIENCY FACTORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH "THE ENERGY POLICY ACT OF 1992" AND ITS AMENDMENTS AS A MINIMUM. 4. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY SUPPORT STEEL HANGER WIRES ADEQUATELY SIZED TO SUPPORT THE WEIGHT OF THE FIXTURE FASTENED TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE (MINIMUM TWO PER FIXTURE) FOR ALL FIXTURES IN LAY -IN CEILINGS AND OTHER FIXTURES AS REQUIRED BY THE LANDLORD AND LOCAL CODE OFFICIALS. 5. FURNISH AND INSTALL APPLICABLE FIRE RATED DRYWALL BOXES OVER RECESSED FIXTURES IN FIRE RATED CEILINGS AS REQUIRED BY CODES. FIELD COORDINATE AS REQUIRED TO AVOID CONFLICTS. END OF SECTION 26 51 00 A/C AC A.F.F. AHU AIC AMP., A ABBREVIATIONS - ELECTRICAL AIR CONDITIONER ALTERNATING CURRENT ABOVE FINISH FLOOR AIR HANDLING UNIT AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY AMPERE CONDUIT CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION CIRCUIT CEILING COLUMN CONDUIT CONTINUED COPPER DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIAMETER DISCONNECT DISTRIBUTION DRAWING E EXISTING TO REMAIN E.F. EXHAUST FAN ELEC. ELECTRICAL E.W.C. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXIST. EXISTING EXO EXTERNALLY OPERATED EXT. LOC. EXTERIOR LOCATION FIRE ALARM FIXTURE FULL LOAD AMPS G GROUND GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER H.P. H.V. HZ IP IFS I.G. HORSE POWER HIGH VOLTAGE HERTZ INTERCOM PHONE INTEGRATED FACILITY SYSTEM ISOLATED GROUND J -BOX KVA LCL LTG L..V. MAX MCA MCC MFR. M.H. M.O.C.P. MTD. N.C. N.F. N.I.C. N.O. 0.C. ON CENTER 0.L OVERLOAD P P.A. P.E. PNL PWR. RELOC RM R.T. RTU T.C. TEL TYP V W.P. JUNCTION BOX KILOVOLT -AMPS LONG CONTINUOUS LOCAD LIGHTING LOW VOLTAGE MAXIMUM MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MANUFACTURER MOUNTING HEIGHT MAXIMUM OVER CURRENT PROTECTION MOUNTED NORMALLY CLOSED NON -FUSED NOT IN CONTRACT NORMALLY OPEN POLE PUBLIC ADDRESS PHOTOELECTRIC PANEL POWER RELOCATED EXISTING ROOM RAIN TIGHT ROOF TOP UNIT SW. SWITCH SW'BD SWITCHBOARD TIME CLOCK TELEPHONE TYPICAL VOLT WEATHERPROOF ( :u Permit No" By Public Works, Building Division PERMIT NUMBER s CORRECTION LT R# )1,01119 SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES: 20 AMP,120 -277V: PASS & SEYMOUR " PS20AC1 -W" THREE WAY SWITCHES: 20 AMP, 120 -277V: PASS & SEYMOUR "PS20AC3 -W" DUPLEX RECEPTACLES: 20 AMP, 125V: PASS & SEYMOUR "BR2OW" Plat' review approval is subject to errors and c ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES: 20 AMP, 125V: PASS & SEYMOUR "IG6300W" Approval of construction documents does not GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING RECEPTACLES: 20 AMP, 125V: PASS & SEYMOUR flzgRelogion of any adopted code or s of approved Fi, d condido,r 1 R Larson Blnkley, Inc. T 913- 383 -2621 6363 College Blvd., suit 400 913 -3433 -2831 Overland Park. Kansas 662 . rsonbinkley.com PTRI 007 5. - Receipt a w w Ei 0 O x 0 a t o N 2 W 2 a ° J 3 • L W O Z } ' "Cr' m r 2 ! O i Q O 0 4 0 u- U. � W ° = ° 7 c Q ��=Wz W w . [ =A W W a ° ° aa� = a v V W O W w [74°g = 30 1 -,,s, o Y N ° 1 p :E iM . W0 ,�,,,a Z n.0 W 1 a p, V d W U T O Q) - d - V 4 W Ca -]CO w ,y 1- W O= d ° W O F.''IwU ww � a¢° Vi ° : v1 Z U V I M.= m N W 4 O f j CViz „> O r N ° � �o? ==2a2ti LL wa 4 f-iw 0 0 1.,1 , W F I n ¢ li 0 _+ to W W m} y Ha O Z y1 = -L ln Q N a W K 6 7° �wa�= Via: = tea =y, = 1 2 CD y = ¢ �a ° ¢ W O °oa a� N C] � C C Qrw ° _ i N QV voN ��� fA Ww a !! x U w 0 1� � w= = ii t r W U z -C rZ Q 01 0 0) 144 0 LO 0 DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: :SEPARATE PERMIT i REQUIRED FOR: f Mechanical 0 Electrical Plumbin Li Gas Piping I City of Tukwila LBUILDI,NG DIVISION REQUIRED BY: • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET REVISIONS: 11 a o 2 ° r . W Q z z ; w a I�1 vi v 1 ti C d 1 4 O 0W ao�o H W ° 2 U Q = C n_a�N ~ir 0 d W = O N ,jj V! H = 4 C > �a te N 4 S m = z :"E" Q 0 [7 = c Q_ = ° 6 rn W 4 r �-- C1 p � w sa y eti $$ ;IX N= w ~ G T :!C: W = � C= Q O w W � ° N= 6i s3 ; 3oa „ O I - - Yw 1 U a W D - = U C7 7M „= 7 N6 1 t.b tz- co co 0) RECEIVFI7 rrn . 0 e- n 01/25/0@ CITY OF TUKWILA PERMIT CENTER DATE 12/14/2007 LJW LJW GLB ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FILE COPY 5 DRAWING NUMBER: 1 1 cn >- z o Q� 'i I-- �< -T r 4 z W QI - J0U!-E! z Z w �C7 w 0 U } C < -_J� a ii ° � - a �- ° zL till! - H �pw � o z : < Ul ; CL. w: ¢c O ul U - Q co- m w w °o ' m w Z C d �r- � � 2� z W(1_<0 EK 0 U m w w 4 - -w H U- =D La Z5 =0_ U 2 CU E5 -)F -2 c z1 w LnI = oi C f) 0_ . EL 2 ¢ C:H QF U Z�c n = Q w E l ?� 3 °w 2 w o� Q Q� X� �cn z I Utn ° C3r Z O < rrfIl1 Q �z0:LL a � U ) j w ��U'LN Q :i: LJ I W (1) on on .:C wcn 2 Q U S� Z � w I-- 2 0 M ixZ <C= - °: W : N 2 O W ° w 7 CI j H o t ( i» 5 ¢¢w1m¢wa? ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS N.T.S. OODE011AOSPEC LARSON BINKL.EY m r 0 m r Z 1 a el 0 = o m mm=1.. 01.n °� zoOKOM 'ID z -I mwM m n i p = N° zom Zmmoa z -I -uE o ifin � = ocifvl mmil5m — rn 0 zow' oo m05o 0 Mz -<om TD �na � � a z c� rm00= z e ,=FF m m m mD 0o,„ t h zmz n m n m o z m mZ m or� - C §E ▪ z C TI I = m g 'n c p ° 1 r o 55r- „ m 2n.-o � Kz Q u)01='�coz-I z m uym [ � iT o Dgro ; z m zw m rn 11 rn rn v 0 0 z v 0 cn z 0 0 DJ v . Y n r' z ° v m0 z 0 mN w= 0 m is t\ 1 1 1a 66.. 1 Nirimmiew 41 c. C " v c hi c Z C co m r O CI CD m > n m Z rn �vv til 00 v N • L O co PROJECT INFORMATION: PINK! WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER SPACE #1125 633 SOUTHCENTER SEATTLE, WA 98188 SCOPE: NEW PACKAGE: DESIGN TYPE: PINK GENERATION: LSD &C PROJECT #: 00052394 A/E PROJECT #: 0501449 07577 PROHIBITION ON REUSE; THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED FOR USE ON A SPECIFIC SITE CONTEMPORANEOUSLY WITH THEIR ISSUE DATE. THEY ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON A DIFFERENT PROJECT SITE OR AT A LATER TIME. REUSE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, OR ANY REPRODUCTION THEREOF, ON ANOTHER PROJECT 15 PROHIBITED AND CONTRARY TO LAW UNLESS EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY LIMITED STORE PLANNING, INC., D/B/A LIMITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION {"LSDC "). THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF LSOC AND SHALL NOT BE DISPLAYED IN ANY MANNER OR USED ON ANY OTHER PROJECT EXCEPT BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LSDC. NO REPRODUCTION OF THESE DRAWINGS MID SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE LSDC. ALL ORIGINALS OR REPRODUCTIONS OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MUST BE RETURNED TO LSDC UPON COMPLETION OF THEIR INTENDED USE UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED BY THE LSDC. COPYRIGHT NOTICE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE COPYRIGHTED AND SUBJECT TO COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AS AN "ARCHITECTURAL WORK" UNDER SEC. 102 OF THE COPYRIGHT ACT, 17 U.S.C. AS AMENDED DECEMBER 1990; KNOWN AS THE ARCHITECTURAL WORKS COPYRIGHT PROTECTION ACT OF 1991 THE PROTECTION INCLUDES, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE OVERALL FORM, ARRANGEMENT AND COMPOSITION OF SPACES, AND ELEMENTS OF THE DESIGN. UNDER SUCH PROTECTION, UNAUTHORIZED USE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY RESULT 91 CESSATION OF CONSTRUCTION. BUILDING SEIZURE, AND/OR MONETARY LIABILITY. Hmftec LIMITED TORE PLANNING, NC. Apla STORE DESIGN & CONISTRUCTION Three unit d Parkway - Cffiumbus, Ohio 43230 Telephone hoe 614 1 O Fax: 614,4 51349 EXPIRES OI17. 7 0 (I U7 JUN I.. _. 11VI'. UVA VT 1111 V 1 VV I fl1111 1 V 1 11 LL I ILIV111 L1V111 UVA 11■ 1.N171 I•IL I J Jr r 11 . 01 RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES IN "SALES" SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR (UNLESS ROOM HAS BLACK PILASTERS OR BLACK VSS TRANSITIONS, WHEREAS THE RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES SHALL THEN BE BLACK). REFER TO DETAIL FOR MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS. 50 AMP, 250 VOLT, 3 PHASE TWIST —LOCK RECEPTACLE AND STAINLESS STEEL COVERP'LATE FOR DREAMSTEAMER. • IFS ENCLOSURE. ALL CONDUITS STUBBED INTO IFS ENCLOSURE SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A CLEAN AND NEAT MANNER. ANCHOR IFS ENCLOSURE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCAL CODES IN SEISMIC AREAS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND E05.1 FOR MORE INFORMATION. CASHWRAP /BACKWRAP COUNTER. PERFORM ALL WORK AS INDICATED IN THE DETAIL. Q JUNCTION BOX INSTALLED AT 48" A.F.F. WITH FACE FLUSH TO DRYWALL AND 1/2" CONDUIT UP IN WALL TO ABOVE CEILING FOR TEMPERATURE T-STAT(S)/SENSOR(S). COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL LSD &C FURNISHED CONTROL CABLE FROM JUNCTION BOX T( HVAC UNITS. AIR DEVICE OR ACCESS PANEL 13Y GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO DE USED AS ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE THE CEILING THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO ENSURE THAT A MINIMUM UNOBSTRUCTED FREE AREA OF 3 -FEET VERTICALLY AND 3 -FEET HORIZONTALLY IN ALL DIRECTIONS AROUND EQUIPMENT IS MAINTAINED TO ALLO �- . . - w■ - -. w is i "v " LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER IMMEDIATELY © 20 AMC' RCCCC'TACLC @ 42" A.F.F. FOR MICROWAVE. IF FLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTAC1 LSDB�C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION ® 20 AMP RECEPTACLE (4 18" A.F.F. FOR REFRIGERATOR. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. 0 JUNCTION BOX FOR WATER HEATER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. FURNISH AND INSTALL CODE REQUIRED DISCONNECT SWITCH. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND RELATED REQUIREMENTS WITH PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. 0 JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED AT 42" A.F.F FOR HAND DRYER ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT AND LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. ® DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR. FOR SECURITY - .f., ® KEYPAD SYSTEM, MOUNTED AT 48" A.( ON TIIE WALL, ON HANDLE SIDE OF TIIE NON SALES DOOf " LEADING TO TIIE SALTS AREA AND 3/4 CONDUIT FROM JUNCTION DOX TO ADOVE CEILING. MOTION DETECTOR TO BE INSTALLED AT EACH ENTRY /ROLLING GRILLE, EVERY EXIT ODOR, ABOVE EVERY CASHWRAP AND IN THE NON -SALES CEILING CLOSE TO TIIE NON - SALES /SALES DOOR VERITY EXACT LOCATIONS WITH LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT ® JUNCTION BOX AND CODE REQUIRED DISCONNECT SWITCH FOR MOTORIZED ROLL -UP GRILLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND RELATED REQUIREMENTS WITH LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. ® 120V, GFI, W.P. UNIT RECEPTACLE. FURNISH AND INSTALL CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT FOR 120V POWER. 0 QUAD RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE, WHITE IN COLOR, FOR FOCAL CABINETS. � DOOR CONTACT GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL JUNCTION BOX AND 3/4 CONDUIT FROM ABOVE CEILING TO: U" A.F.F. ON SIDE JAMB FOR ALL ROLLING GRILLE DOORS AND / OR G AWAY FROM DOOR, ALIGNED WITH THE TOP OF THE DOOR FOR ALL SWING DOORS " x4 " ®9 4 JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED AT GO A .F.F. WITII 1 1 CONDUIT (WITII DUSIIING) UI' TO CEILING FOR DURGLAR ALARM. VERITY EXACT LOCATION WITII LSD &C PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. IT FLUSH. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS FOR EXACT LOCATION. i®1 GFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE FOR RESTROOM SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. MOUNT AT 42" A.F.F. AND COVERPLATES WITIIIN SIIOW WINDOW SIIALL DE RECEPTACLES WIIITE IN COLOR. MOUNT ABOVE SHOW WINDOW PLATFORM ® ELECTRIC WATER COOLER RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. MOUNT AT 18" A.F.F. ® FITTING ROOM PAGING SYSTEM. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM ALL WORK AS INDICATED IN THE DETAIL. 0 ENCLOSURE WITH SENSORMATIC POWER PACK AND ISOLATED GROUND TYPE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED ON VERTICAL FACE OF SOFFIT ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE SENSORMATIC FREQUENCY WITH ADJACENT TENANT SENSORMATIC SYSTEMS. ® 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DEDICATED SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE AND COVERPLATE FOR PORTABLE HAND STEAMERS. REFER TO DETAIL FOR MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS. SAW CUT /CORE DRILL AND PATCH FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED FOR UNDERSLAB CONDUIT. ® KEYPAD FOR PAGING SYSTEM, MOUNTED ON THE WALL OF THE HANDLE -SIDE OF THE NON -SALES DOOR LEADING TO THE SALES AREA AT DOOR CLOSEST /MOST LOGICAL TO FITTING ROOMS. REFER TO RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR INSTALLATION. ® SENSORMATIC SYSTEM PROVIDED BY LSD &C. REFER TO SENSORMATIC DETAIL FOR ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES. TI IRCC DUPLEX RECEPTACLES AND COVCRILATCS f OR VSD CADINCTS SI IALL DC WI IITC IN COLOR. RCFCR TO FOR MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS. DETAIL 20 AMP RECEPTACLE 0 18" A.F.F. FOR MICROWAVE. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. TE ��® FOR REV pki.iPM NMP v\ 2,0 2� � ocilAvga 1313 . .ns — POWER PLAN CODED NOTES NTS B "VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID" • RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES IN "NON- SALES” SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. MOUNT ALL RECEPTACLES AT 18" A.F.F., EXCEPT AS NOTED ON PLAN. CONDUIT FOR TRAFFIC COUNTER. INSTALL 1" CONDUIT FROM IFS ENCLOSURE TO THE MAIN ENTRY OF STORE AND FINISH CONDUIT WITH AN INSULATED BUSHING (INSULATED CAP) FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION OF THE TRAFFIC COUNTER. INSTALL A DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. LSD &C SHALL FURNISH A COMPLETE EDWARDS DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM, COMPLETE WITH TRANSFORMER, BUZZERS, LOUVERED COVERPLATES, AND PUSHBUTTON (WEATHERPROOF FOR OUTSIDE LOCATIONS). THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY JUNCTION BOXES, CONDUIT, AND WIRE TO COMPLETELY INSTALL THE DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM. ALL JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE MOUNTED VERTICALLY. 50 TELEPHONE OUTLET IN WALL. INSTALL EMPTY 3/4" CONDUIT, WITH PULLWIRE, BACK TO TELCO SECTION OF IFS ENCLOSURE. TELEPHONE WIRE AND #RJ14C JACK FOR TWO LINE TELEPHONE BY OTHERS. MOUNT AT 52" A.F.F., EXCEPT AS NOTED ON PLANS. ® EXTEND 1" TELEPHONE CONDUIT FROM SERVICE ENTRANCE AT DEMISING WALL TO TELEPHONE /DATA SECTION OF IFS ENCLOSURE. d SOUND SYSTEM. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL CONDUIT AND JUNCTION BOXES, AND PERFORM ALL WORK AS INDICATED IN THE DETAIL. ® FURNISH AND INSTALL A 3/4" CONDUIT WITH PULLWIRE FROM HVAC SECTION OF IFS ENCLOSURE, UP TO ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENT WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ® PROVIDE A DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND DATA BOX AT 15" AFF FOR ACES SYSTEM. 11 I\Inrin •1 new 1111x11 r• rn nT U/I II •r•-% •r•-% 1111 1 1 1f 11T 1 Inl rr inn... inn... ILI n • r111.11 r111.11 c."rrrr NOTE: REFER TO SHEETS F01.1, F01.2 AND F01.3 FOR FIRE ALARM REQUIREMENTS. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET E02.2 FOR POWER CODED AND CONSTRUCTION NOTES. • W + THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON 15 SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN 1/4" = 1' -0" A LARSON B I NKLEY Larson Binkley, Inc. T 913 -383 -2621 6363 College Blvd., Suite 400` F 913 -383 -2831 Overland Park. Kansas 6621 'IQrsanbinkley.com OPYRICHT 2007 0) $44 wiTt 1 0 0 a.) o = x U' w CO S o w W r x x x N Ea_ a�w IL • p � V1 W w - ',vim zz3o m ==O 0 3 r - 0 w w = o W x N . W � � o 0 C = aQ�wV W,y� N N � m � , _ Q U o ,- = 1 od , v, 0 m , C. =2O n. I1 0 La C7 ii 0=O 1-w 0 '- = w w n v w O , 0. Q p n I n 2 j n W • 0 g i a zci :;:": U 1� ∎ W :":2 - W T ■ x ~ to ao m n tr p 0 2 W s O S Z � � o � O 4 = C ,4�W W O O 0 UJ va 0- 0 = r o_ r w= x W .' a.0 ▪ 4 o^4 REQUIRED BY: • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: W H Z J u nta W �_ '- 1 z CO CL 00 00 00 01 t REVISIONS: FEB 06 2000 DRAWING NUMBER: PERMIT CENTER N I- tL' CITY OF TU{KWILA DATE 01/25/08 12/14/2007 LJ W LJW GLB ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN 0 =1 ITEM FURNISHED BY INSTALLED OR PERFORMED BY RE -USE EXISTING N /A REMARKS CONT'R. VENDOR LANDLORD CONT'R. OTHER ELECTRICAL SERVICE / DISTRIBUTION MAIN OVER CURRENT DEVICE IN LANDLORD'S ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT . FIELD VERIFY METER IN LANDLORD'S OR TENANT'S SPACE (VERIFY W/ POWER PLANS, RISER) • FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO BID C/T'S AND CABINET IN LANDLORD'S OR TENANT'S SPACE (VERIFY W/ POWER PLANS, RISER) • FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO BID SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUIT(S) TO LEASE SPACE • FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO BID SERVICE ENTRANCE FEEDER(S) TO LEASE SPACE . FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO BID I.F.S. ENCLOSURE (SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLY) IF EC 277/480 VOLT PANEL IF IF INSTALLED IN FACTORY STEP DOWN LINE TRANSFORMER & MOUNTING ACCESSORIES IF IF INSTALLED IN FACTORY 120/208 VOLT PANEL(S) IF IF INSTALLED IN FACTORY SMART BREAKER SYSTEM FOR LIGHTING CONTROL IF IF INSTALLED IN FACTORY LIGHTING CONTROLLER WITH POWER SUPPLY AND OVERRIDE STATION EMS IF INSTALLED IN FACTORY BREAKER LOCKS IF IF AS REQUIRED BY ENGINEER MECHANICAL / PLUMBING EQUIPMENT COORDINATION POWER WIRING AND CONDUIT / PULL STRING TO ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT EC EC ROOF TOP UNIT - DISCONNECT SWITCH e ROOF TOP UNIT - WEATHERPROOF GFI SERVICE REC. • WIRED BY EC AIR HANDLING UNIT (CW AND /OR HW, CW WITH ELECTRIC HEAT) - DISCONNECT SWITCH / FAN CONTACTS • AIR HANDLING UNIT (DX SPLIT) - DISCONNECT SWITCH / FAN CONTACTS • CONDENSING UNIT (DX SPLIT) - DISCONNECT SWITCH • CONDENSING UNIT (DX SPLIT) - WEATHERPROOF GFI SERVICE REC. • FAN POWERED VAV / VAV SYSTEM (WITH OR WITHOUT ELECTRIC HEAT) - DISCONNECT SWITCH AC AC WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP - DISCONNECT SWITCH • TOILET EXHAUST FANS (FRACTIONAL HP) WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH LD MC ELECTRONIC CONTROL DAMPERS - DISCONNECT SWITCH • DUCT HEATERS • LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS PAGING SYSTEM - HARDWARE PS PS PAGING SYSTEM - WIRE PS EC WIRED BY EC, FINAL CONNECT. BY PS C SYSTEM - CONDUIT CONDUIT /PULL STRING EC EC IF REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDIC. BURGLAR / SECURITY SYSTEM - HARDWARE • BURGLAR / SECURITY SYSTEM - WIRE • BURGLAR / SECURITY SYSTEM - CONDUIT / PULL STRING • IF REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDIC. RF TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM - HARDWARE RF RC RF TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM - WIRE RF RC RF TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM - CONDUIT / PULL STRING EC EC IF REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDIC. CCTV / ALARM SYSTEM - HARDWARE • CCTV / ALARM SYSTEM - WIRE • CCTV / ALARM SYSTEM - CONDUIT / PULL STRING • IF REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDIC. MUSIC SYSTEM - HARDWARE (SPEAKERS / CD PLAYER) M5 EC MUSIC SYSTEM - WIRE EC EC MUSIC SYSTEM - CONDUIT / PULL STRING EC EC IF REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDIC. DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM - HARDWARE LD EC DELIVERY BUZZER SYSTEM - WIRE EC EC DELNERY BUZZER SYSTEM - CONDUIT / PULL STRING EC EC IF REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDIC. MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL ITEMS LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS LD EC RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES ID EC FLOOR BOXES AND COVERS • UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS JUNCTION BOXES EC EC SENSORMATIC SYSTEM HARDWARE SV EC SENSORMATIC SYSTEM -- POWER WIRING AND CONDUIT / PULL STRING EC EC DATA AND TELEPHONE SYSTEMS - CABLE AND JACKS TEL TEL DATA AND TELEPHONE SYSTEMS - CONDUITS / PULL STRING EC EC TELEPHONE DEMARC PANEL - PROTECTION OF DURING CONSTRUCTION / RELOCATION / DEMOUTION GC GC CALL LSD&C TO RELOCATE. DO NOT CUT WIRES. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR • MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHUT -DOWN RELAY FAC FAC FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FAC FAC CASHWRAP - POWER WIRING AND CONDUIT / PULL STRING EC EC ROWNG GRILLE - POWER WIRING AND CONDUIT / PULL STRING EC EC DREAMSTEAMER - POWER WIRING AND CONDUIT / PULL STRING . RECEPTACLE BY LD AS -BUILT DRAWINGS EC EC AC HVAC EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SV SENSORMATIC VENDOR EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MS MUSIC SYSTEM VENDOR TEL TELEPHONE CONTRACTOR EMS ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM VENDOR PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR ANY ITEM NOT FAC FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR P5 PAGING SYSTEM VENDOR GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR RC RF TECHNOLOGY CONTRACTOR SHOWN IS THE IF LD I LIGHTING PACKAGE DISTRIBUTOR RF RF TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM VENDOR RESPONSIBILITY LL LANDLORD SC SECURITY CONTRACTOR LSD &C LIMITED STORE DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION SSV SECURITY SYSTEM VENDOR OF CONTRACTOR. THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING TO BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT AS REQUIRED BY JURISDICTION OR LANDLORD. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING TO BE INSTALLED IN CONDUIT DUE TO HARD CEILING. NOTE: CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY LOW VOLTAGE WIRING IN CONDUIT PRIOR TO BID. LOW VOLTAGE WIRE IN CONDUIT NOTE: ALL SYMBOLS MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS PROJECT. SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REMARKS SYMBOL -e b 0 CV CI 0 TC O DC [M D a 0 DESCRIPTION SINGLE RECEPT. W/ COVERPLATE DUPLEX RECEPT. W/ COVERPLATE QUAD. RECEPT. W/ COVERPLATE DUPLEX RECEPT. W/ COVERPLATE TELEPHONE OUTLET DATA /TELEPHONE OUTLET JUNCTION BOX MAGNETIC STARTER DISCONNECT SWITCH DELIVERY BUZZER TRANSFORMER DELIVERY BUZZER DELIVERY BUZZER PUSHBUTTON CEILING SMOKE DETECTOR DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SINGLE PHASE MOTOR TRAFFIC COUNTER DUPLEX FLOOR RECEPT. W/ COVERPLATE TWIST -LOCK RECEPTACLE DOOR CONTACT MOTION DETECTOR TWO GANG FLOOR BOX W/ RECEPT. LID KEYPAD SENSOR THERMOSTAT ELECTRONICALLY OPERATED DAMPER NTS OODE023LONOTE MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER 20 AMP, 120 VOLT 20 AMP, 120 VOLT 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ON ISOLATED GROUND, 20 AMP, 120 VOLT WHITE COLOR RJ14C TELE. JACK IN SALES AND NON -SALES AREA. WHITE COLOR PLATE IN SALES AND IN NON -SALES AREA. JUNCTION BOX, 4" X 4" X 2 1/8" DEEP MINIMUM FULL VOLTAGE STARTER IN A NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE, SIZE 1 MINIMUM HEAVY DUTY, FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE TRANSFORMER AT 8' -0" A.F.F. SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT PUSH BUTTON UNIT AT 48" A.F.F. SYSTEM CONNECTED CEILING MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC TYPE SMOKE DETECTOR SYSTEM CONNECTED DUCT MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC TYPE SMOKE DETECTOR COMPLETE WITH SAMPLING TUBES 20 AMP, 120 VOLT FLOOR BOX - ONE GANG BOX: B2414; LID: S3825 DREAMSTEAMER - (FURNISHED BY LSD &C) INSTALLED AT ALL EXIT DOORS, INCLUDING ROWNG GRILLES. CEILING OR WALL MOUNTED 20 AMP, 120 VOLT, HUBBELL TWO GANG FLOOR BOX (1) B4214, W/ HUBBELL RECEPTACLE LIDS; (1) S3826 AND (1) S3825, WITH SEPARATION FOR POWER AND DATA OUTLET. KEYPAD MOUNTED AT 4' -4" A.F.F. SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR LOCATION SINGLE GANG DRYWALL BOX (2 "x4 ") FOR SENSOR AT 48" A.F.F. WITH FACE FLUSH TO SINGLE GANG DRYWALL. BOX (2 "x4 ") FOR THERMOSTAT AT 48" A.F.F. WITH FACE FLUSH TO REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFICATIONS. POWER REFERENCE SCHEDULE NTS I•1I MINI L ELECTRICAL RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE NTS tsi'1 i 4'I- :i0i {l a E 1. REFER TO LANDLORD'S SPECIFICATIONS AND TENANT DESIGN CRITERIA FOR NECESSARY INFORMATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH ALL TRADES INCLUDED BUT NOT LIMITED TO MECHANICAL PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND STRUCTURAL CONTRACTORS. INSTALL ALL WORK TO CLEAR NEW AND EXISTING ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. NO ITEM SUCH AS PIPE, DUCT, ETC, IS TO BE IN CONTACT WITH ANY EQUIPMENT. 2. ANY DISCREPANCY BETWEEN LSD &C DRAWINGS AND TENANT CRITERIA, LSD &C DRAWINGS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE. 3. THE DRAWINGS ARE ESSENTIALLY DIAGRAMMATIC TO THE EXTENT THAT ALL INSTALLED ITEMS AND LOCATIONS ARE NOT EXACTLY PLACED AND ARE NOT TO BE SCALED. ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE RUN TO SUIT CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD. CONDUIT RUNS ARE SHOWN DIAGRAMMATICALLY ON THESE PLANS AND DO NOT NECESSARY REFLECT THE EXACT CONDUIT LOCATIONS. ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE RUN INSIDE SHELL OF BUILDING AND UNDER INSULATED CEILING TO AVOID HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CONDITION. 4. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO SCHEDULE ALL ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT AND SERVING UTILITIES, AND EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR HIS OR HER PERMITS AND INSPECTION FEES. 5. BEFORE COMMENCING ANY WORK, CONTRACTORS SHALL REVIEW THE LATEST NATIONAL, STATE, AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS, INCLUDING LANDLORD CRITERIA, AND PERFORM THE WORK IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE. IN CASE OF CONFLICT, THE STRICTER REQUIREMENTS WILL PREVAIL 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD VERIFICATION OF ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS OR HER BID. FOR THE PURPOSE OF SURVEYING EXISTING CONDITIONS, WHICH MAY AFFECT THE WORK TO BE DONE UNDER THIS SECTION, ANY DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY REPORTED TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR, LSD &C, OR THE LANDLORD'S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE FOR CLARIFICATION. 6.a. AFTER BID, ANY QUESTIONS RELATING TO SPECIFIC M, E, OR P ISSUES ARE TO BE DIRECTED AS RFI'S THROUGH THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER. 6.b. SHOULD THE SPACE HAVE BEEN INACCESSIBLE FOR INSPECTION, CONTRACTOR MUST INDICATE SO ON HIS OR HER BID. 6.c. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE MADE FOR ANY CHANGE ORDERS DUE TO CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO VISIT THE JOBSITE AND /OR PREDETERMINE ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS OR HER BID. 7. THE CONTRACTOR, WITHIN FIFTEEN (15) DAYS OF THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT, SHALL SUBMIT TO THE OWNER, SIX (6) COPIES OF A COMPLETE LIST OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PROPOSED FOR THE JOB INCLUDING ALL DATA, PART NUMBERS, RATING CAPACITY, SIZE, DIMENSIONS, ELECTRICAL DATA, GRADE, MANUFACTURER, AND ANY OTHER DESCRIPTIVE DATA FOR ALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS THAT DEVIATE FROM SPECIFIED ITEMS. ANY DELAYS OR COSTS DUE TO THESE DEVIATIONS, WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. 8. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL ABANDONED WIRING WHICH I5 NOT TO BE REUSED. ABANDONED WIRING SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED FROM CONDUIT OR RACEWAY. AS -IS PRACTICAL, CONDUIT AND /OR RACEWAYS SHALL REMAIN WITH PULL STRING AND CAPPED. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DISPOSAL OF ALL UNUSED OR ABANDONED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT AND ITS REMOVAL OFF THE TENANT'S AND LANDLORD'S PREMISES. 9. OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO HAVE CONSTRUCTION REVIEWED BY AN OUTSIDE CONSULTANT PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT. 10. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP RELATED TO HIS OR HER WORK FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE WHICH THE OWNER ACCEPTS THE PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR, AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR TENANT, SHALL CORRECT ANY DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP DURING THIS GUARANTEE PERIOD. 10.a. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE AND ENSURE A CLEAN INSTALLATION, ESPECIALLY IN EXPOSED CEILING AREAS. THE FINAL APPROVAL OF THIS WORK WILL BE ISSUED BY LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER. 11. PROVIDE THREE SETS OF "AS- BUILT" DRAWINGS AND TWO BOUND SETS OF ALL OPERATIONS MANUALS, DIAGRAMS, SERVICE CONTRACTS, AND GUARANTEES TO LSD &C PRECEDENT TO FINAL PAYMENT. A REPORT PREPARED BY AN INDEPENDENT AIR BALANCE CONTRACTOR, HIRED BY GC, MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE CLOSEOUT PACKAGE. 12. THE ABBREVIATION "LSD &C", WHEREVER IT APPEARS IN THESE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, SHALL REFER TO "LIMITED BRANDS STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ". 13. THE CONTRACTOR FOR THIS WORK IS REQUIRED TO READ THE SPECIFICATIONS AND REVIEW DRAWINGS OF ALL DIVISIONS OF WORK AND IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF THIS WORK AND THE WORK OF HIS OR HER SUBCONTRACTORS WITH ALL DIVISIONS OF WORK. IT IS THIS CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE ALL SUBCONTRACTORS WITH A COMPLETE SET OF BID DOCUMENTS. 14. THESE PLANS MAY BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION ONLY AFTER APPROVAL I5 OBTAINED FROM THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT ELECTRICAL PLAN CHECK DIVISION AND THAT DIVISION'S STAMPED APPROVAL AND AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE APPEAR ON THE PLANS. 15. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DEMOLITION WORK. 16. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT FIXTURE LOCATION. 17. DESIGN AND CIRCUITRY MAY BE BASED ON AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. GC AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ACCURACY OF AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. IN CASE OF DISCREPANCY, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL CONDUITS, CONDUCTORS, BOXES, MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS, ETC. FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM FOR HOME RUNS SHOWN. BRANCH CIRCUIT INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND LATEST N.E.C. 18. WHERE PRACTICAL, AND WHERE CONDUIT CONDITION WARRANTS, CONTRACTOR MAY REUSE APPROPRIATE EXISTING CONDUIT SYSTEM. HOWEVER, IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO CORRECT ANY AND ALL EXISTING CODE VIOLATIONS IN CONDUIT SYSTEMS TO BE REUSED. CONTRACTOR MUST OBTAIN THE LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER'S PERMISSION IN WRITING. 19. IF APPLICABLE, RECONNECT, COMPLETE, AND MAKE OPERABLE ALL EXISTING LIGHTING, RECEPTACLES, AND CIRCUITRY. 20. PRIOR TO INSTALLING ANY UNDERGROUND CONDUIT, VERIFY CONDUIT SIZES AND POINTS OF SERVICE WITH THE SERVING UTILITIES. 21. ALL CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE STANDARD ANNEALED COPPER CONDUCTORS WITH TYPE THHN INSULATION, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, AND SHALL RUN FROM POINT TO POINT IN APPROVED CONDUIT. ALL CONDUITS, WHEN EXPOSED IN AREA WITH NO CEILING (EXCEPT STOCKROOM AREAS), SHALL BE INSTALLED IN RACKED FORM, WITH FITTED CONDUIT AND PARALLEL TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. 22. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE PHYSICALLY IDENTIFIED AT EACH END FOR CIRCUIT USAGE AND CONTINUITY. 23. GENERALLY, ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE CONCEALED EXCEPT FOR UNFINISHED AREAS, SUCH AS EQUIPMENT ROOMS. EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE ALLOWED ONLY AS NOTED ON PLAN AND AS APPROVED BY LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER. PAINTING OF CONDUITS, NOTED ON DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS WILL BE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES NTS OODE023CONOTE 1. CIRCUITING INDICATED ON PLAN IS PARTIALLY DIAGRAMMATIC FOR CLARITY. CIRCUITING SHALL BE "THRU- WIRING" WHERE AND WHENEVER POSSIBLE. 2. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OF ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ORDERING RELATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 3. ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS UP TO 100' -O" SHALL UTILIZE #12 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS FROM 100' -1" TO 150' -O" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #10 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS 150' -1" UP TO 250' -O" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #8 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. CIRCUITS ABOVE 250' -0" SHALL UTILIZE #6 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. 4. PLACEMENT OF ALL RECEPTACLES IN THE SALES AREA SHALL BE INTENTIONAL (I.E. - CENTERED ON COLUMNS, WALL FEATURES OR TIGHT TO CORNERS), UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. IF THE RECEPTACLE IS NOT SHOWN IN A DESIRABLE LOCATION, FIELD VERIFY EXACT PLACEMENT OF RECEPTACLE WITH LSD &C'S PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. 5. ALL RECEPTACLES AND COVERS (DUPLEX, QUADRAPLEX, ETC) SHALL BE THE COLORS AS NOTED IN THE ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN NOTES AND SCHEDULES. 6. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED FOR A FULLY COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM. 7. ACCESS TO ALL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT MUST BE PROVIDED TO MEET CODE AND SERVICE /MAINTENANCE EASE. WHERE DRYWALL CEILINGS ARE USED IN THE "SALES" AREA, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL ARRANGE CIRCUITS TO AVOID THE USE OF JUNCTION BOXES IN INACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS. THE USE OF JUNCTION BOXES ABOVE DRYWALL CEILINGS SHALL BE LIMITED TO LOCATIONS NEAR ACCESS FRAMES USED FOR DIFFUSERS AND RETURN AIR GRILLES OR ACCESS PANELS AS LOCATED ON PLANS. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER. 8. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LAYOUT (SEE SHEETS F01.1, F01.2, AND F01.3) AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AND ALL APPLICABLE CODES, AND COMPATIBLE WITH THE LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO INQUIRE WITH THE LANDLORD'S REPRESENTATIVE ON ANY FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS IN USE AT THE MALL AT THE TIME OF BID. IF THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS NOT ADEQUATELY DESCRIBED ON THE DRAWINGS, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR INFORMING THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND INCLUDE THE COST AS A SEPARATE LINE IN BID. NO ADDITIONAL MONIES SHALL BE AWARDED FOR TIE -IN REQUIREMENTS TO A LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM THAT IS IN EXISTENCE AT THE TIME OF BID, WITHOUT A SEPARATE LINE ITEM. 9. ANY PENETRATION THROUGH THE ROOF OR WALL WITH CONTROL WIRING MUST BE SLEEVED IN A CONDUIT. 10. ALL 24 VOLT COMMUNICATION AND /OR SENSOR WIRING ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC SYSTEM SHALL BE FURNISHED BY HVAC EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ALL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF THE N.E.C., LOCAL CODE, AND LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS. 11. FURNISH AND INSTALL GROUND WIRE CONNECTION (BY -PASS) BETWEEN WATER METER PLUMBING END PIPE USING CLAMP CONNECTORS. MAKE SURE PLUMBING METALLIC WATER PIPE IS SECURELY GROUNDED AS PER N.E.C. AND LOCAL CODES. 12. IFS ENCLOSURE FURNISHED BY LSD &C AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS HEREIN DESCRIBED: 12.a. EQUIPMENT NOTED HAS BEEN PREPURCHASED BY LIMITED STORE DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION. 12.b. UNIT WILL BE SHIPPED TO THE PROJECT IN MULTIPLE SECTIONS AND THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OFF - LOADING OF EQUIPMENT, INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT FOR DAMAGES, VERIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT RECEIVED, ENSURING THAT THE EQUIPMENT RECEIVED IS COMPLETE AND MEETS THE SCHEDULED PANELS FOR THE PROJECT, MOVING AND MOUNTING OF SECTIONS AS WELL AS REASSEMBLING OF SAME INTO ONE COMPLETE UNIT PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. 12,c. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO CONNECT ALL PROVIDED INTERCONNECTING CABLES BETWEEN SECTIONS AND TORQUE CONNECTIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. 12.d. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO CONNECT LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUITS TO APPROPRIATE LOAD TERMINALS PROVIDED WITHIN IFS ENCLOSURE PER LIGHTING ZONES INDICATED IN THE PANEL SCHEDULE (I.E: ZONE A, B, C, AND D). LINE SIDE WIRING AND LIGHTING CONTROL WIRING WILL BE PREWIRED BY MANUFACTURER AT FACTORY. COORDINATE EXACT TERMINAL NUMBER FOR EACH CIRCUIT CONNECTION WITH MANUFACTURER'S DRAWINGS. 12,e. ALL LIGHTING, RECEPTACLE, AND MISCELLANEOUS BRANCH CIRCUITS NOT SPECIFIED AS BEING CONTROLLED ARE TO BE WIRED DIRECTLY TO THE CORRESPONDING BRANCH BREAKER IN THE DESIGNATED PANEL 12.f. ALL CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE TELEPHONE /DATA SECTION AND HVAC CONTROL SECTION OF THE IFS ENCLOSURE ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY OTHERS. 13. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S FIRE SPRINKLER SUB - CONTRACTOR SHALL DESIGN AND INSTALL FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM CONFORMING TO LANDLORD'S CRITERIA, TENANT'S REQUIREMENTS, AND PER LOCAL CODES AND NFPA STANDARDS. 14. CENTER ALL FIXTURES IN CEILING TILE WHERE APPLICABLE. 15, THE ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE SERVICES SHALL BE INSTALLED TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SERVING UTILITIES. THE MAIN SERVICE SHALL BE ABLE TO WITHSTAND THE AVAILABLE SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT INDICATED (AIC) ON THE ONE -LINE DIAGRAM. 16. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CUT SHEETS TO LSD &C FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR THAT DEVIATE FROM SPECIFIED ITEM FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE PURCHASE OF ANY SUCH EQUIPMENT OR DEVICES. 17. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT FOR LOCATION, RESTRICTION, AND REQUIREMENTS OF ALL CONCRETE SAW CUTS. SAW CUTS SHALL BE PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING CONCRETE.\ 18. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THE PROPER WORKING ORDER OF THE SYSTEM(S) AND MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. 1,1rfrl POWER PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES NTS OODE023AONOTE C A LARSON BI NKLEY Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd.. Suit = 40 Overland Park, Kansas 662 T 913 -383 -2621 F 913 - 383 -2831 arsonbinkley.com PYRI .' -_ 007 C - W U k a W w 0 2 ° ° ,n ° a 5 t=' • W U 7 c4,, 6� C ) ti c. m La -4C (nn 4 tnn = . 00c - xzc�ci 2 N 2 N - ca a� _ , x = a, � E,o = a 0 0- C W W a' C ..z ME 0 wrv (nti • L. • ° V o y.V-W' H w a = f.r fn ¢ 0 Nw = a -ox 1- p p U uo [n ▪ p La z GI a a N . MD o- Ln CD a - o Q o z re E tr C] c J 0 0O -H =,n to U f0 Y N } = C N CD Lia ME CD E, EL ME CC 7E CD CC LU DC ED E, V- 0 d (Y w CJ 0) r, REQUIRED BY: • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: a l REVIEWED FOR 1 r ODE COMPLIANCE NFPA 70 -NEC FEB 2 0 2008 City Of Tukwila ILDIN DM ION REVISIONS: FEB 0 6 '2008 RECEIVED CITY OF TLJKWII A PERMIT CENTER 12/14/2007 LJ W LJW GLB ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN NOTES DRAWING NUMBER: 1- Z 0-3 LaJ CD Q CC 4 t CC CL se w w a L 0- 0 Q DATE 01/25/08 m r m 0 r 0 r- > z 11 0 m - n r r m l- a 0 z D 0 r z Y ) T a 0 --1 0 CO Q C m z m O m O n _ m m ?.. m Q o ow !AAA v m Rio a u+ Q w m C7 m O .=„ „r o o m N w== rrl Q C � O mm 'n N.10 mm z n O 00 o e O 00 a a O 00 Pik PR F1 f i I { _ r....^.....— ..... —.... �. �..... _..... ..� .....— .— ....— .....— . _.... • Dm r m m a r a z P1 • n C� Cop O T-1° 0 omto m om- � o o [] _ r*1 z m �o cw -1 fsi 0-n 0 C m O n _ S I PD >MCff]o-1 c ° =N Z O Z M m m M o n D z Pa_ z -l o o &` =oD z10 m zcm D omoE- m =1nmm - —m °mz , anop GO p3 - n n cn Z F a z m p�m z - 'I mOp D° HP0-1 ° z ,-,0 n cT)._ 0 �1m m Z MZ±z iCJmC m rO-nZ n --I -I En m [e rn -1 M _1 m....-(0 z z p z m D z m Im o ° �0 rn mrrl 2 C7m0 C MZ °cMO'- 'MCr -Z -I-Im M0 p m � m M 1. I m� 0 Z In MOJRCD TAPMEGI6 CIIIVE1'IDPM7CANS M"""Im y^.•••• NO m n m> LA — I n 3 m m Z z U oo m y cn C 0o .. m m F.? 0 azi m r9 0 PROJECT INFORMATION: PINK! WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER SPACE #1125 633 SOUTHCENTER SEATTLE, WA 98188 SCOPE: NEW PACKAGE: DESIGN TYPE: PINK GENERATION: LSD &C PROJECT #: 00052394 WE PROJECT #: 0501449 07577 PROHIBITION ON REUSE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED FOR USE ON A SPECIFIC SITE CONTEMPORANEOUSLY WITH THEIR ISSUE DATE. THEY ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON A DIFFERENT PROJECT SITE OR AT A LATER TIHE. REUSE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, OR ANY REPRODUCTION THEREOF, ON ANOTHER PROJECT 15 PROHIBITED AND CONTRARY TO LAW UNLESS EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY LIMITED STORE PLANNING, INC., D /B /A LIMITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ("LSDC "). THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF LSDC AND SHALL NOT BE DISPLAYED IN ANY MANNER OR USED ON ANY OTHER PROJECT EXCEPT BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LSDC. NO REPRODUCTION OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE LSDC. ALL ORIGINALS OR REPRODUCTIONS OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MUST BE RETURNED TO LSDC UPON COMPLETION OF THEIR INTENDED USE, UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED BY THE LSDC. COPYRIGHT NOTICE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE COPYRIGHTED AND SUBJECT TO COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AS AN 'ARCHITECTURAL WORK" UNDER SEC. 102 OF THE COPYRIGHT ACT, 17 U.S.C. AS AMENDED DECEMBER 1990; KNOWN AS THE ARCHITECTURAL WORKS COPYRIGHT PROTECTION ACT OF 1990. THE PROTECTION INCLUDES, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE OVERALL FORM, ARRANGEMENT AND COMPOSITION OF SPACES, AND ELEMENTS OF THE DESIGN. UNDER SUCH PROTECTION, UNAUTHORIZED USE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY RESULT IN CESSATION OF CONSTRUCTION, BUILDING SEIZURE, AND /OR MONETARY LIABILITY, Li mftec LIMITED S„ T E PLAN!' d /b /a STORE D T S I N &. O N R u $ ION hr Limited Parkway Columbus, Ohio 432 'Telephone.: 614,41 5,7000 Fax: 514,415,7349 VIER ai,:73 O ISTESY 0 0 73 cn rn "VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID" REVIEWED OR B COMPLIANC C N FPA 7 0 _ NEC V't.6 2.i 2 Ot BUILDING DIVISION NOTE: GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY CEILING FIRE RATING WITH ARCHITECT, AND BOX OR TENT ALL RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES, IF REQUIRED, TO MAINTAIN CEILING FIRE RATING. NOTE: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND INSTALLATION DETAILS FOR SUSPENDED LIGHTING IN NON -SALES AREA. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET E05.1 FOR PANEL SCHEDULE AND LIGHTING ZONE DESIGNATIONS, NOTE: REFER TO SHEET E03.3 FOR ELECTRICAL LIGHTING SCHEDULE AND LIGHT DESCRIPTIONS. Q ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL OCCUPANCY MOTION SENSOR SWITCH FOR CONTROL OF LIGHTS AS SHOWN. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SET SWITCH FOR 15 MINUTES. MOUNT AT 44"AFF. �2 BREAK -OFF CIRCUIT Q CEILING MOUNTED IN -LINE FAN. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION. EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY SAME DEVICE THAT CONTROLS LIGHTS IN RESTROOM. ® FURNISH AND INSTALL JUNCTION BOX, TOGGLE DISCONNECT SWITCH IN NON- VISIBLE LOCATION, AND FINAL CONNECTION FOR 120 VOLT SIGN. SIGN IS FURNISHED WITH INTERNAL GROUND FAULT PROTECTION BY SIGN MANUFACTURER PER N.E.C. ARTICLE 600 -23b. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF JUNCTION BOX WITH SIGN MANUFACTURER. (REUSE EXISTING JUNCTION BOX AND CONDUIT INTO SPACE IF ALREADY INSTALLED. VERIFY IN FIELD EXACT LOCATION ON CANOPY). NOTE: THE CIRCUIT FOR SIGNAGE MUST BE A DEDICATED ISOLATED 3 -LINE CIRCUIT CONSISTING OF HOT, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND WIRES LEADING DIRECTLY TO THE PANEL. • I I VI♦ 1 V.. VI\ 1 \1�\LV11 \LI.ILI \I... CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR NEON CIRCUITS 3" OFF VALANCE FACE CENTER LINE OF FOCAL WITH A DEDICATED HOT, NEUTRAL AND GROUND CONDUCTORS. DO NOT SHARE NEUTRAL OR GROUNDS WITH OTHER BRANCH CIRCUITS. • NOTE: 2006 IBC — Sec. 1006 Provide an average of one footcandle illumination at the floor along the entire egress pathway and exit discharge LIGHTING PLAN CODED NOTES NTS 05DE032DONOTE D U ° 2 x ? I1 W N W 1� Q U�UI o v� � CD CD — - =z0 O zv/a� w0C c, _ w Z WOCC °2 6 C W W 0 = a H H � a � O v O y , 1' H W C C � g a te 2 N W m G — WS L7 a�o2 2 � W S4^ 4 CC � W 2 3 li= 'S ° s G W 0 w 'C J a w N N a ln�as� 2 O W 0 0 2 W 0 Q O � a r - -- � d N 0 � ° ° '� V ° I � N �' W 2 0 a 0 C REQUIRED BY: ( It- A. rr 3K • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET Cd O a 0 a } CL 2 ° REVISIONS: awwC ID `kn.. Plonivii i CE i� 11� ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN DRAWING NUMBER: N N 0 H w 0 - 0 H a_ W z 0 O DATE 91/ RECEIVED CRY Y Ur I UKVVILA FFB 0 6 2000 DATE ISSUED: 12/14/2007 DESIGNED BY: LJW DRAWN BY: LJW CHECKED BY: GLB 0 Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suit 400 Overland Park, Kansas 662 1 T 913 - 383 --2621 913 --383 -2831 rsonbinkley.com C•' 'GHT 2007 THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN 1/4" : 1' -O" A LARSON BI NKLE Y it FIRE PENETRATION SCHEDULE SM SYMBOL r�A A 1 1 Now= El A X2 EMERGENCY LIGHT, NL EM FIRE RATED PENETRATION SCHEDULE TYPE OF PENETRATION METAL CONDUITS MAX. 4" PVC CONDUIT 2" AND SMALLER PVC CONDUITS 2" THRU 4" CABLE TRAY STEEL OR ALUMINUM ELECTRICAL BUS DUCT MAX. 3" CABLE BUNDLES CONCRETE OR MASONRY FLOORS UL SYSTEM # CAJ1080 CAJ1213 CAJ1198 CAJ2031 CAJ2038 CAJ2045 CAJ2124 CAJ4029 CAJ4020 CAJ6003 CAJ6008 CAJ3154 WALLS UL SYSTEM # CAJ1080 WJ1030 CAJ1198 WJ2018 CAJ2038 CAJ2045 CAJ2124 WJ4021 CAJ4020 W.14009 CAJ6003 CAJ6008 WJ3022 GYPSUM BOARD /FRAME FLOORS UL SYSTEM FC1010 FC2032 FC2033 WALLS UL SYSTEM # WL1049 W11088 WL1062 WL2093 WL2029 WL2059 WL4008 WL4005 WL6001 WL3076 "SPECSEAL FIRESTOP" PRODUCTS SS5100 SEALANT LC150 SEALANT PEN300 SILICONE 555100 SEALANT FIRESTOP COLLAR FIRESTOP COLLAR WRAP STRIPS FIRESTOP PILLOWS FiRESTOP MORTAR SS5100 SEALANT PEN300 SILICONE 555100 SEALANT SSS100 SEALANT NOTES: 1. AIL U.L LISTED SYSTEMS SHOWN ABOVE ARE BASED ON PROVIDING A 1 & 2 HOUR RATED FIRESTOP. WHERE 3 HOUR RATING 15 REQUIRED, CONTACT FIRESTOP PRODUCT MANUFACTURER FOR DESIGN MODIFICATIONS. 2. ALL U.L. LISTED SYSTEMS SHOWN ABOVE ARE BASED ON "SpecSeal Firestop" PRODUCTS FROM SPECIFIED TECHNOLOGIES, INC. OR APPROVED EQUAL PRODUCTS FROM "3 -M" OR HILTI, INC. EM RECESSED DOWNUGHT TRACK LIGHT TRACK HEAD SHOW WINDOW A , FLUORESCENT STRIP EMERGENCY FLUOR. STRIP FLUORESCENT TROFFER SCONCE DESCRIPTION DECORATIVE PENDANTS EXIT SIGN SEMI - RECESSED EMERGENCY UGHT, RECESSED SWITCH SWITCH - MOTION SENSOR SWITCH - DIMMER NIGHT LIGHT EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURE CEILING EXHAUST FAN TRAFFIC COUNTER SPEAKERS SUBWOOFER SECURITY CAMERA VIEW MONITOR FOR SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHTING SYMBOL SCHEDULE MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTION NTS OODEO33MOSCHD S HUBBELL WS1277W2 PASSIVE INFRARED, DOUBLE POLE, SINGLE THROW WALL SWITCH SENSOR WITH TWO SEPARATE RELAYS. WHITE COLOR FINISH. HUBBELL S61W, SINGLE POLE, SINGLE THROW WALL DIMMER SWITCH. WHITE COLOR FINISH. GC160, 120 VOLT, 1 PHASE, 115 WATTS NOTE: WALL MOUNTED /CEILING MOUNTED NOTE: ALL SYMBOLS MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS PROJECT. SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. LIGHTING PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES NTS OODE033KOSCHD P 1. LIGHTING SHALL BE CIRCUITED EXACTLY AS SHOWN ON PLANS. CIRCUITING SHALL BE "THRU- WIRING" WHERE AND WHENEVER POSSIBLE. MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS TO A SINGLE LIGHT FIXTURE FOR VOLTAGE DROP CONDITIONS OR AS A RESULT OF A FIELD CONDITION ARE ACCEPTABLE. LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE MANUFACTURED TO ACCOMMODATE "THRU- WIRING ". ANY RELATED COSTS FOR MULTIPLE CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE INCLUDED IN BID. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S BID SHALL INCLUDE THE INSTALLATION OF ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND ASSOCIATED LAMPS FURNISHED BY LSD &C. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 15 RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THE ADJUSTABILITY OF ALL DIRECTIONAL FIXTURES AFTER INSTALLATION AND AIM THEM PER GC DIRECTION. UGHT FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS MAY VARY. IF THIS IS THE CASE, CONTRACTOR IS TO CALL LSD &C PURCHASING AGENT WHO WILL THEN CALL THE DISTRIBUTOR FOR EXACT SPECIFICATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES. IF THE CEILING SYSTEMS ARE FIRE RATED, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO CLOSELY COORDINATE FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS WITH LSD &C. 3. EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTS SHALL BE INSTALLED AND CIRCUITED PER LOCAL AND LATEST NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODES. ALL EMERGENCY AND EXIT FIXTURES SHALL BE DUAL VOLTAGE WITH BATTERY BACK UP (120/277 VOLT INPUT). INSTALL A CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM WHERE THE USE OF INDIVIDUAL BATTERY UNITS ARE PROHIBITED BY LOCAL CODES. IF PLAN LOCATION I5 NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. 4. ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS UP TO 100' -0" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #12 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS FROM 100' -1" TO 150' -O" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #10 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. ALL LIGHTING CIRCUITS 150' -01" UP TO 250' -0" IN LENGTH SHALL UTILIZE #8 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. CIRCUITS ABOVE 251' -0" SHALL UTILIZE #6 CONDUCTORS MINIMUM. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED FOR A FULLY COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM. 6. EXIT /EMERGENCY LIGHTS AT STOREFRONT ARE TO BE CEILING MOUNTED AND CENTERED OVER OPENING. EXIT /EMERGENCY LIGHTS AT DOOR TO NON -SALES SHALL BE CEILING MOUNTED AND CENTERED ABOVE DOOR. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. 7. IT WILL BE THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO UNLOAD INVENTORY AND STORE LIGHTING PACKAGE. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL ALSO SHIP ANY EXCESS MATERIALS BACK TO THE ELECTRICAL PACKAGE DISTRIBUTOR. 8. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER BACK TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ALL WALL MOUNTED EMERGENCY EGRESS AND EXIT FIXTURES. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION. 9. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR COORDINATION AND EXACT LOCATION OF EXIT SIGNS, EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES, SPEAKERS, DIFFUSERS, AND OTHER ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS. 10. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MUST INCLUDE IN THE BID TWO (2) HOURS OF START -UP TIME FOR THE UGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO REPAIR OR REPLACE COMPONENTS FOUND TO BE DEFECTIVE. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MUST COORDINATE LIGHTING CONTROL START -UP WITH HVAC MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY REQUIRE THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO RETURN TO THE JOB SITE TO PERFORM START-UP AT A FUTURE DATE AT THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S OWN EXPENSE. NTS •t►i �, N ELECTRICAL LIGHT FiXTURE SCHEDULE SYMBOL A5 AF AJ BL BQ CF CS F3 F4 FG FR FW L5 N1 NE NM P3 P4 TH TS X2 X6 X9 DESCRIPTION 6' DIAMETER RECESSED COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNUGHT, CLEAR CONE, MATTE FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, SELF FLANGED REFLECTOR 6" DIAMETER RECESSED HORIZONTAL LAMP COMPACT FWORESCENT DOWNUGHT, CLEAR CONE, MATTE FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, SELF FLANGED REFLECTOR 6" DIAMETER RECESSED HORIZONTAL LAMP COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNUGHT, CLEAR CONE, MATTE FINISH, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, SELF FLANGED REFLECTOR EM BALLAST INSTALLED 4' DIAMETER ADJUSTABLE DOWNUGHT CLEAR MATT FINISH, SEMI DIFFIJSSED REFLECTOR, ELECTRONIC TRANSFORMER. 3" DIAMETER RECESSED ADJUSTABLE 11R16 ACCENT LIGHT, CONICAL DROP HINGE LAMP, MATTE WHITE FINISH, 358' ROTATION, 85' ADJUSTABILITY, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC TRANSFORMER. SECURE HOUSING TO STRUCTURE CERAMIC METAL HALIDE TRACK HEAD, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, COLOR CORRECTION REFLECTOR, WHITE FINISH METAL HALIDE, 2 LAMPS, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, WHITE FINISH 3' BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION 4' BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION 4' SURFACE MOUNTED BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION, WITH EMERGENCY PACK. WIRE GUARD. 4' SURFACE MOUNTED BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION WIRE GUARD 16' SURFACE MOUNTED BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION, (4) 4' SECTIONS TANDEM WIRED ON ONE BALLAST, QUICK CONNECT PLUGS WIRE GUARD 6' BARE LAMP FLUORESCENT STRIP, ELECTRONIC LOW BALLAST FACTOR BALLAST, 1 LAMP IN SECTION 1' X 4' SURFACE MOUNTED SINGLE LAMP FLUORESCENT TROFFER, PRISMATIC ACRYLIC LENS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST "PINK" NEON WALL MOUNTED "LOVE" "PINK" NEON WITHOUT METAL BOX PRIMELITE 40/19 WHiE PENDANT WITH 6" CANOPY WHITE FINISH 4 1/2" STEM WHITE FINISH, 1B' 111 DIAMETER SOCKET LABEL FOR 60W. PRIMELITE 40/19 WHITE PENDANT WITH 6" CANOPY WHITE FINISH 4 1/2" STEM WHITE FINISH, 18" IN DIAMETER SOCKET LABEL FOR 60 WATTS 4 1/4" DIAMETER TRACK MOUNTED PAR30 METAL HALIDE TRACKHEAD, INTEGRAL ELECTRONIC BALLAST, MATTE WHITE FINISH SURFACE MOUNTED SINGLE CIRCUIT TRACK, MATTE WHITE FINISH SEMI — RECESSED CEILING MOUNTED LID EXIT SIGN, EDGE LIT, SINGLE FACE, INJECTION— MOLDED, WEDGE SHAPED ACRYLIC. RED LETTERS, INTEGRAL EMERGENCY SERVICE THERMOPLASTIC EXIT SIGN, UNIVERSAL MOUNTING CEILING /WALL, LED LAMPS AND INTEGRAL BATTERY BACK UP FOR 90 MINUTES RECESSED EMERGENCY UGHT FOR SALES FLOOR USE, ADJUSTABLE LAMP, INTEGRAL BATTERY FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER HALO — PORTFOUO: C7032- 1E- 7001 —H LIGHTOUER— CALCULITE: 8021CCDP. S6132BU JUNO: CV6- 126/32T- 600C —SE HALO — PORTFOUO: C6132 -1E- 6051 —H UGHTOUER C L ULITE: 8031CCDP. 6132BU LIGIfTOUER: 8051CCDP, 6132BUEM LIG TOUER• C4LV: C4141RACCDW RSA: MLV3084. 0500 /EL/MBA -35 CON —TECH• LVR316. CTR325 AMERLUX: CYTL 20 MM E WT TJ1 120 FL DB2690 AMERLUX: CYLSR 2 20 MM E WT 120 FL DB2690 WH MERCURY: MM- 125—OCT— C— EL9 -12OV METALUX: SN- 125 —LRS- 120 —EB81 DURAY: EQH1125 MERCURY: MM- 132—OCT— C— ELB -120V METAUJX: 5N- 132 —IRS- 120 -981 DURAY: E0H1132 MERCURY: MM- 132— OCT—C— ELB- 120V —EMPK MERCURY: MM- 132— OCT— C— ELB -1ZPV. WC-UM -140 METALUX: 5N- 132 —IRS- 120 —EB81. WG /SN -4FT DURAY: EQH1132. WG-3" MERCURY: M11- 132- 0CT /16T— C— ELB -120V f4)WG —MM -140 METALUX: 16TSH- 132 —IRS- 120 —EB81. (4)WG /SN -4FT DURAY: EQH113217 -16', (4)WG -3' MERCURY: MM- 125 -0CT /6T— C— ELB— LW -120V METALUX: 6TSN- 125 —LRS- 120— LEOC81 DURAY: EQH1125T2 MERCURY: M30- 132— OCT- 9A— ELB -120V METALUX: MC- 132A- 120 —EB81 DURAY: 514132PFLA PROVIDED BY OTHERS PROVIDED BY OTHERS PRIMEUTE: 40/19- 18 -4.5' PRIMELITE: 40/19 -18 -14.5" CON —TECH: LACM- 39MHEI CTL1610)- 391AH— P— FA- 37A— LF30 -73 CON —TECH: LT2P. LT4P, LT6P, LTBP, LT12P as required JUNO: T2WH. T4WH. T6WH. T8WH. T12WH as r auired HALO: L650P. L651P. L652P. L553P as required INDY: 2T —W. 4T —W. 6T —W. 8T —W. 12T —W as required HIGH— LTTES: LED`BPN— RXFO -2 —RC ASTRAUTE: TPURWEM HIGHUTES: AG -1 -16 LIGHTALARMS: 605P1/L115 HEIGHT 9 5/8" 7 1/4" 7 1/4" 5 1/2" 3 1/2" 5 7/16' 3 1/4' 3 1/4" 3 1/4' 3 1/4" 3 1/4" 3 1/4' 3 3/4" 15" 15' 10 1/2" 11/16" LAMP 26 watt, T4, 4PIn GX24q -3 Base, Triple Compact Fluorescent, 3000K, 82CRI, 10,000 Hrs. 26 watt, T4, 4Pin GX24q -3 Base, Triple Compact Fluorescent, 3000K, 82CRI, 10,000 Hrs. 26 watt, T4, 4Pln GX24q -3 Base, Triple Compact Fluorescent, 3000K. 82CR1, 10,000 Hrs. 35 watt HIR, MR16. 2 Pin GX 5.3 Base, Quartz Halogen, Narrow Flood 24. 5000 Hrs. 35 watt FUR, MR16, 2 Pin GX 5.3 Base, Quartz Halogen, Narrow Flood 24', 5000 Hrs. 20 watt, Ceramic Metal Halide, T4, PGJ5 base, 3000K, 12.000 HRS. 2 -20 watt, Metal Halide, PGJ5 base, 3000K, 12,000 HRS. 25watt, TB. Medium BI —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000k, 82CRI, 20,000 Hrs. 32 Walt TB, Medium Bi—Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRT, 20,000 Hrs. 32 Watt, 11, Medium iN —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRT. 20.000 Hrs. 32 Watt, T8, Medium Bi —Pin Base, Linear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRI, 20,000 Hrs. 32 Watt, T8, Medium Bi —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRT, 20.000 Hrs. 25watt, TB, Medium BI —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000k, 82CRI, 20,000 Hrs. 32 Watt, T8, Medium Bi —Pin Base, Unear Fluorescent, 3000K, 82 CRT, 20,000 Hrs. Pink Colored Neon Pink Colored Neon 60 Watt, G30 Soff White, Medium Screw Bass, Incandescent, 4000 Hrs. 60 watt, G30, soft while, Medium Screw Base, Incandescent, 4000 Hrs. 39 Watt, PAR30, Medium Base, Metal Halide, Clear, 3000K, 85 CRI, Flood 30', 9000 Hrs. LED LED (1) 8W Halogen WATTAGE 32 WATTS 32 WATTS 32 WATTS 35 WATTS 35 WATTS 26 WATTS 52 WATTS 27 WATTS 32 WATTS 32 WATTS 32 WATTS 112 WATTS 42 WATTS 32 WATTS 108 WATTS 196 WATTS 60 WATTS 25 WATTS 46 WATTS 4 WATTS 4 WATTS 8 WATTS VOLTAGE 120 V 120 V 120 V 120 VOLTS 12/120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS 120 VOLTS NOTES 1. ALL FIXTURES ARE FURNISHED BY LSD &C UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND WIRING METHODS WITHIN PLENUM CEILING SHALL BE "PLENUM APPROVED" AS PER LOCAL ORDINANCES. 3. ALL UGHT FIXTURES WITH 'EM' AFTER FIXTURE DESIGNATION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH AN EMERGENCY BALLAST, PRODUCING A MINIMUM OF 1000 LUMENS FOR ONE (1) 48" LAMP. ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER HEIGHT LAMP WATTAGE VOLTAGE SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE MANUFACTURER & MODEL NUMBER HEIGHT LAMP REVIE Pl jANCE FOR COO PA7 0 - NEC NF PA • C�� �� Ytl� suuLDIN ° _SOON NTS 1 , ;I �I F NATTAGE VOLTAG 3 THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABIIJTY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. A LARSON B I NKLEY 00052394e033.dwg 12 -06 -07 08:23 Liso.Wyont 0 1— a 0 z Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Overland Park, Kansas cp sON • INDICATES NO REVISON TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: r on on w coo � z J 1J') W W N=< Se LL H o W J °' W < 1n a O o 14)W VI CO VI REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: T 913 -383 -2621 F 913 - 383 -2831 lorsonbinkley.com COPYRIGHT 2007 DRAWING NUMBER: 0 0 La 0 o 1— a LI; o CD Y • W Q W O- CD Q L,J Z O y_ t() LC) O O O 1— U a_ o tl W z a_ C o to 0 O w 1n a J 01/25/0e rlL i CIV L!! CITY O TUIQA/ L.A FEB 0 6 2008 PERMIT CENTER DATE 12/14/2007 LJ W LJW GLB ELECTRICAL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE IE 1 114PR0.EGT11 lM pAl6 f DFII WFAI1.D G CD D _ ri1 m a cn -I z — m ov• ;< -C — r c C— O • PROJECT INFORMATION: PINK! WESTFIELD SOUTHCENTER SPACE #1125 633 SOUTHCENTER SEATTLE, WA 98188 SCOPE: NEW PACKAGE: DESIGN TYPE: PINK GENERATION: LSD &C PROJECT #: 00052394 A/E PROJECT #: 0501449 07577 PROHIBITION ON REUSE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS WERE PREPARED FOR USE ON A SPECIFIC SITE CONTEMPORANEOUSLY WITH THEIR ISSUE DATE. THEY ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON A DIFFERENT PROJECT SITE OR AT A LATER TIME. REUSE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, OR ANY REPRODUCTION THEREOF, ON ANOTHER PROJECT IS PROHIBITED AND CONTRARY TO LAW UNLESS EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY LIMITED STORE PLANNING, INC., D/B/A UNITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ( "LSOC "). THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE THE PROPERTY OF LSUC AND SHALL NOT BE DISPLAYED IN ANY MANNER OR USED ON ANY OTHER PROJECT EXCEPT BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LSDC, NO REPRODUCTION OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF THE LSDC. ALL ORIGINALS OR REPRODUCTIONS OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MUST BE RETURNED TO LSDC UPON COMPLETION OF THEIR INTENDED USE, UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED BY THE LSDC. COPYRIGHT NOTICE: THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE COPYRIGHTED AND SUBJECT TO COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AS AN "ARCHITECTURAL WORK" UNDER SEC. 102 OF THE COPYRIGHT ACT, 17 U.S.C. AS AMENDED DECEMBER 1990; KNOWN AS THE ARCHITECTURAL WORKS COPYRIGHT PROTECTION ACT OF 1990. THE PROTECTION INCLUDES, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE OVERALL FORM, ARRANGEMENT AND COMPOSITION OF SPACES, AND ELEMENTS OF THE DESIGN. UNDER SUCH PROTECTION, UNAUTHORIZED USE OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS MAY RESULT IN CESSATION OF CONSTRUCTION, BUILDING SEIZURE, AND/OR MONETARY LIABILITY. LImItec # Q 1 .11 11 EDP STORE PLANNING, NC d b/a STORE DESIGN 3N N TRU T Tree Limited Parkway - Columbus, Ohio 43230 Telephone: _14, 15.7000 Fax: 614,415.7349 ht:tp: / /www LSD . L l e Brand s,co PI • W . r 7, 01; AP D- VMS -44 + L . t � y ��� 71 'Z-0 it 3 Z 1 CD CD 0 W W I 1 • Gi EM U O NJ A3 3 L4 IQ 0 z "'1 ° z PJ GI wo z ›mm z z-10 -o o S cn CA orn m w ° n.z.m ozcn_t �O o mm - z v .aM m � 2 oA mc I °mz -com �c�io ;c p3 o zF_ Zo�_mp �n o = ° z 0 - -lo wmC m -I -Imrnn Mm p rn m I M, T�T ET p m Z � to <Ln o ,m o oz D cm mo ° mmo° ,3° PA q rnz WO Zc m =CD O- I Nrn ;p' O � m r rZ rn N rn r m ao w ❑ N N m in m D m 11 v m r co 1, Z 0 DREAMSTEAMER OUTLET LOCATION INSTALL POWER INSIDE WALL UNLESS AGAINST DEMISING WALL THEN INSTALL ON FACE OF WALL NOTE: REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWING AND DETAIL INDIVIDUAL BRANCH CIRCUIT COLD WATER LINE TWIST LOCK RECEPTACLE 18" A.F.F. FROM CENTER OF THE OUTLET BOX SPECIFICAT N SERIES 2300 THREE PHASE MO L (208 VOLTS) 2200 -308 DEL (240 VOLTS) N/A BRANCH CIRCUIT RATING 40 AMPS RECEPTACLE NEMA CONFIGURATION N/A CATALOG NO. BRYANT CS 8369 POWER 13,500 WATTS WIDTH 48 INCHES DEPTH 30 1/2 INCHES HEIGHT 88 INCHES WEIGHT (WITH WATER) 300 LOS. WATER CAPACITY (APX.) 7 GALLONS WATER USAGE (APX.) 1/2 GALLONS PER HOUR REAMSTEAMER DETAIL CEPTAC CODED NOTES A 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DEDICATE SEPARATE ISOLATED NEUTRAL WIRE GROUND. CONNECT BOX. THE ELECTRICA INSTALL IG6300 -W TAB" TO SEPA CUT AND P CONDUIT WA HUBBELL, DOUBLE • GANG FLOOR BOX, (1) B4214 CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN ON POWER PLAN. HUBBELL, LID, (1) S38 HUBBELL, LID, (1 PTAC 3825 A OF TO BE CONTRACTOR "COOR BOX RECEPTACLE W/ DATA CODED NOTES 10 A 20 AMP, 120 VOLT CIRCUIT F WITH DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTA PATCH FLOOR AS REQ WALL AS SHOWN. CEILING SPACE INSIDE WR E AND PAN DESIG CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN ON POWER PLAN. HUBBELL, SINGLE GANG FLOOR BOX, (1) B2436 HUBBELL, LID, (1 PTAC 3825 IRCUIT WITH A D SHARE 3RD TWO GANG FLOOR ONTRACTOR SHALL CEPTACLE AND "BREAK --OFF E CLEAN AND UTILITY POWER. H FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP INSIDE CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO PANEL TED INSIDE WR ENCLOSURE. REFER TO OWER PLAN AND PANEL SCHEDULES FOR CIRCUIT DESIGNATIONS. 20 AMP, 120V., CIRCUIT FOR UTILITY POWER W /DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. CONNECT TO TWO GANG FLOOR BOX RECEPTACLE. (REFER TO NOTE 11 FOR RECEPTACLE AND CONDUIT INSTRUCTIONS) 30 DATA OUTLET IN FLOOR BOX. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO RUN A 3/4" EMPTY CONDUIT, WITH PULLWIRE, BACK TO TELECO SECTION OF THE SWITCHGEAR. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS HOWN. ROUTE UP IN WALL TO CEILING SPACE CONNECT TO TELCO STRUCTURE PORTION IFS SWITCHGEAR. WIRE FOR DATA LINES D AND CONNECTED BY P.O.S. OODE041CORECP UTILITY POWER ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLE. CUT AND D TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO UTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CONNECT TO PANEL LOCATED OSURE. REFER TO POWER PLAN SCHEDULES FOR CIRCUIT IONS. OOR BOX RECEPTACLE THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIF1CATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON I5 SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONS fl UCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. NTS O5DE042KODRMS 14\ TEMPERATURE SENSOR MOUNTING DETAIL NTS OODE041C1RECP NTS 05DE042FOTSMD K TRACK EQ Q NOTE: TRACK 7 �--- EQ- �--- EQ-- -� PACKAGE I ONE SECURITY DOME PER ROOM REQUIRED. CABINET OR CEILING CORNER TYPICAL CEILING TILE / �EQ EQ �I PACKAGE II EQ EQ VSS SECURITY DOME DETAIL NTS 05DE042JODOME J FLOOR LANDLORD'S TELEPHONE CONDUIT STUBBED INTO LEASE SPACE 3/4" EMPTY CONDUIT WITH PULLWIRE FOR CONTROL SYSTEM --- r T IFS CONTROLS ENCLOSURE. IFS CONTROLS ENCLOSURE. 1 LOW VOLTAGE SECTION OF IFS ENCLOSURE. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEM NOTES S S S S SS SS 1 " EMPTY CONDUIT e f WITH PULLWIRE DEMARCATION POINT 12 "X12" PLYWOOD TELEPHONE BACKBOARD CPU CART 53" ® 20 AMP, 120 VOLT SINGLE PHASE ISOLATED DEDICATED CIRCUIT, 20 AMP #IG6300 -W RECEPTACLE, WITH ISOLATED THIRD WIRE GROUND, IN A SINGLE 3/4" CONDUIT BACK TO PANELBOARD SECTION OF THE SWITCHGEAR FOR COMPUTER TERMINAL. DO NOT SHARE ANY PART OF THIS CIRCUIT WITH ANY OTHER BRANCH CIRCUITS. O IF REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE, FURNISH AND INSTALL 1/2" CONDUIT FROM EACH RF ANTENNA LOCATION BACK TO LOW VOLTAGE SECTION OF IFS ENCLOSURE. O 18" 0 2X4 JUNCTION BOX FOR DATA, TELEPHONE, FAX, AND POLLING. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO RUN A 1" EMPTY CONDUIT, WITH PULLWIRE, BACK TO TELCO SECTION OF THE SWITCHGEAR. DATA /TELEPHONE WIRE AND COVERPLATE BY OTHERS. 0 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DUPLEX RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT AND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FOR UTILITY POWER, IN A SINGLE 3/4" CONDUIT BACK TO PANELBOARD SECTION OF THE SWITCHGEAR. ® 1" EMPTY CONDUIT TO CASH WRAP, MANAGER'S AND DISTRICT MANAGER'S DESK AREAS. PROVIDE PULLWIRES IN EMPTY CONDUITS. DATA CABLING BY OTHERS. REFER TO CASH WRAP DETAIL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. NON -SALES 1 MANAGER'S DESK AREA CI 0 C OF DESK 0 36" SALES CEILING IRF WALL BACK WRAP CASH WRAP PHONE OUTLET RF ANTENNA J -BOX FOR DATA LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEM SCHEMATIC NTS 05DE042CORECP2 C LEAVE 6'--0" OF COILED, TAPED & LABELED SPEAKER WIRING (TYP. EACH CIRCUIT)-----„ NON -SALES ELEPHONE BOARD J -BOX IN WALL W/ COVERPLATE MOUNTED AT 8O" A.F.F. NEXT TO QUAD RECEPTACLE 14" WALL CLEARANCE ON HINGED SIDE OF CABINET SOUND SYSTEM CODED NOTES •• 10 .1-BOX ABOVE CEILING WITH PULLWIRE- 3/4" CONDUIT O 4 0 11 50 "(A.F.F.) 10 COAXIAL SPEAKER ENCLOSURE ( #CP87) AND SUPPORTS. LEAVE SLACK SPEAKER WIRE HANG 36" BELOW CEILING LINE. 02 SUB- WOOFER SPEAKER ENCLOSURE ( #DX1312) AND SUPPORTS. LEAVE SLACK SPEAKER WIRE HANG 36" BELOW CEILING LINE. 30 SPEAKER WIRE "WEST PENN" 125224 #18 AWG OR "DECARON" 1P70 #18 AWG ONLY. NO SUBSTITUTIONS. RUN WIRE (IN CONDUIT, IF REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE. SEE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXACT REQUIREMENTS) BETWEEN SPEAKER ENCLOSURES AND TO SYSTEM CABINET LOCATED IN SALES AREA. RUN WIRE IN RELATED CONDUIT AT SOUND SYSTEM CABINET. LABEL AND TAG SPEAKER WIRE HOMERUNS AT SOUND SYSTEM CABINET AS TO AREA SERVED (LE. SALES COAX, SUB - WOOFER, FITTING ROOM, NON - SALES, ETC.). TYPICAL AS REQUIRED. ® SOUND SYSTEM CABINET. DWR SERIES 19" SECTIONAL WALL RACK ENCLOSURE, MODEL NO. 24-22. REFER TO SPECIFICATION. 0 RUN 3/4" CONDUIT TO TELEPHONE BOARD. MUSIC VENDOR WILL RUN (2) PAIR OF #20 AWG SPEAKER WIRE FOR EACH TELEPHONE SYSTEM AS REQUIRED, AND LABEL AND TAG WIRE AT EACH END (THUS: "M.O.H." AND "TELECO PAGE "). NOTE: REFER TO RESPONSIBILTY SCHEDULE. COAX SUB - WOOFER (2) 1 -1/2" EMT CONDUIT FOR SPEAKER WIRE, RUN INSIDE WALL TERMINATE IN 6x6x4 BOX INSIDE OPENING. LEAVE 6' -0" OF COILED, TAPED & LABELED SPEAKER WIRING (TYP. EACH CIRCUIT) COILED AND TAPED (TYP): 36" TYP. QUADRAPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED AT 80" A.F.F. TO CENTERLINE OF SOUND SYSTEM CABINET. SALES DWR SERIES 19" SPECIFICATIONS R ��� COOK COMPLIANCE. 0 - NEC ��rP :EB 20 70 City of l'u011 ION E1A COMPLIANT 19" WALL-MOUNT RACK SHALL BE MIDDLE ATLANTIC PRODUCTS /DATATEL MODEL #DWR- 24 -22. PART NUMBER SHALL BE SUFFIXED WITH "PD" TO INDICATE THAT THE RACK SHALL SHIP ASSEMBLED WITH LOCKING PLEXIGLASS DOOR PRE - INSTALLED. OVERALL DIMENSIONS SHALL BE 23.4 "Wx24 "Hx22 "D. WEIGHT CAPACITY SHALL BE 300Ibs. CENTER SECTION AND BACKPAN SHALL BE 16 -GAUGE STEEL, PHOSPHATE PRE - TREATED AND FINISHED IN BLACK POWDER COAT. RACKRAIL SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF 11 -GAUGE STEEL WITH TAPPED 1 - -32 MOUNTING HOLES IN UNIVERSAL E1A SPACING WITH BLACK AND COAT FINISH AND MARKED RACKSPACES. RACK SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED TO SWING OPEN FOR COMPONENT CABLING ACCESS, CENTER SECTION SHALL PIVOT FOR EITHER LEFT OR RIGHT OPENING. BACKPAN SHALL BE FITTED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED LOCK AND LATCH CAPABLE OF ACCEPTING PADLOCK. RACK SHALL HAVE A REMOVABLE KNOCKOUT PANEL WITH 1/2 ", 3/4 ", AND 1 -1/2" ELECTRICAL KNOCKOUTS INSTALLED IN BOTTOM OF BACKPAN, AND A REMOVABLE REAR KNOCKOUT PANEL WITH 1/2 ", 3/4 ", 1" AND 1 -1/2" ELECTRICAL KNOCKOUTS, AND BNC KNOCKOUTS FOR UHF /VHF ANTENNAS INSTALLED IN TOP OF BACKPAN. LARGE LASER KNOCKOUT ON BACKPAN SHALL HAVE A 12 -1/2 "x12 -1/2" OPENING FOR CABLE PASS- THROUGH. FAN KNOCKOUTS ON TOP AND BOTTOM SHALL ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION OF UP TO FOUR 4 - 1/2 " FANS. TOP, BOTTOM AND SIDES SHALL FEATURE VERTICAL VENT PATTERN. RACK SHALL BE UL LISTED IN THE US AND CANADA. (JBL -RACK) SOUND SYSTEM INSTALLATION DETAIL NTS 05DE042AOSOUN A LARSON BI NKLEY Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd.. Suite, 400 Overland Park, Kansas 66 241 T 913 - 383 -2621 F 913 -383 -2831 rsanbinkley.com OPYRICIif 2007 1- W 0 CC CL L , w r U 7 c - 0 0 O U C "- Le) ° Vf = ° - c 12 c, - 2 W Q V L 2 y W z 3 w = a r z v 4 = a La wa -CC [A H W W 0 0 W w '- 1.1 W •� p f 9 ° w � � � w y W 0 , a F =z �a N 4 ! = 91. O �`3 ° a xv °° f o am' = _,, 3 . 0 d m W U y . Lo 0.1 = ° 00 W X ° 0_1- 0 1 C W 0 0) 414 vlizt r 0 0 SO` O CI • yr Q � F: 1 �3 o Neri cu REQUIRED BY: y S = W W W Vl y = a . 2 i ° � 2 w 3 Z LO �,_ -- =. < 2 = O 0 r 0 Ln O o ./I 0 J ° y 0 2 to LL, O- O W 0 d W V 2' 0 d =... tn Z j w = 0 4 o 2 z6 4 = ,jW De 1.1 2 wS r f n m b1 �..+ 00 = u7 C.% ° 0 u a ca CS 2 z w00- - r CC CC V10 • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 0 REVISIONS: Er EL LI C i ai 0 °C z f. W w r = z co o w v) i w a�a CL CL NI 0 0 � W ° S 2 L q�OZQ 1 C 0 I- U O M v N Q r V y N 00 = a 0 4 N °C7° ° i_ 0 • _ z x ac? W d r = = a 0 in U p re o C]QH VI a o °a °" o 3y[ = - y J O y 12 , F W ° v — W 1 + z? Fri - ,l = El i g = Ja� a Q 1- c U V) y y �= cn v. 3m 33 o a C U 0 W Y W H 0 0- ° W l7- : U a- d w re a V W d =- CO. 1 =W v1= RECEIVED CITY nF TIMA►ILA FEB ' p fi 2008 PI =HMIT flFNTI`P 12/14/2007 LJW LJW GLB ELECTRICAL DETAILS 11 DRAWING NUMBER: CL r• Ln O � Z Ln O O O DATE 01/25/08 £a6- 00052394e042.dwg 12 -06 -07 08 :04 Lisa.Wyant FLOOR O A ELEVATION SCALE ; N73 CEILING 12X12 DEMARCATION PLYWOOD TELEPHONE BACKBOARD IFS ENCLOSURE TELEPHONE/ DATA SECTION OF IFS CONTROLS ENCLOSURE. PULL BOX r CONDUIT 0 18"X18" PLYWOOD BOARD, MOUNTED UPPER RIGHT HAND SIDE OF PHONE BOARD FITTING ROOM PAGING SYSTEM CODED NOTES CONTROL PANEL FOR PAGING SYSTEM, MOUNTED 90" A.F.F. ON PLYWOOD TELEPHONE BACKBOARD NEXT TO I.F.S. ENCLOSURE. O 20 AMP, 120 VOLT SINGLE PHASE ISOLATED DEDICATED CIRCUIT, 20 AMP (PASS & SEYMOUR) #1G6300 -W RECEPTACLE, WITH ISOLATED THIRD WIRE GROUND, IN A SINGLE 3/4" CONDUIT BACK TO PANEL BOARD SECTION OF THE SWITCHGEAR. DO NOT SHARE ANY PART OF THIS CIRCUIT WITH ANY OTHER BRANCH CIRCUITS. KEYPAD FOR PAGING SYSTEM LOCATED IN STOCKROOM AREA, MOUNTED ON THE HANDLE SIDE OF THE NON -SALES DOOR THAT OPENS TO THE SALES AREA. WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND TERMINATED BY PAGING SYSTEM VENDOR. 0 n 1 WIRE IS CAT 3, PLENUM RATED, 4 PAIR, 24 AWG CABLE. WIRE SUPPLIED BY PAGING SYSTEM VENDOR. WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND TERMINATED BY PAGING SYSTEM VENDOR. l NON -SALES DOOR TO SALES AREA DOOR TO SALES AREA 6" -4 O 8 KEYPAD FRONT ELEVATION SOLE : Mrs co SALES OUTSIDE FITTING ROOM 4" A 0 C SWITCH FRONT ELEVATION SCALE r Mrs L OUTSIDE FITTING ROOM ■ FPF • O D SWITCH SIDE VIEW SCALE : Mrs FITTING ROOMS DRYWALL INSIDE FITTING ROOM CONDUIT SHOULD GO NO LOWER THAN 50" A.F.F. (IF REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE) DRYWALL 3/4" HOLE DRILLED AT 48" A.F.F. i SPLICE PERFORMED BY MANUFACTURERS TECHNICIAN 1 VSS FITTING ROOM PAGING SYSTEM 6 FOOT WHIP TO LIGHT BOX. EQ FULL HEIGHT LIGHT BOX LOCATIONS (DA & DB) MOUNT 4x4 JUNCTION BOX WITH QUAD OUTLET MUD RING, BLANK COVERPLATE AND 6' WHIP 6" FROM WALL :c MOUNT OUTLET 12" FROM WALL PACKAGE 1 BEAUTY CABINETS MOUNT 4x4 JUNCTION BOX WITH QUAD OUTLET MUD RING 6" FROM WALL FOCAL BAY J —BOX REQUIREMENTS: 1. PROVIDE BLANK COVERPLATE WITH 6' WHIP FOR DC LIGHT BOX. 2. PROVIDE QUAD OUTLET FOR ALL OTHER LOCATIONS. FIN MOUNT OUTLET 12" FROM WALL LIGHT BOX REC. MOUNTING DETAIL NTS 05DE043LTRECP N LOCATE FACING AWAY FROM ENTRY >• 1- Z w SINGLE DEDICATED RECEPTACLE FOR FOR PORTABLE HANDSTEAMER (REFER TO POWER PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION). DUPLEX RECEPTACLE FOR UTILITY POWER (REFER TO POWER PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION) NOTE: COLOR OF RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES ARE: 1. BLACK IN BLACK ROOM 2. WHITE IN PINK ROOM 3. WHITE IN SALES AREA EXCEPT FOR 1 AND 2 ABOVE. CORNER RECEPTACLE MOUNTING DETAIL 05DE043LOALRT NTS 05DE043JORECP L J LOCATE FURTHEST FROM ENTRY F RECEPTACLES AND COVERPLATES ARE: K IN BLACK ROOM ITE IN PINK ROOM HITE IN SALES AREA EXCEPT FOR 1 ABOVE. NOTE: COLOR 1. B 2. 3. OLUMN RECEPTACLE MOUNTING DETAIL MOUNT OUTLET 6" FROM WALL VSS PLATFORM NOTE: HORIZONTALLY MOUNT OUTLET 10" ABOVE PLATFORM WALL Q c_ IF CODE COMPLIANT, MOUNT OUTLET VERTICALLY ON COLUMN AT 15" A.F.F. DO NOT ADD MIRROR ON COLUMN IF OUTLET IS MOUNTED AT 15" A.F.F. r Q. (SPLAY WINDOW REC. MOUNTING DETAIL NOTE: IF NO PLATFORM, MOUNT OUTLETS 15" A.F.F. LOCATE OUTLETS EVERY 10' -0" ON LONG WALLS. WHEN ON PLATFORM, RECEPTACLES ARE ON THE VERTICAL WALL FACE, HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED AT 10" ABOVE PLATFORM FLOOR. X DIMENSIONS VARY PER E02.2 FOR EXACT LOC P�� CODE COI`s N FPA 70 - NEC EEB 2 0 Lu27113 City Of Tukwila REVIEWED B . ILDIN D,lII4 .r - iII'1IIiI1 BINET. REFER TO POWER PLANS E02.1, IONS. THREE DUPLEX RECEPTACLES (IN SINGLE THREE -GANG JUNCTION BOX AND SINGLE COVERPLATE) FOR CONNECTION OF BEAUTY CABINETS. THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. EAUTY CABINET REC. MOUNTING DETAIL Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suite Overland Park, Kansas 6621 T 913 -383 -2621 913 - 383 -2531 nbinkley.com MIGHT 2007 0 0) 4241 0 0 V U N x = w g J O ° C y 3 w w J V1 i�'-o J � J 12j yH 4 � � W = vSi,w3- oQp _ aEI l ': "W ,ay =66 x C_ c o H � J V C i l l, ZIOnI a¢ � 0 In wO- a ��o ° ¢ U L]�0.'O w2;i! ,.a 4 O F a 7 0 052 p 0mow 0 ° 2 Z( � a !2_ � p a a = CI G .0 - W O Ca C vi M - a aa v+ ! zc:w C 20 ° C ° ; W O W X 0 a1- IL 1- 0 d EC U a K a to 0 O 1- 2 W ° =N a w w "- O C C O :La 0 J U A REQUIRED BY: • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET REVISIONS: 0 RECEIVED DRAWING NUMBER: 4 0 4 H C 0 2 0 a m F a 2 C W Q La CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 6 2008 PERMIT CENTER ELECTRICAL DETAILS 0 0 ag� N N N 0 Lit Z U O W O SC W ck- W � Y � w Z a) Z � N 0 0 0 DATE 0 DATE ISSUED: 12/14/2007 DESIGNED BY: LJW DRAWN BY: LJW CHECKED BY: GLB a '''' r tl NTS 05DE043GORECP NTS 05DEO43EORECP C�3 6" H BASE NOTE: FOR PINK -TO -PINK ROOM TRANSITIONS RECPT. COVERPLATE ARE WHITE. ALL OTHER TRANSITIONS ARE BLACK. W DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED AT 3" AFF �I9 TRANSITION REC. MOUNTING DETAIL NTS 05DE043CORECP NTS 05DE043AORECP C LARSON BI N K L E Y 00052394e043.dwg 12 -06 - 07 07:59 Lisa.Wyant NOTE DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (E) INNER CONDUIT TO ANTENNA 8" MIN. (F) CAP BOX TO REMOTE ALARM 7' MAX. (G) POWER PACK TO REMOTE ALARM 25')MAX. (H) ANTENNA SEPERATION 2" MIN TO 24" MAX (J) OUTER CONDUIT TO ANTENNA 10" MIN (K) WIDTH OF EXCAVATION 4' -3" NO OF ANTENNAS POWER PACK(S) REQUIRED CAP ENCLOSURE(S) REQUIRED 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 2 4 2 2 NOTE NO OF ANTENNAS LENGTH OF EXCAVATION (L) 1 7' -2" 2 14' -3" 3 21' -4" 4 28' -5" NOTE DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS (A) SURFACE TO ANTENNA 1.25" MIN. TO 2" MAX. (B) ANTENNA THICKNESS 0.75" (C) ANTENNA TO REBAR 8" MIN. (D) DEPTH OF EXCAVATION 2" MIN. TO 2.75" MAX. Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suite Overland Park. Kansas 6621 400 T 913 - 383 -2621 913 - 383 -2831 nbinkley.com OPYRICFi1' 2007 0) 1 0 Lr) 0 .Soli C� CC C#3 • '0 s � U N x REQUIRED BY: w 'C _ 1 & N 0 cc H Y ° W zc� °° zo QF F Q y 0 0 C, j o a= ar w C2 l'= N Qtn a w� ° m o ' ' Z C C 2 v1 � 1 H 1-a 2 O aw W =2 w 0-1 cao_C W ca SQN raCavlo • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: REVISIONS: x ° aw °a Ia�iHW N Wir a W ! w p I- y ° �;i 4 3 w 4 fA 1- U 1' fn H 7 Q C = 67:„ y =j U W W O m o o ��.! .. W L [=J • 2 = 4 O !! t Y x 4 p w U ,;.,c 1 U L H = Y .1' W as a o3y [ V1 p W w W a w i i H � S � = J o_CCx �, v1 aca Q Y W J W C Q O = O Y U to V1 4!0"12: z Q ~ N = p 4 a l v l i �i via °YZ Cd ccw= _ d W a m U � l i V= v+ Z • W v1 RECEIVFn CITY OF TUKWILA FEB D 6 2008 PLKIVIIT CENTER DRAWING NUMBER: co' N N N 0 1- w 0 O H 0_ O_ w Z O. 0 tn o v) D J DATE 01/25/06 12/14/2007 LJW LJW GLB ELECTRICAL DETAILS I NO METAL REBAR OR WIRE MESH WITHIN 21 CM (8 ") OF BOTTOM AND 31CM (12 ") OF SIDES OF ANTENNA FRONT ELEVATION NTS PLAN VIEW LEASE UNE (FIELD VERIFY) NTS O 8"M IN I STORE SIDE (L) r CJ) (H) 8 "MIN MALL SIDE POWER PACK ANTENNAS O • - (G) 1(F) REMOTE ALARM POWER PACK EMOTE ALARM CEILING LINE �.,.^ REBAR, MESH, PAN OR OTHER METAL REINFORCEMENT CONDUIT RUN 10.5M (35') OR 1 6.8M (55') MAX. CAP BOARD ENCLOSURE SENSORMATIC DIGITAL FLOOR MAX SYSTEM NOTES 10 INDIVIDUAL 3/4 INCH EMT CONDUIT INTERCONNECTS BETWEEN EACH FLOOR PANEL AND ITS RESPECTIVE CAP ENCLOSURE BOX - CAP ENCLOSURE BOXES ARE LOCATED ABOVE CEILING WITHIN 2 FEET OF POWER PACK. CONDUIT ABOVE CEILING SHALL BE ROUTED CLEAR OF ACCESS OPENING. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF CONDUIT SHALL NOT EXCEED 35' FROM FLOOR PANEL TO CAP BOX. NOTE: CONDUIT RUNS UNDERFLOOR SHALL BE RMC OR IMC. CAP BOARD ENCLOSURE. EACH CAP BOX MUST BE MOUNTED WITHIN 2 FEET OF POWER PACK. ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE, SIZED PER CODE, LOCATED IN AREA ABOVE CEILING. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ARE 120V. AC, THREE WIRE, DEDICATED CIRCUIT, 24 HOUR CIRCUIT WITH LESS THAN 0.5V. AC BETWEEN NEUTRAL AND GROUND. RETURN AIR GRILLE OR ACCESS PANEL TO BE USED FOR SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE ROUGH -IN OF JUNCTION BOX AND RECEPTACLE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. GRILLE /ACCESS PANEL MUST BE 24 IN. BY 24 IN. MINIMUM. 5I 1 - 1/2 INCHES DEEP X 4 FOOT WIDE (APPROXIMATE) SAWCUT FOR EACH FLOOR PANEL. DEPTH OF CUT SHALL BE LEVEL THROUGHOUT. CONFIRM ACTUAL DIMENSIONS OF SAWCUTS WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. IF THE SLAB CANNOT BE CUT FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE FLOOR (ANTENNA) PANELS, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUST INVESTIGATE THE OPTION OF "FLOATING" THE PANELS IN AN ADDITIONAL LAYER OF POURED CONCRETE ('RAMPING UP'). THIS WILL DEPEND ON THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR INSIDE THE STORE IN RELATION TO THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR IN THE MALL. THE TYPE OF FINISHED FLOORING WILL HAVE SOME EFFECT ON THE ACTUAL DEPTH OF THE FLOOR PANELS IN THE SLAB. THE THICKNESS OF THE FLOORING PLUS THE THICKNESS OF THE CONCRETE PATCH OVER THE PANELS SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY 1 -1/2 INCHES. SAWCUT FLOOR 1" WIDE X 1 -1/2" DEEP FOR INSTALLATION OF 3/4" CONDUIT. NOTCH TRENCHES AT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS OF FLOOR PANELS. TYPICAL OF ALL FLOOR PANELS. JUNCTION BOX WITH 120V. AC POWER FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO SENSORMATIC POWER PACKS. INSTALLATION OF POWER PACKS AND PLUG -IN OF PACKS TO RECEPTACLE BY SENSORMATIC. NOTE: CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY AN UNOBSTRUCTED MINIMUM FREE AREA OF 3 FEET VERTICALLY AND 3 FEET WIDE IN EVERY DIRECTION ABOVE THE ACCESS PANEL TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION OF THE SENSORMATIC POWER PACK AND CAP ENCLOSURE BOXES. IF FREE AREA CANNOT BE OBTAINED IN THIS LOCATION, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER FOR FURTHER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. NOTE: GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF THE SENSORMATIC SYSTEM WITH SENSORMATIC MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS. "ON- GRADE" SENSORMATIC FLOORMAX SYSTEM DETAIL (11' -O" OR GREATER GRILLE OPENING) THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO UABILIIY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. NTS 05DE044JOSENS J BACK ELEVATION NTS BACK ELEVATION NTS CASHWRAP & TELE /COMP SYSTEM NOTES (D REGISTERS SHALL SHARE TWO 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DEDICATED CIRCUIT WITH A SEPARATE ISOLATED NEUTRAL & 3RD WIRE GROUND. STUB UP 3/4" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.) WHERE SHOWN ON DETAIL INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO J -BOX AND CONNECT TO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ORANGE #105362 RECEPTACLES (HUBBELL). CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO PANEL LOCATED INSIDE IFS ENCLOSURE. REFER TO POWER PLAN AND PANEL SCHEDULES FOR CIRCUIT DESIGNATIONS. d TWO 20 AMP, 120V, CIRCUITS FOR UTILITY POWER W /DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. STUB UP 3/4" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.) WHERE SHOWN ON DETAIL INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO J -BOX AND CONNECT TO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND BACK TO PANEL AS INDICATED ON POWER PLAN. CONNECT TO BUZZER TRANSFORMER CJ L`J SHOWN ON PLAN +9" A. 0 . PLAN VIEW NTS ® STUB UP 1" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.). INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO 4X4 J -BOX FOR DATA AND TELEPHONE. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP IN WALL. TO CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO TELECO STRUCTURE PORTION OF THE IFS SWITCHGEAR. WIRE FOR DATA LINES TO BE PULLED AND CONNECTED BY P.O.S. CONTRACTOR. d 3/4" TELEPHONE CONDUIT WITH PULLWIRE TO TELEPHONE BOARD BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. #RJ14C JACK ON LINES #1 AND #2 FOR TELEPHONE BY OTHERS. r el re +9" A F.F. 0 CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN ON POWER PLAN +r A.F.F. a [1] 1,01.3t” DATA TERMINALS AND CONNECTIONS BY P.O.S. CONTRACTOR NOTE: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PINK CASHWRAP DETAIL 05DE044E3PINK A LA BINKLEY SOUTHCENTER ^- f LI - --- -- - - - - - -- - ri 1 1 _l_ ._ _ L -''j. qq T q T Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suite Overland Park. Kansas 6621 400 T 913 - 383 -2621 913 - 383 -2831 nbinkley.com OPYRICFi1' 2007 0) 1 0 Lr) 0 .Soli C� CC C#3 • '0 s � U N x REQUIRED BY: w 'C _ 1 & N 0 cc H Y ° W zc� °° zo QF F Q y 0 0 C, j o a= ar w C2 l'= N Qtn a w� ° m o ' ' Z C C 2 v1 � 1 H 1-a 2 O aw W =2 w 0-1 cao_C W ca SQN raCavlo • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: REVISIONS: x ° aw °a Ia�iHW N Wir a W ! w p I- y ° �;i 4 3 w 4 fA 1- U 1' fn H 7 Q C = 67:„ y =j U W W O m o o ��.! .. W L [=J • 2 = 4 O !! t Y x 4 p w U ,;.,c 1 U L H = Y .1' W as a o3y [ V1 p W w W a w i i H � S � = J o_CCx �, v1 aca Q Y W J W C Q O = O Y U to V1 4!0"12: z Q ~ N = p 4 a l v l i �i via °YZ Cd ccw= _ d W a m U � l i V= v+ Z • W v1 RECEIVFn CITY OF TUKWILA FEB D 6 2008 PLKIVIIT CENTER DRAWING NUMBER: co' N N N 0 1- w 0 O H 0_ O_ w Z O. 0 tn o v) D J DATE 01/25/06 12/14/2007 LJW LJW GLB ELECTRICAL DETAILS I NO METAL REBAR OR WIRE MESH WITHIN 21 CM (8 ") OF BOTTOM AND 31CM (12 ") OF SIDES OF ANTENNA FRONT ELEVATION NTS PLAN VIEW LEASE UNE (FIELD VERIFY) NTS O 8"M IN I STORE SIDE (L) r CJ) (H) 8 "MIN MALL SIDE POWER PACK ANTENNAS O • - (G) 1(F) REMOTE ALARM POWER PACK EMOTE ALARM CEILING LINE �.,.^ REBAR, MESH, PAN OR OTHER METAL REINFORCEMENT CONDUIT RUN 10.5M (35') OR 1 6.8M (55') MAX. CAP BOARD ENCLOSURE SENSORMATIC DIGITAL FLOOR MAX SYSTEM NOTES 10 INDIVIDUAL 3/4 INCH EMT CONDUIT INTERCONNECTS BETWEEN EACH FLOOR PANEL AND ITS RESPECTIVE CAP ENCLOSURE BOX - CAP ENCLOSURE BOXES ARE LOCATED ABOVE CEILING WITHIN 2 FEET OF POWER PACK. CONDUIT ABOVE CEILING SHALL BE ROUTED CLEAR OF ACCESS OPENING. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF CONDUIT SHALL NOT EXCEED 35' FROM FLOOR PANEL TO CAP BOX. NOTE: CONDUIT RUNS UNDERFLOOR SHALL BE RMC OR IMC. CAP BOARD ENCLOSURE. EACH CAP BOX MUST BE MOUNTED WITHIN 2 FEET OF POWER PACK. ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE, SIZED PER CODE, LOCATED IN AREA ABOVE CEILING. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ARE 120V. AC, THREE WIRE, DEDICATED CIRCUIT, 24 HOUR CIRCUIT WITH LESS THAN 0.5V. AC BETWEEN NEUTRAL AND GROUND. RETURN AIR GRILLE OR ACCESS PANEL TO BE USED FOR SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE ROUGH -IN OF JUNCTION BOX AND RECEPTACLE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. GRILLE /ACCESS PANEL MUST BE 24 IN. BY 24 IN. MINIMUM. 5I 1 - 1/2 INCHES DEEP X 4 FOOT WIDE (APPROXIMATE) SAWCUT FOR EACH FLOOR PANEL. DEPTH OF CUT SHALL BE LEVEL THROUGHOUT. CONFIRM ACTUAL DIMENSIONS OF SAWCUTS WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. IF THE SLAB CANNOT BE CUT FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE FLOOR (ANTENNA) PANELS, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUST INVESTIGATE THE OPTION OF "FLOATING" THE PANELS IN AN ADDITIONAL LAYER OF POURED CONCRETE ('RAMPING UP'). THIS WILL DEPEND ON THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR INSIDE THE STORE IN RELATION TO THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR IN THE MALL. THE TYPE OF FINISHED FLOORING WILL HAVE SOME EFFECT ON THE ACTUAL DEPTH OF THE FLOOR PANELS IN THE SLAB. THE THICKNESS OF THE FLOORING PLUS THE THICKNESS OF THE CONCRETE PATCH OVER THE PANELS SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY 1 -1/2 INCHES. SAWCUT FLOOR 1" WIDE X 1 -1/2" DEEP FOR INSTALLATION OF 3/4" CONDUIT. NOTCH TRENCHES AT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS OF FLOOR PANELS. TYPICAL OF ALL FLOOR PANELS. JUNCTION BOX WITH 120V. AC POWER FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO SENSORMATIC POWER PACKS. INSTALLATION OF POWER PACKS AND PLUG -IN OF PACKS TO RECEPTACLE BY SENSORMATIC. NOTE: CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY AN UNOBSTRUCTED MINIMUM FREE AREA OF 3 FEET VERTICALLY AND 3 FEET WIDE IN EVERY DIRECTION ABOVE THE ACCESS PANEL TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION OF THE SENSORMATIC POWER PACK AND CAP ENCLOSURE BOXES. IF FREE AREA CANNOT BE OBTAINED IN THIS LOCATION, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER FOR FURTHER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. NOTE: GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF THE SENSORMATIC SYSTEM WITH SENSORMATIC MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS. "ON- GRADE" SENSORMATIC FLOORMAX SYSTEM DETAIL (11' -O" OR GREATER GRILLE OPENING) THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO UABILIIY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. NTS 05DE044JOSENS J BACK ELEVATION NTS BACK ELEVATION NTS CASHWRAP & TELE /COMP SYSTEM NOTES (D REGISTERS SHALL SHARE TWO 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DEDICATED CIRCUIT WITH A SEPARATE ISOLATED NEUTRAL & 3RD WIRE GROUND. STUB UP 3/4" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.) WHERE SHOWN ON DETAIL INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO J -BOX AND CONNECT TO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ORANGE #105362 RECEPTACLES (HUBBELL). CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO PANEL LOCATED INSIDE IFS ENCLOSURE. REFER TO POWER PLAN AND PANEL SCHEDULES FOR CIRCUIT DESIGNATIONS. d TWO 20 AMP, 120V, CIRCUITS FOR UTILITY POWER W /DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. STUB UP 3/4" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.) WHERE SHOWN ON DETAIL INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO J -BOX AND CONNECT TO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND BACK TO PANEL AS INDICATED ON POWER PLAN. CONNECT TO BUZZER TRANSFORMER CJ L`J SHOWN ON PLAN +9" A. 0 . PLAN VIEW NTS ® STUB UP 1" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.). INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO 4X4 J -BOX FOR DATA AND TELEPHONE. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP IN WALL. TO CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO TELECO STRUCTURE PORTION OF THE IFS SWITCHGEAR. WIRE FOR DATA LINES TO BE PULLED AND CONNECTED BY P.O.S. CONTRACTOR. d 3/4" TELEPHONE CONDUIT WITH PULLWIRE TO TELEPHONE BOARD BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. #RJ14C JACK ON LINES #1 AND #2 FOR TELEPHONE BY OTHERS. r el re +9" A F.F. 0 CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN ON POWER PLAN +r A.F.F. a [1] 1,01.3t” DATA TERMINALS AND CONNECTIONS BY P.O.S. CONTRACTOR NOTE: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PINK CASHWRAP DETAIL 05DE044E3PINK A LA BINKLEY SOUTHCENTER ^- f LI - --- -- - - - - - -- - -- - _ . -- El L - -- -''j. Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suite Overland Park. Kansas 6621 400 T 913 - 383 -2621 913 - 383 -2831 nbinkley.com OPYRICFi1' 2007 0) 1 0 Lr) 0 .Soli C� CC C#3 • '0 s � U N x REQUIRED BY: w 'C _ 1 & N 0 cc H Y ° W zc� °° zo QF F Q y 0 0 C, j o a= ar w C2 l'= N Qtn a w� ° m o ' ' Z C C 2 v1 � 1 H 1-a 2 O aw W =2 w 0-1 cao_C W ca SQN raCavlo • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: REVISIONS: x ° aw °a Ia�iHW N Wir a W ! w p I- y ° �;i 4 3 w 4 fA 1- U 1' fn H 7 Q C = 67:„ y =j U W W O m o o ��.! .. W L [=J • 2 = 4 O !! t Y x 4 p w U ,;.,c 1 U L H = Y .1' W as a o3y [ V1 p W w W a w i i H � S � = J o_CCx �, v1 aca Q Y W J W C Q O = O Y U to V1 4!0"12: z Q ~ N = p 4 a l v l i �i via °YZ Cd ccw= _ d W a m U � l i V= v+ Z • W v1 RECEIVFn CITY OF TUKWILA FEB D 6 2008 PLKIVIIT CENTER DRAWING NUMBER: co' N N N 0 1- w 0 O H 0_ O_ w Z O. 0 tn o v) D J DATE 01/25/06 12/14/2007 LJW LJW GLB ELECTRICAL DETAILS I NO METAL REBAR OR WIRE MESH WITHIN 21 CM (8 ") OF BOTTOM AND 31CM (12 ") OF SIDES OF ANTENNA FRONT ELEVATION NTS PLAN VIEW LEASE UNE (FIELD VERIFY) NTS O 8"M IN I STORE SIDE (L) r CJ) (H) 8 "MIN MALL SIDE POWER PACK ANTENNAS O • - (G) 1(F) REMOTE ALARM POWER PACK EMOTE ALARM CEILING LINE �.,.^ REBAR, MESH, PAN OR OTHER METAL REINFORCEMENT CONDUIT RUN 10.5M (35') OR 1 6.8M (55') MAX. CAP BOARD ENCLOSURE SENSORMATIC DIGITAL FLOOR MAX SYSTEM NOTES 10 INDIVIDUAL 3/4 INCH EMT CONDUIT INTERCONNECTS BETWEEN EACH FLOOR PANEL AND ITS RESPECTIVE CAP ENCLOSURE BOX - CAP ENCLOSURE BOXES ARE LOCATED ABOVE CEILING WITHIN 2 FEET OF POWER PACK. CONDUIT ABOVE CEILING SHALL BE ROUTED CLEAR OF ACCESS OPENING. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF CONDUIT SHALL NOT EXCEED 35' FROM FLOOR PANEL TO CAP BOX. NOTE: CONDUIT RUNS UNDERFLOOR SHALL BE RMC OR IMC. CAP BOARD ENCLOSURE. EACH CAP BOX MUST BE MOUNTED WITHIN 2 FEET OF POWER PACK. ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE, SIZED PER CODE, LOCATED IN AREA ABOVE CEILING. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ARE 120V. AC, THREE WIRE, DEDICATED CIRCUIT, 24 HOUR CIRCUIT WITH LESS THAN 0.5V. AC BETWEEN NEUTRAL AND GROUND. RETURN AIR GRILLE OR ACCESS PANEL TO BE USED FOR SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE ROUGH -IN OF JUNCTION BOX AND RECEPTACLE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. GRILLE /ACCESS PANEL MUST BE 24 IN. BY 24 IN. MINIMUM. 5I 1 - 1/2 INCHES DEEP X 4 FOOT WIDE (APPROXIMATE) SAWCUT FOR EACH FLOOR PANEL. DEPTH OF CUT SHALL BE LEVEL THROUGHOUT. CONFIRM ACTUAL DIMENSIONS OF SAWCUTS WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. IF THE SLAB CANNOT BE CUT FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE FLOOR (ANTENNA) PANELS, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUST INVESTIGATE THE OPTION OF "FLOATING" THE PANELS IN AN ADDITIONAL LAYER OF POURED CONCRETE ('RAMPING UP'). THIS WILL DEPEND ON THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR INSIDE THE STORE IN RELATION TO THE LEVEL OF THE FLOOR IN THE MALL. THE TYPE OF FINISHED FLOORING WILL HAVE SOME EFFECT ON THE ACTUAL DEPTH OF THE FLOOR PANELS IN THE SLAB. THE THICKNESS OF THE FLOORING PLUS THE THICKNESS OF THE CONCRETE PATCH OVER THE PANELS SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY 1 -1/2 INCHES. SAWCUT FLOOR 1" WIDE X 1 -1/2" DEEP FOR INSTALLATION OF 3/4" CONDUIT. NOTCH TRENCHES AT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS OF FLOOR PANELS. TYPICAL OF ALL FLOOR PANELS. JUNCTION BOX WITH 120V. AC POWER FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO SENSORMATIC POWER PACKS. INSTALLATION OF POWER PACKS AND PLUG -IN OF PACKS TO RECEPTACLE BY SENSORMATIC. NOTE: CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY AN UNOBSTRUCTED MINIMUM FREE AREA OF 3 FEET VERTICALLY AND 3 FEET WIDE IN EVERY DIRECTION ABOVE THE ACCESS PANEL TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION OF THE SENSORMATIC POWER PACK AND CAP ENCLOSURE BOXES. IF FREE AREA CANNOT BE OBTAINED IN THIS LOCATION, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER FOR FURTHER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. NOTE: GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF THE SENSORMATIC SYSTEM WITH SENSORMATIC MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS. "ON- GRADE" SENSORMATIC FLOORMAX SYSTEM DETAIL (11' -O" OR GREATER GRILLE OPENING) THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO UABILIIY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. NTS 05DE044JOSENS J BACK ELEVATION NTS BACK ELEVATION NTS CASHWRAP & TELE /COMP SYSTEM NOTES (D REGISTERS SHALL SHARE TWO 20 AMP, 120 VOLT DEDICATED CIRCUIT WITH A SEPARATE ISOLATED NEUTRAL & 3RD WIRE GROUND. STUB UP 3/4" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.) WHERE SHOWN ON DETAIL INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO J -BOX AND CONNECT TO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ORANGE #105362 RECEPTACLES (HUBBELL). CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO PANEL LOCATED INSIDE IFS ENCLOSURE. REFER TO POWER PLAN AND PANEL SCHEDULES FOR CIRCUIT DESIGNATIONS. d TWO 20 AMP, 120V, CIRCUITS FOR UTILITY POWER W /DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. STUB UP 3/4" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.) WHERE SHOWN ON DETAIL INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO J -BOX AND CONNECT TO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE UP INSIDE WALL TO CEILING SPACE AND BACK TO PANEL AS INDICATED ON POWER PLAN. CONNECT TO BUZZER TRANSFORMER CJ L`J SHOWN ON PLAN +9" A. 0 . PLAN VIEW NTS ® STUB UP 1" CONDUIT 6" (A.F.F.). INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FROM STUB -UP TO 4X4 J -BOX FOR DATA AND TELEPHONE. CUT AND PATCH FLOOR AS REQUIRED TO ROUTE CONDUIT TO WALL AS SHOWN. ROUTE UP IN WALL. TO CEILING SPACE AND CONNECT TO TELECO STRUCTURE PORTION OF THE IFS SWITCHGEAR. WIRE FOR DATA LINES TO BE PULLED AND CONNECTED BY P.O.S. CONTRACTOR. d 3/4" TELEPHONE CONDUIT WITH PULLWIRE TO TELEPHONE BOARD BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. #RJ14C JACK ON LINES #1 AND #2 FOR TELEPHONE BY OTHERS. r el re +9" A F.F. 0 CONNECT TO CIRCUIT SHOWN ON POWER PLAN +r A.F.F. a [1] 1,01.3t” DATA TERMINALS AND CONNECTIONS BY P.O.S. CONTRACTOR NOTE: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PINK CASHWRAP DETAIL 05DE044E3PINK A LA BINKLEY SOUTHCENTER PANELBOARD A LOCATION: WR ENCLOSURE (IFS) VOLTAGE 120/208V., 3PH, 4W MOUNTING SURFACE 60A M.C.B BUS RATING 100A A.I.C.: 10,000A LCL LTG ZONE CCT NO. LOAD DESCRIPTION CB LOAD CB LOAD DESCRIPTION CCT NO. LTG ZONE LCL AMP POLE A B C AMP POLE X 3.0 1 SALES AREA NUEMG 20 1 1 504 „ »: ::. �Jr 336 sz�A ; x�• #? » Ur, 20 STOC ROOM LTS. K 2 B X X A 3 FRONT LTS 20 1 1 75 jf °xf1? �,.. ; , „xx M.. � --�", SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW 1,440 360 z I11 FITTING ROOM LTS 4 C X X A 5 SIGN 20 1 E•::f I '@ .I i:� # > #L�:� It f)£ <- •< :r- `•.:::,' 1, 200 8.50 54° 360 277/480V, 30 SALES AREA LTS. 6 C X X D 7 SALES TRACK LTS 20 1 1'27712 %I #Iis ;fsf €I - " C 277/480V, 30 SALES AREA LTS. 8 9 X X 20 20 1 1HH SALES AREA LTS. 10 - 3; X D 9 SALES TRACK LTS 20 1 1,470 Pry .w 645 m.-„,01 X D 11 SALES TRACK LTS 20 1 »'"> 588 ...x -, ',i H3xx di: 486 = MINIMUM FEEDER AMPERAGE SALES AREA LTS- 12 C X X D 13 NEON SIGNS 20 608 1 D I ;€ SPARE 14 C X X D 15 LIGHT BOXES 20 1 1'3 x ¢ ,1 .:3's1 0 113 : , .:. SPARE 16 C 17 SOUND SYSTEM D 17 SPARE 20 ,y 0 RESTROOM RCPT SPARE 18 D 19 SPARE 1 0 " xY' 20 SPARE 20 20 LOAD /PH: (NEC CONNECTED) 21 SPARE MICROWAVE ;,;;;z;,. Y y 1 2 SPACE ONLY 22 TOTAL LOAD /PH: (NEC DEMAND) 20 20 1 1 (WR) TEMP. CONTROL (LINK) TELEPHONE 23 SPACE ONLY ' " "°°'° " °'° " ' " ° "° °°°'••' °" °" °'• ". ° °' ' °'° °° r °1° ..,' '.,.. . , . • r ° " ' . ` ^ [ . • 'L [ ^ 0 . # >ie.x D ---- - -- ,f.. » SPACE ONLY 24 WATER HEATER : ;, ��:�;: 25 SPACE ONLY D r : r rx # r,r :, iair , • »•»•, •; lw fir•,;;,;;, #;;,; 1,500 : : !r -' #: r AIM SPACE ONLY 26 SPARE 26 27 SPACE ONLY 27 MMI 0 mom" y yl €# ' 0 `y 20 20 1 1 SPACE ONLY 28 > Frcx ... ; �( 4, 1,200 2013 20 20 SPACE ONLY 30 28 30 29 SPACE ONLY 29 ;H 0 0 31 SPACE ONLY 20 0 0 I%'x SPACE ONLY 32 SPARE 32 0 x;� 33 SPACE ONLY SPARE 20 1 0 £ i , - 0 "" D s I; ,4 ; ' SPACE ONLY 34 SPACE ONLY 34 35 SPACE ONLY 35 SPARE } ''~ `.ffFrcf I:€ :III`. a 1 SPACE ONLY 36 SPACE ONLY 36 37 SPACE ONLY 37 0 3 € I €II1I? SPACE ONLY 38 SPACE ONLY 38 _ 39 SPACE ONLY 39 T EE i nn... , r, #r # „k.0 J j nr n »x # " . t 0 0 SPACE ONLY SPACE ONLY 40 42 % # ` SPACE ONLY 41 SPACE ONLY 41 LOAD /PH: (NEC CONNECTED) 4,434 4,314 3,124 TOTAL VA: 14,840 VA LCL @ 25% PER PHASE 1,109 1,079 781 TOTAL AMPS: 41 A TOTAL LOAD /PH: (NEC DEMAND) 5,543 5,393 3,905 NOTES: ALL CIRCUITS BREAKERS TO BE 20 AMP, 1 -POLE UNLESS 011 NOTED. BREAKER OPTIONS: ACTUAL LOAD A 4,434 kW NEC CONNECTED TOTALS A 5,543 kW BABR - SOLENOID OPERATED BABR B 4,314 kW B 5,393 kW LO - HANDLE LOCK -OFF DEVICE C 3,124 kW C 3,905 kW ST -SHUNT TRIP TOTAL 11,872 kW TOTAL 14,840 kW AUX - AUXILIARY CONTACTS PA- HANDLE PADLOCK ATTACHMENT (ALL PHASES SHALL BE BALANCED WITH 7% USING ACTUAL LOAD TOTALS) GFCI - GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT HACR - HEATING, NC & REFRIGERATION LCL - CONTINUOUS LOAD PANELBOARD B LOCATION: WR ENCLOSURE (IFS) VOLTAGE 120/208V., 3PH, 4W MOUNTING SURFACE 90A M.C.B BUS RATING 100A A.I.C.: 10,000A LCL LTG ZONE CCT NO. 1 LOAD DESCRIPTION CB LOAD CB LOAD DESCRIPTION U 0 U LTG ZONE LCL AMP POLE A B C AMP POLE 3.0 -- ROLLING GRILLE 20 1 1, 600 360 fir# wH :;„ ;gr;" ,,: Ur, 20 1 HAND STEAMER RCPT. 3 C 3 HEAT , , , , P 4 #12 THHN 1#12 G T 3 SENSORMATIC 20 1 SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW 1,440 360 z I11 >�...n,:l<. i ,. } 20 20 1 1 HAND STEAMER RCPT. HAND STEAMER RCPT. 4 6 C C 1/2" 5 CASH WRAP RCPT 20 1 , 1 1. # :' 54° 360 277/480V, 30 1.0 7 CASH WRAP RCPT 20 1 540 360,. »T • <�H 20 1 HAND STEAMER RCPT. 8 C 277/480V, 30 _.� 6.000 ELEC. HEAT 9 CASH WRAP IG 20 20 1 1HH #r l • : = 900 900 - 3; 20 20 1 1 KITTY CORNER RCPT LE SA S AREA RCPT 10 12 C C :... ..:...:: x i % Att : . ° 900 ** NEC ARTICLE 220-42 REQUIREMENT (200VA PER FOOT OR ACTUAL CONNECTED) * ** NEC ARTICLE 220-42 REQURIEMENT (150VA/2FT OR ACTUAL CONNECTED) 11 MANAGER RCPT :720 -:;; "' is: rx:gi = MINIMUM FEEDER AMPERAGE 13 MANAGER RCPT IG 20 1 #° : : I ' 720<;. I•x',� 20 1 SALES AREA RCPT 14 C PAGING SYSTEM 20 1 : 0 ... (. 360 11 ..::. 720 20 1 STOCK ROOM RCPT 16 5 SPACE 17 SOUND SYSTEM 20 1 �� tl ;800 'camp 540 20 1 RESTROOM RCPT 18 19 REFRIGERATOR 20 1 1'2000„ 20 1 DRINKING FOUNTAIN 20 LOAD /PH: (NEC CONNECTED) 21,276 21,106 21 MICROWAVE 20 20 1 2 H 1,200 500 : xx„•x � . :m ::.;.: O;' � =;;.<.:. TOTAL LOAD /PH: (NEC DEMAND) 20 20 1 1 (WR) TEMP. CONTROL (LINK) TELEPHONE 22 24 ' " "°°'° " °'° " ' " ° "° °°°'••' °" °" °'• ". ° °' ' °'° °° r °1° ..,' '.,.. . , . • r ° " ' . ` ^ [ . • 'L [ ^ 0 j,,,,1, , 5°13 360 23 WATER HEATER : ;, ��:�;: 25 , • »•»•, •; lw fir•,;;,;;, #;;,; 1,500 : : !r -' #: r AIM 20 1 SPARE 26 27 HAND DRYER 20 20 1 1 ,;, .HI • . ' "" 1 ,200 18 �: > Frcx ... ; �( 4, 1,200 2013 20 20 1 1 ACES FACP 28 30 29 HAND DRYER 31 SPARE 20 1 0 I%'x 20 1 SPARE 32 33 SPARE 20 1 "" D s I; ,4 ; ' SPACE ONLY 34 35 SPARE 20 1 nm,I 0 SPACE ONLY 36 37 SPACE ONLY 0 �I� I # f. ' D sf zw Ys: En SPACE ONLY 38 _ 39 SPACE ONLY ;,FF. ;;r :� 0 % # ` SPACE ONLY 40 41 SPACE ONLY : - ¥:;'€ „.' „fool r 0 0 SPACE ONLY 42 LOAD /PH: (NEC CONNECTED) 7,780 7,760 7,120 TOTAL VA: 22,660 VA TOTAL AMPS: 63 A LCL © 25% PER PHASE 0 0 0 TOTAL LOAD /PH: (NEC DEMAND) 7,780 7,760 7,120 NOTES: ALL CIRCUITS BREAKERS TO BE 20 AMP, 1 -POLE UNLESS OTFEKNASE NOTED. ACTUAL LOAD A 7,780 kW NEC CONNECTED TOTALS A 7,780 kW B 7,760 kW B 7,760 kW C 7,120 kW C 7,120 kW TOTAL 22,660 kW TOTAL 22,660 kW (ALL PHASES SHALL BE BALANCE] WITH 7% USING ACTUAL LOAD TOTALS) BREAKER OPTIONS: BABR - SOLENOID OPERATED BABR LO - HANDLE LOCK -OFF DEVICE ST -SHUNT TRIP AUX- AUXILIARY CONTACTS PA- HANDLE PADLOCK ATTACHMENT GEC! - GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT HACR - HEATING, NC & REFRIGERATION LCL - CONTINUOUS LOAD ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DATA SYM. ITEM VOLTAGE HP. KW. F.L.A. FEEDERS TYPE OF CONN. BRANCH BREAKER DISC. SW. BUS/ FUSES REMARKS WIRE COND. n `'J WATER HEATER 208V, 10 -- 3.0 -- 2#12 THHN 1#12 G 1 / 2 " 'AC' TOGGLE SWITCH 20A -2P 1.0 -__ SEE NOTE NO. 1 BELOW Q FPVAV -1 (WITH HEATING) 3 -- 3 HEAT __ 4 #12 THHN 1#12 G 1 /2 " THRU UNIT DISC. SW. 15A -3P - - - -,f5 " 1 H � ;,f' � 2,518 SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW ® FPVAV -2 (WITH HEATING) 277/480V, __ EL E C. EC. HEAT __ 4#12 THHN 1#12 G 1/2" THRU UNIT DISC. SW. 15A -3P - -- - -- SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW ® FPVAV -3 (WITH HEATING) 277/480V, 30 1.0 6.000 HEAT __ 4 #12 THHN 1 #12 G 1/2" / THRU UNIT DISC. SW. 15A -3P 1.0 - -- SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW 5® FPVAV -4 (WITH HEATING) 277/480V, 30 _.� 6.000 ELEC. HEAT __ 4 #12 THHN 1#12 0 1/2" THRU UNIT DISC. SW. 15A -3P --- ___ SEE NOTE NO. 2 BELOW NOTE: TO BE FURNISHED BY LSD &C AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL SUPPLIER. 1. 'AC' TOGGLE SWITCH 2. DISCONNECT SWITCH PANELBOARD IFS LOCATION: WR ENCLOSURE (IFS) VOLTAGE 277/480V., 3PH, 4W MOUNTING SURFACE BUS RATING 400A NONE A.I.C.: 65,000A LCL LTG ZONE CCT NO. LOAD DESCRIPTION CB LOAD CB 7.708 LOAD DESCRIPTION CCT NO. LTG ZONE LCL AMP POLE B C AMP POLE 4.164 84 FT 150VA /2FT * ** 6.300 SHOW WINDOW �A� 1,065 g, x23 : ;l 2518 px 1.0 0.000 0.000 0 FT 200VA /FT ** 0.000 RECEPTACLES 8.820 1.0 8.820 1 FPVAV -1 15 3 -,f5 " 1 H � ;,f' � 2,518 15 3 1.856 FPVAV -2 2 AIR CONDITIONING* 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 1.0 * * ** 0.000 ELECTRIC H EATI N G * En; 1,065 fere 1 I , 1!H! 2,518 1.0 22.000 22.000 1.0 22.000 WATER HEATER 3.000 1.0 3.000 3.000 1.0 3.000 MISCELLANEOUS 2,185 .,- , rf:w:3 2,185 aff . 0 1.0 10.840 10.840 1.0 10.840 TOTAL 58.388 58.202 3 FPVAV -3 15 3 2 '„'I''" :f :: 2.185-=£s0 15 3 FPVAV-4 4 ** NEC ARTICLE 220-42 REQUIREMENT (200VA PER FOOT OR ACTUAL CONNECTED) * ** NEC ARTICLE 220-42 REQURIEMENT (150VA/2FT OR ACTUAL CONNECTED) * * ** 125% OF THE LARGEST MOTOR OR COMPRESSOR IN SYSTEM NEC DEMAND kW *1000 = MINIMUM FEEDER AMPERAGE SYSTEM VOLTAGE * 1.732 hµ.; },: ",` 2,185 2.185 76 A 480 *1.732 _ NEW 200A SERVICE 13.323 HIM , kir 5 SPACE 70 3 TRANSFORMER 45 KVA 6 11,025 LOAD /PH: (NEC CONNECTED) 21,276 21,106 18,978 TOTAL VA: {/14h TOTAL AMPS: 74 A LCL @ 25% PER PHASE TOTAL LOAD /PH: (NEC DEMAND) 21,276 21,106 18,978 NOTES ALL GRCUITS BREAKERS TO 8E20 AMP. 1 -POLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ACTUAL LOAD A 21,276kW NEC CONNECTED TOTALS A 21,276kW ° "°° B 21.106 kW B 21,106kW •° ° "'°,•. C 18,978 kW C 18,978 kW • ° TOTAL 61,359 kW TOTAL 61,359 kW .. .. (ALL PHASES SHALL BE BALANCED WITH 7% USING ACTUAL LOAD TOTALS) ° ' f , BREAKER OPTIONS: ' " "°°'° " °'° " ' " ° "° °°°'••' °" °" °'• ". ° °' ' °'° °° r °1° ..,' '.,.. . , . • r ° " ' . ` ^ [ . • 'L [ ^ 0 ELECTRICAL LOAD SUMMARY DESCRIPTION ACTUAL CONNECTED (kW /kVA) POWER FACTOR ACTUAL DEMAND (kVA) NEC CONNECTED (kW /kVA) NEC DEMAND FACTOR NEC DEMAND (kVA) LIGHTING 7.708 1.0 7.708 7.708 1.25 9.635 TRACK UGHTING 4.164 1.0 4.164 4.164 84 FT 150VA /2FT * ** 6.300 SHOW WINDOW 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 0 FT 200VA /FT ** 0.000 RECEPTACLES 8.820 1.0 8.820 8,820 1.13[ NG 0.5 REMAINING 8.820 MOTORS 1.856 0.9 1.670 1.856 1.25 2.320 AIR CONDITIONING* 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 1.0 * * ** 0.000 ELECTRIC H EATI N G * 22.000 1.0 22.000 22.000 1.0 22.000 WATER HEATER 3.000 1.0 3.000 3.000 1.0 3.000 MISCELLANEOUS 10.840 1.0 10.840 10.840 1.0 10.840 TOTAL 58.388 58.202 58.388 uuuu 81:1E11:1 62.915 NOTES: * USE GREATER LOAD OF THE TWO CATAGORIES ** NEC ARTICLE 220-42 REQUIREMENT (200VA PER FOOT OR ACTUAL CONNECTED) * ** NEC ARTICLE 220-42 REQURIEMENT (150VA/2FT OR ACTUAL CONNECTED) * * ** 125% OF THE LARGEST MOTOR OR COMPRESSOR IN SYSTEM NEC DEMAND kW *1000 = MINIMUM FEEDER AMPERAGE SYSTEM VOLTAGE * 1.732 62.915 *1000 76 A 480 *1.732 _ NEW 200A SERVICE TRANSFORMER LOAD SUMMARY DESCRI FMON ACTUAL CONNECTED (kW /kVA) POWER FACTOR ACTUAL DEMAND (kVA) NEC CONNECTED (kW /kVA) NEC DEMAND FACTOR NEC DEMAND (kVA) LIGHTING 11.872 1.0 11.872 11.872 1.25 14.840 RECEPTACLES 8.820 1.0 8.820 8.820 1.0c 10Kw 05 REMAINING 8 820 MOTORS 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 1.25 0.000 AIR CONDITIONING 0.000 1.0 0.000 0.000 1.0 0.000 WATER HEATER 3.000 1.0 3.000 3.000 1.0 3.000 MISCELLANEOUS 10.840 1.0 10.840 10.840 1.0 10.840 TOTAL USE 34.532 KVA480- 120/208V, 34.532 34.532 37.500 45 3 PHASE TRANSFORMER = 0 130 PANEL "B" 90A -3P MCB o 130 _ D co 7 co ]D ov jai ,O LL :]a cu 7 20 oi ]D oo ]o Dv 013 D m Irl 4 L 13 D[ 13 DE 13 13 13 0E -- 13 o 13 13[ [ 13 u 13 D[ 13 0[ 13DE 13 0 CI 13 13 E �� - -I IIIIIIIIMI Milli IIIIIIIIIIII�l�1 ]D CC ] U 0e MOM I m I 13 DE 13 U PANEL " A " 60A -3P MCB o 130 13 of 1 13 0E DD0 13 13 E i gINNI „,"L , EidElEld 0 DD `E Dm DE � 13 13 0E = 0 130 13 D i 0 130 13 DE : D co m oo E Baas uuuu 81:1E11:1 THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY 15 ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL POWER GENERAL NOTES 1. HVAC CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE "HACR" TYPE WHEN REQUIRED BY EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE PER N.E.C. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXACT K.A.I.C. RATING (BUILDING SERVICE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT) OF LANDLORDS DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. IF FOUND TO BE HIGHER THAN PANEL RATING, NOTIFY YOUR LSD &C PROJECT MANAGER IMMEDIATELY. 3. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BALANCE ALL PANELS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TO 7% ( + / -) BETWEEN PHASES: A /B, B /C, A /C, REGARDLESS OF CIRCUITING INDICATED. 4. PROPER CLEARANCE MUST BE MAINTAINED ABOUT ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PER N.E.C. FIELD VERIFY EXACT MOUNTING SPACE AVAILABLE IN ELECTRICAL ROOM /AREA PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 5. ALL PANEL BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE BOLT -ON TYPE. 6. ALL PANEL BUS BARS SHALL BE COPPER. 7. MOUNT A TYPEWRITTEN DIRECTORY BEHIND GLASS OR PLASTIC ON THE INSIDE OF EACH PANEL DOOR AND, ON THE DIRECTORY, SHOW THE CIRCUIT NUMBER AND COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF ALL OUTLETS ON EACH CIRCUIT. 8. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 9. ALL PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS AND LINE VOLTAGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FACTORY MARKED TO WARN QUALIFIED PERSONS OF POTENTIAL ELECTRIC ARC FLASH HAZARDS. MARKING SHALL BE LOCATED SO AS TO BE CLEARLY VISIBLE TO QUALIFIED PERSONS BEFORE EXAMINATION, ADJUSTING, SERVICING OR MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT. 10. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE SURE ENTIRE INSTALLATION CONFORMS TO N.E.C. 110.3 - EXAMINATION, IDENTIFICATION, INSTALLATION, AND USE OF EQUIPMENT. 11. SWITCHBOARDS, PANELBOARDS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, AND CONTACTORS ARE TO BE "LISTED" AND "IDENTIFIED" AS RATED FOR A MINIMUM OF 75'C CONDUCTOR TERMINATION. 12. IFS ENCLOSURE LIGHTING CONTROLS: SOLENOID OPERATED BABR BREAKERS ARE PROVIDED WITH IFS PANELS FOR STORE LIGHTING CONTROLS AND STOREFRONT SIGNS. SEE PANEL SCHEDULES FOR LIGHTING ZONE DESIGNATIONS (ie: ZONE A, 8, C, D) 13. IFS ENCLOSURE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS HEREIN DESCRIBED: 14. A. UNIT WILL BE SHIPPED TO PROJECT IN MULTIPLE SECTIONS AND THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OFF- LOADING OF EQUIPMENT, INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT FOR DAMAGE, VERIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT RECEIVED FOR PROPER STORAGE, SETTING AND MOVING OF EQUIPMENT INTO SPACE AS WELL AS REASSEMBLING OF SECTIONS INTO ONE COMPLETE UNIT PER MANUFACTURER'S DOCUMENTATION. B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL CONNECT ALL PROVIDED INTERCONNECTING CABLES BETWEEN SECTIONS AND TORQUE CONNECTIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. C. ALL CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE TELEPHONE /DATA SECTION AND HVAC CONTROL SECTION OF THE IFS ENCLOSURE WILL BE DONE BY OTHERS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF LOW VOLTAGE CONDUIT SYSTEM (IF REQUIRED BY CODE OR LANDLORD) INTO THESE SECTIONS ONLY. D. SWITCHBOARD WILL BE SHIPPED ON AN ENCLOSED SEMI - TRAILER. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MUST ARRANGE FOR A FORKLIFT TO OFF -LOAD AT JOB SITE. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL RECEIVE 24 NOTICE PRIOR TO DELIVERY. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL COSTS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL LOW VOLTAGE WIRING IN CONDUIT, AS PART OF BASE BID. DEMARC DEMOLITION NOTES THE G.C. SHALL NOT CUT THE MAIN TELEPHONE WIRES LEADING TO THE TERMINATION STRIP (DEMARC BLOCK) OR PHONE SYSTEM. 2. IF THE DEMARC IS TO BE RELOCATED, IT SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH LIMITED TECHNICAL SERVICES (LTS). THE PRIMARY CONTACT I5 BRENDEN SPIVEY AT 614 - 415 -4077, AND THE SECONDARY CONTACT IS ZELDA WARD AT 614 -415 -2160. 3. THE G.C. SHALL ALLOW ADEQUATE TIME FOR RELOCATION IN THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE. 4, IF THE WALL WITH THE TELEPHONE BLOCK IS SCHEDULED FOR DEMOLITION, THE ENTIRE BACKING PANEL SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE WALL (WITHOUT DISCONNECTING THE WIRING) AND IT SHALL BE SAFELY SECURED IN THE CEILING UNTIL IT CAN BE RELOCATED TO THE NEW AREA OR REINSTALLED ON WALL. 1. SERIES RATED NOTES MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER IN 'PANEL IFS' SHALL BE FULLY RATED TO PROVIDE AN INTERRUPTING RA OF 65,000 AMPS RMS. 2. MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER SHALL BE "SERIES" RATED WITH ALL OTHER FEEDER BREAKERS IN 'PANEL IFS' TO PROVIDE AN INTERRUPTING RATING OF 65,000 AMPS RMS. 3. PANELBOARDS OR OTHER EQUIPMENT THAT IS PROTECTED BY "SERIES" RATED OVERCURRENT PROTECTED DEVICES UPSTREAM SHALL BE MARKED WITH A PERMANENT LABEL THAT INDICATES THE SHORT- CIRCUIT RATING OF THE SERIES COMBINATION AND CALLS OUT THE SPECIFIC REPLACEMENT OVERCURRENT DEVICE(S) THAT CAN BE UTILIZED. ELECTRICAL RISER DIAGRAM, PANEL SCHEDULES, AND NOTES LO. Lighting Time Control Legend: A - Marketing Level Lighting Show Window Lights Show Window Receptacles Exterior Signage B - Stocking Stockroom (Non - Sales) Lighting C - Task Level 2/3 Sales Floor Lighting evenly distributed (preferably Down Lights) General Sales Floor Receptacles D - Sales Level Lighting Balance of Sales Floor Lighting Interior Display Lighting Display Cabinet Lighting Receptacles LANDLORD MAIN SWITCHBOARD (MS), 1200A, 277/480V, 30, 4W, 60HZ. FIELD VERIFY. IFS IS A SINGLE SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE THAT MEETS NEMA STAND PB -2 AND UL 891 (SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION). { EXISTING 2" CONDUIT WITH 4# 3/0 KCMIL THHN + 1 #6 CU G. NOTE: G.C. IS TO VERIFY LOCATION AND SIZE OF LANDLORD ELECTRICAL STUB -UP (IF EXISTING) PRIOR TO BEGINNING OF CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING OTHER RELATED WORKS. REFER TO FIELD SURVEY OR DESIGN CRITERIA. ,PLEASE LINE LANDLORD TENANT SPACE POINT WHERE TO INTERCEPT /EXTEND CONDUIT (SERVICE FEEDER) STUB -IN. PROVIDE PULL/CONNECTION BOX AS NECESSARY, SIZE AS PER CODE REQUIREMENTS. ASSUMED FAULT CURRENT IS 65,000 SYM AMPS AT LL PANEL. SEE SERIES RATED NOTE #1. EXISTING TENANT ELECTRICAL SERVICE METER COMPLETE WITH CT'S. FIELD VERIFY REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LANDLORD AND /OR UTILITY COMPANY, PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. EXISTING 200A, 277/480V, 30, TENANT MAIN DISCONNECT SWITCH WITH (3) 200 LPS -RK FUSES. FIELD VERIFY REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LANDLORD ENGINEER PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. TRANSFORMER AND PANEL FEEDER FURNISHED BY IFS MFGR. AS REQUIRED. E.C. TO MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO PANELBOARD (TYP.) ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO BALANCE TRANSFORMER TO SUPPLY 120V±3% AFTER ALL CONNECTIONS ARE MADE AND RUNNING. PROVIDE BALANCE SHEET TO THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER AT PUNCHLIST. APPROX. 20' -0 ". FIELD VERIFY EXACT DISTANCE PRIOR TO BID. L FPVAV -1 15A/3P 0 FPVAV -3 15A/3P 0 3 4 J • • 1 • • • 45 KVA E LO. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO EXTEND THE SERVICE FEEDER AS SHOWN, 2"C, 4# 3/0 KCMIL THHN + 1 #6 G. FIELD VERIFY. - FAULT CURRENT IS 63,105 SYM AMPS. rPANEL IFS; 277/480V; 30; 4W; 60HZ SUPPLY; 400A BUSS; 65,000 A.I.C. FPVAV -2 15A/3P 0 FPVAV -4 15A/3P 0 TRANSFORMER SPACE 70A 3P 5 LO. EE SERIES RATED NOTE #2. 3 #4 THHN ' el 6 + 1 113 F 3 + 1#8 XHHW r 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 r 1. 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 E.C. SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL A 3/4" CONDUIT AND PULLWIRE FROM DEMARC TO IFS ENCLOSURE. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 B -22 # 6 THHN GROUND CONDUCTOR (SYSTEM BONDING JUMPER) TO BLDG. STEEL, METAWC WATER PIPE AND /OR GROUND ROD PER N.E.C. AND LOCAL CODES. TELEPHONE /HVAC EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANEL REVIEWED FOR CODE NP A 70P NEC E N B -24 LO. LO. LO. FEB 2 0 Ma city Of Tukwila ILDING DIVI ION ROOF LINE LEVEL CEILING LINE PANEL HEIGHT, TOP OF IFS PANEL DEMARCATION POINT PROVIDED BY PHONE CO. (REFER TO DEMARC DEMOLITION NOTES). .C. TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL PLYWOOD SURFACE MOUNTED BACKBOARD ON WALL LOCATE ADJACENT TO IFS PANEL LECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL #6 THHN GROUND CONDUCTOR, TERMINATED AT GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR, CONFORMING TO N.E.C. 800.40 AND LOCAL UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. FINISH FLOOR LEVEL N.T.S. A LARSON B1NKLEY Larson Binkley, Inc. 6363 College Blvd., Suit Overland Park. Kansas 662 T 913 -383 -2621 913 - 383 -2831 nbinkley.com PYRIGHT 2007 U N 0) 1 0 Li 0 CC 0 C • INDICATES NO REVISION TO THIS SHEET DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: L 0 a g 2 co 1� REVISIONS: C : 8 3" !! !! g L1.1 j2�F HO Z = = , _ ° mow Zi a�J W b.�W LaJa �W 1" Gna2 a F O U N !La 3 ° °c a 2 3! o ° �io,� o��3 _� ° �i • W4JW0 �' W �0o�'Q' �W !! O vi --,aac+ w axc�W i • ° �w Ow =Odd = YC.I W= p, �, a 1- BdEC w �af4U7C 0 = � _ t1N s O 03 LA CO O Z 0 f. W if) La �o V.‘- ~IX Z W a_ COW V) 1_ W W a ll a ou, eti CL M W O W 0 Vl (OV7 0O J REQUIRED BY: DATE 1 BUILDING DEPARTMENT COMMENTS 01/25/08 rlt:t CITY O F' TUK',/VILA FEB 0 6 2008 PERMIT CENTER 12/14/2007 LJ W LJW GLB ELECTRICAL PANELS AND RISER DIAGRAM1 DRAWING NUMBER: 400 1